CCI Feasibility Study For 500 KV AC Underground Cables

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd
Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables

for use in the Edmonton region of Alberta, Canada
PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
TITLE:
FEASIBILITY STUDY FOR 500 kV AC UNDERGROUND CABLES

FOR USE IN THE EDMONTON REGION OF ALBERTA, CANADA
REPORT No:
ER 381
CUSTOMER:
AESO
AUTHORS:
Alan Williams BSc CEng MIET

Brian Gregory BSc CEng FIEE
DATE:
18 February 2010
INTRODUCTION
CCI has been engaged to perform a feasibility study into the use of 500 kV underground cables for the
Edmonton region of Alberta. The design requirements used within this study are generic and based on
those of the 500 kV 3,000 MW system known as the Heartland Project.
This document contains a description of the available cable technology, recommendations on the
feasibility of the cable technology and how underground cable technology needs to be developed so as
to be suitable for use in the Edmonton region.
Also included are:
Definitions and glossary (Section 16) for words that have been Capitalised.
An appendix recording individual studies, including:
Total cost estimates (in 2009 Canadian dollars) for nine scenarios comprising
different proportions of underground cable and overhead line, which were
provided by the Heartland Project Team (HPT) based on estimated cable system
costs provided by cable manufacturers and estimated civil cable installation costs
provided by HPT. HPT also provided the estimated costs of the overhead line and
all of the other equipment required for each scenario.
Preliminary project schedules, which were provided by HPT.
Distribution:
AESO, HPT, CCI

Page 1 of 310
Cable Consulting International Ltd

Registered in England and Wales No. 4234974
Registered office: 74 College Road, Maidstone, Kent, ME15 6SL, United Kingdom
Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

use in the Edmonton region of Alberta, Canada

United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................................................... 1
1
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY............................................................................................................. 13
1.1
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 13
1.2
Method of approach ................................................................................................................ 14
1.3
Technical feasibility findings.................................................................................................. 16
1.3.1
Choice of cable technology............................................................................................. 16
1.3.2
500 kV XLPE cable system: supply capability and experience...................................... 17
1.3.3
Choice of installation technology ................................................................................... 18
1.3.4
500 kV Study Project size............................................................................................... 19
1.3.5
Project specific requirements .......................................................................................... 19
1.3.6
Low ambient temperatures.............................................................................................. 20
1.3.7
Proving the performance of the cable system before it is supplied ................................ 21
1.4
Estimates of reliability ............................................................................................................ 22
1.5
Estimates of capital cost.......................................................................................................... 24
1.5.1
Scenarios considered for costing..................................................................................... 26
1.5.2
Estimated capital cost: comparison between scenarios................................................... 28
1.5.3
Estimated Net Present Value: comparison between scenarios........................................ 29
1.5.1
Summary of cost estimates ............................................................................................. 30
1.5.2
Cost differences between cable and overhead line ......................................................... 31
1.6
500 kV Study Project duration................................................................................................ 32
1.7
Power losses............................................................................................................................ 33
1.7.1
Relationship of power loss to power transfer for the 500 kV Study Project .................. 34
1.7.2
Cumulative power losses for the 500 kV Study Project ................................................. 36
1.7.3
Estimated NPV of cumulative power losses ................................................................... 37
1.8
Recommendations for next steps ............................................................................................ 38
1.8.1
Study of end to end reliability and availability ............................................................... 39
1.8.2
System and design studies............................................................................................... 39
1.8.3
Carry out additional engineering studies, as required..................................................... 39
2
REQUIREMENTS FOR UNDERGROUND POWER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR THE
500 KV STUDY PROJECT.................................................................................................................... 44
2.1
Functional requirement: .......................................................................................................... 44
2.1.1
Functional requirement: power transmission.................................................................. 44
2.1.1
Functional requirement: ambient temperatures............................................................... 46
2.2
Scenarios considered............................................................................................................... 48
3
BASIC DESCRIPTION OF 500 KV AC UNDERGROUND TECHNOLOGY ........................... 56
3.1
Alternating current transmission system................................................................................. 56
3.2
Voltage, current and power..................................................................................................... 56
3.2.1
Voltage ............................................................................................................................ 56
3.2.2
Power .............................................................................................................................. 58
3.2.3
Current ............................................................................................................................ 58
Page 2 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
3.3
Component parts of the cable.................................................................................................. 59
3.4
Cable system ........................................................................................................................... 61
3.4.1
Component parts of the cable system ............................................................................. 65
3.4.2
Cable spans ..................................................................................................................... 65
3.4.3
Cable Terminations ......................................................................................................... 66
3.4.4
Cable Joints ..................................................................................................................... 68
3.4.5
Bonding equipment. ........................................................................................................ 69
3.5
Ancillary equipment................................................................................................................ 71
3.6
Hydraulic system for SCFF cable systems only ..................................................................... 72
3.7
Thermal design........................................................................................................................ 72
3.8
Thermomechanical design ...................................................................................................... 72
3.9
Installation design ................................................................................................................... 73
3.9.1
Cable installation............................................................................................................. 73
3.9.2
Assembly of joints and terminations............................................................................... 76
3.10 Route protection and identification......................................................................................... 78
3.11 Forced cooling......................................................................................................................... 79
3.12 Operation, maintenance and repair ......................................................................................... 81
3.13 Testing..................................................................................................................................... 81
3.13.1 Proving tests.................................................................................................................... 82
3.13.2 Quality tests..................................................................................................................... 85
3.14 Permissible length of an AC underground cable circuit ......................................................... 87
4
STATE OF THE ART FOR 500 KV UNDERGROUND POWER TRANSMISSION ................ 90
4.1
Introduction............................................................................................................................. 90
4.2
Self-Contained Fluid Filled Cables (SCFF)............................................................................ 91
4.3
Cross-Linked Polyethylene Cable (XLPE) ............................................................................. 94
4.4
Advantages of extruded cross-linked polyethylene cables ..................................................... 96
4.4.1
XLPE cable has the advantage over the SCFF type of : ................................................. 96
4.4.2
XLPE cable technology .................................................................................................. 97
4.5
Accessories for XLPE cable systems...................................................................................... 98
4.6
Cumulative service experience of XLPE cable systems ....................................................... 105
4.7
Electrical tests for XLPE cable systems ............................................................................... 111
4.7.1
Importance of prequalification tests for EHV XLPE cables......................................... 112
4.7.2
Prequalification test recommendations for the 500 kV Study Project .......................... 113
4.8
Low temperature operation ................................................................................................... 115
4.8.1
Ambient temperature levels for the Edmonton region of Alberta ................................ 115
4.8.2
Low temperature risks................................................................................................... 118
4.9
Types of cable installation .................................................................................................... 123
4.9.1
Direct Buried Installation.............................................................................................. 123
4.9.2
Duct-manhole system.................................................................................................... 126
4.9.3
Tunnel Installation ........................................................................................................ 128
4.9.4
Service experience with different methods of installation at 400 kV and 500 kV ....... 129
4.9.5
Service experience with forced cooled systems............................................................ 130
Page 3 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
4.10 Gas insulated lines ................................................................................................................ 130

4.10.1 Description of GIL ........................................................................................................ 131
4.10.2 GIL Experience ............................................................................................................. 134
4.10.3 GIL: Advantages and Disadvantages ............................................................................ 136
4.11 High Temperature Superconducting Cable........................................................................... 137
4.11.1 Superconductivity ......................................................................................................... 137
4.11.2 Low temperature superconductors ................................................................................ 138
4.11.3 High temperature superconductors ............................................................................... 139
4.11.4 Construction of a conceptual HTSC cable.................................................................... 140
4.11.5 HTSC Cable System Experience .................................................................................. 144
4.11.6 Installation of a conceptual HTSC cable system for the Study project ........................ 147
5
ESTIMATES OF RELIABILITY................................................................................................. 152
5.1
Repair times for 500 kV XLPE cable ................................................................................... 153
5.2
Fault statistics for underground 500 kV XLPE cable ........................................................... 153
5.2.1
Cable system fault statistics .......................................................................................... 153
5.2.2
Application of fault statistics to the 500 kV Study Project scenarios........................... 155
5.2.3
500 kV Study Project fault rate..................................................................................... 159
5.2.4
Types of cable faults ..................................................................................................... 159
5.3
Overhead line fault statistics ................................................................................................. 160
6
OVERVIEW OF POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS OF UNDERGROUNDING.. 161
7
PRELIMINARY 500 KV UNDERGROUND CABLE SCOPING STUDY ............................... 163
7.1
Description of the cable type used for the preliminary scoping study.................................. 163
7.2
Cable installation options...................................................................................................... 166
7.3
General installation configuration......................................................................................... 167
7.4
Preliminary scoping study: duct-manhole system ................................................................ 169
7.4.1
Configuration of cables in ducts ................................................................................... 169
7.4.2
Duct for scoping study .................................................................................................. 170
7.4.3
Trench filling................................................................................................................. 171
7.5
Preliminary scoping study: Cable installation direct in the ground ...................................... 172
7.6
Minimum spacing between groups of cables of each circuit ................................................ 175
7.7
Installation Swathe and spacing between circuits,.............................................................. 176
7.8
Sample ampacity calculation (XLPE cable) ......................................................................... 178
7.9
Stabilised backfill.................................................................................................................. 180
7.10 Effect of obstructions on the route ........................................................................................ 181
7.10.1 Methods of maintaining the ampacity where the cable depth must be increased. ........ 181
7.10.2 Installation at increased phase spacing. ........................................................................ 181
7.10.3 Installation in tunnels. ................................................................................................... 184
7.10.4 Further methods of obstruction crossing....................................................................... 185
7.11 Cable lengths between joint bays.......................................................................................... 186
7.11.1 Outline reel dimensions ................................................................................................ 186
7.11.2 Cable reel transportation study ..................................................................................... 188
7.12 Manholes and joint bays ....................................................................................................... 188
Page 4 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.13 Tunnels.................................................................................................................................. 190

7.13.1 Tunnel ampacity............................................................................................................ 190
7.13.2 Cable installation in tunnels.......................................................................................... 191
7.13.3 Tunnel cross sections .................................................................................................... 192
7.14 Staging of the cable installation ............................................................................................ 194
7.15 Staged duct manhole cable installation................................................................................. 196
7.15.1 Installation layout.......................................................................................................... 196
7.15.2 Reasons for proposal..................................................................................................... 197
7.16 Staged cable installation direct in the ground ....................................................................... 198
7.17 Staged cable installation in deep tunnel................................................................................ 199
7.18 Staged cable installation in cut and cover tunnel.................................................................. 200
7.18.2 Reasons ......................................................................................................................... 202
7.19 Alternative staging arrangements.......................................................................................... 202
7.20 Alternative SCFF cable type for scoping study .................................................................... 203
7.20.1 SCFF cable power losses .............................................................................................. 205
7.20.2 SCFF LPP cable installation configuration................................................................... 205
7.21 Cable system routine maintenance........................................................................................ 207
7.21.1 Maintenance for 500 kV XLPE cable systems ............................................................. 207
7.21.2 Recommended routine maintenance on 500 kV SCFF cable systems.......................... 210
7.22 500 kV cable system spares and repairs................................................................................ 211
8
ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD PROFILE .................................................................................. 213
9
DESIGNS PROPOSALS FROM PROSPECTIVE SUPPLIERS: SYSTEM DESIGN ............... 215
9.1
Inquiry and questionnaire documents ................................................................................... 215
9.1.1
Inquiry document .......................................................................................................... 215
9.2
Requests for technical information from prospective suppliers of 500 kV cable systems ... 216
9.3
System designs proposed by prospective suppliers .............................................................. 219
9.3.1
Duct-Manhole systems.................................................................................................. 222
9.3.2
Direct buried systems.................................................................................................... 222
9.3.3
Tunnel systems.............................................................................................................. 222
9.3.4
Sheath bonding systems ................................................................................................ 222
9.4
Designs proposals from prospective suppliers: cable ........................................................... 223
9.4.1
XLPE cable designs: general ........................................................................................ 224
9.4.2
Conductors for XLPE cable designs ............................................................................. 224
9.4.3
Core design for XLPE cable designs ............................................................................ 224
9.4.4
Sheath design for XLPE cable designs ......................................................................... 224
9.4.5
Distributed Temperature Sensing.................................................................................. 225
9.4.6
Jacket design for XLPE cable designs .......................................................................... 226
Page 5 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
9.4.7
SCFF cable designs....................................................................................................... 226
9.4.8
GIL design..................................................................................................................... 226
9.4.9
Cable design types proposed......................................................................................... 227
9.5
Cable electrical values provided by suppliers....................................................................... 237
9.6
Splice designs proposed by prospective suppliers ................................................................ 238
10
TRANSITION STATION......................................................................................................... 240
11
POWER LOSSES ..................................................................................................................... 242
11.1.1 Relationship of power loss to power transfer for the 500 kV Study Project ................ 242
11.1.2 Cumulative power losses for the 500 kV Study Project ............................................... 244
11.1.3 Estimated Net Present Value of Losses ........................................................................ 246
12
GENERIC COST STUDY FOR THE 500KV STUDY PROJECT ......................................... 248
12.1 Cable system unit costs ......................................................................................................... 248
12.2 End-to-end estimated capital costs for the 65 km route length............................................. 249
12.3 Capital cost estimates: comparison of components in each scenario.................................... 250
12.4 Estimated Net Present Value of the life cycle costs for the 65 km route length................... 255
12.5 Comparison of the cost of each scenario ............................................................................ 256
12.6 Differences between the estimated cost of underground cable and overhead line ............... 257
12.7 Sensitivity studies on the estimated capital cost of the cable system ................................... 261
12.7.1 Sensitivity: Effect on cost of SCFF cable ..................................................................... 261
12.7.2 Sensitivity: Canadian Dollar value falls against other currencies by 20% ................. 261
12.7.3 Sensitivity: Metal prices change by 50%...................................................................... 263
13
500 kV STUDY PROJECT DURATION................................................................................. 265
13.1 Cable ..................................................................................................................................... 266
13.2 Transition station................................................................................................................... 266
14
UNDERGROUNDING THE ENTIRE 65 KM ROUTE LENGTH......................................... 267
14.1 Scenarios considered............................................................................................................. 267
14.2 Technical limitations............................................................................................................. 267
14.2.1 Voltage control.............................................................................................................. 267
14.2.2 Reduction in useful power transmission capacity because of cable charging current .. 267
14.3 Supplier capability ................................................................................................................ 268
14.4 Cost estimates ....................................................................................................................... 269
14.5 Cable system fault statistics for 65 km underground route length........................................ 269
15
500 kV STUDY PROJECT RISKS .......................................................................................... 271
15.1 Technical risks ...................................................................................................................... 271
15.1.1 Inability of the accessories to meet the required minimum winter design temperatures.
271
Remedial Action: .......................................................................................................................... 271
15.1.2 Uncertainty of the winter minimum design temperature .............................................. 271
15.1.3 Failure of the joints to demonstrate reliability in the Proving Tests............................. 272
15.1.4 Failure of the cable system to achieve reliable service performance............................ 272
15.1.5 Inability to repair the circuit at winter minimum ambient temperature:....................... 273
15.2 Contractual risks ................................................................................................................... 274
Page 6 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
15.2.1 Failure to attribute responsibility: ................................................................................. 274

15.3 Schedule risks ....................................................................................................................... 274
15.3.1 Delayed development:................................................................................................... 274
15.3.2 Delayed manufacture: ................................................................................................... 275
15.3.3 Delayed installation and commissioning: ..................................................................... 275
15.3.4 Damage to cable during delivery or installation ........................................................... 276
15.3.5 Commissioning test failure and repair .......................................................................... 277
15.4 Common mode failure .......................................................................................................... 278
15.4.1 Repeated latent defect in manufactured cable or accessories ....................................... 278
15.4.2 Repeated jointing error.................................................................................................. 279
15.4.3 Third party damage. ...................................................................................................... 279
15.4.4 Fire in tunnel. ................................................................................................................ 280
15.5 Collateral Damage................................................................................................................. 280
15.5.1 Failure of one cable causes damage to another............................................................. 280
15.5.2 Failure of one joint causes damage to another.............................................................. 281
15.5.3 Failure of one termination causes damage to another................................................... 281
15.5.4 Testing of one cable system causes damage to another ................................................ 281
15.5.5 Repair of one cable causes damage to another ............................................................. 282
15.6 Cost risks............................................................................................................................... 282
16
DEFINITIONS AND GLOSSARY .......................................................................................... 284
FEASIBILITY STUDY REFERENCES .............................................................................................. 299
APPENDICES ...................................................................................................................................... 304
1
Appendix: Overhead line performance and statistics ................................................................... 304
2
Appendix : Total capital cost estimate for each scenario.............................................................. 304
3
Appendix : Economic comparison of scenarios for the 500 kV underground cable feasibility report
304
4
Appendix: Project schedule .......................................................................................................... 304
5
Appendix: System study (reactor requirements, voltage profiles and losses) .............................. 305
6
Appendix: Generic crossings route maps: East TUC.................................................................... 305
7
Appendix: Generic crossings route maps: West TUC .................................................................. 306
8
Appendix: Transmission System Requirements ........................................................................... 306
9
Appendix: Analysis of the minimum winter temperatures recorded on the 240kV DESS circuit in
Edmonton in 2009................................................................................................................................. 306
10
Appendix: The Damage Prevention Process In Alberta ........................................................... 306
11
Appendix: Potential overview of environmental effects of undergrounding............................ 307
12
Appendix: Cable reel transportation study of feasibility and costs .......................................... 307
13
Appendix: Magnetic fields for cable and overhead line ........................................................... 307
14
AESO introduction letter for CCI ............................................................................................ 307
15
500kV Heartland inquiry .......................................................................................................... 307
16
Appendix: 500kV Heartland transmission project response template ...................................... 308
17
Appendix : AIS transition station scope of work...................................................................... 308
18
Appendix: Heartland underground construction: construction overview ................................. 308
Page 7 of 310


United Kingdom
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
ER 381
19th February 2010
Appendix : Heartland underground line-civil estimate............................................................. 308

Appendix: Heartland underground crossing requirements..................................................... 309
Appendix : Heartland overhead line scope of work.................................................................. 309
Appendix : Substation 1 scope of work .................................................................................... 309
Appendix : Substation 2 scope of work .................................................................................... 309
Appendix: Owners risk briefing................................................................................................ 310
Appendix: Overhead and underground line maintenance......................................................... 310
Appendix: Drawings of termination stations, cable trenches, and obstruction crossings......... 310
TABLE OF FIGURES
Figure 1. 500 kV Study project estimated capital cost main components ........................................... 25
Figure 2 Comparison of scenario trench cross sections.......................................................................... 27
Figure 3. Estimated capital costs in 2009 dollars.................................................................................... 29
Figure 4 Estimated NPV of the life cycle costs for each scenario .......................................................... 30
Figure 5. Power losses for selected scenarios at different levels of transmitted power.......................... 35
Figure 6. Overhead line: Normal operation ............................................................................................ 45
Figure 7. Overhead line: Contingency operation .................................................................................... 46
Figure 8 Comparison of scenario trench cross sections.......................................................................... 50
Figure 9 Scenario 1A.10 and 1B.20........................................................................................................ 52
Figure 10 Scenario 2A.10 and 2B.20...................................................................................................... 52
Figure 13 Scenario 5A.65 ....................................................................................................................... 54
Figure 14 Scenario 5B.65........................................................................................................................ 54
Figure 15 Scenario 6 : No cable.............................................................................................................. 55
Figure 16 Key to scenario diagrams ....................................................................................................... 55
Figure 17. Three parallel lines or cables are required to form an AC circuit ......................................... 56
Figure 18. Relative voltages of a 500 kV system ................................................................................... 57
Figure 19. Voltages between individual 500 kV cables.......................................................................... 57
Figure 20. Voltage across the insulation of a 500 kV cable ................................................................... 58
Figure 21. Component parts of a 500 kV XLPE cable ........................................................................... 59
Figure 22. The component parts of a cable system................................................................................. 61
Figure 23. Two circuits comprising four groups of underground cables................................................ 62
Figure 24. 400 kV transition station with terminal gantry..................................................................... 63
Figure 25. 400 kV transition station with terminal tower ....................................................................... 64
Figure 26. Two overhead line circuits connect to four groups of underground cable ............................ 64
Figure 27. Delivery with cable reel axle cross-wise ............................................................................... 65
Figure 28. Delivery with cable reel axle length-wise ............................................................................. 65
Figure 29. Loading cable reels in ships hold ......................................................................................... 66
Figure 30. Outdoor cable terminations ................................................................................................... 67
Page 8 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 31, Cable terminations into gas immersed switchgear ................................................................ 68

Figure 32. A joint on a 400 kV XLPE cable prepared for burial ............................................................ 69
Figure 33. Part assembly of a joint on 240 kV XLPE cable inside a vault in Edmonton ....................... 69
Figure 34. An above-ground link box housing the components for a cross bonded position................. 70
Figure 35. Above ground link kiosks connected to 400 kV underground cable..................................... 71
Figure 36. Duct-manhole cable installation ............................................................................................ 73
Figure 37. Direct buried cable installation.............................................................................................. 74
Figure 38. Typical formations for cables installed in ducts.................................................................... 74
Figure 39. Typical formations for direct-buried cables .......................................................................... 75
Figure 40. Preparation of cable trench crossing agricultural land .......................................................... 75
Figure 41. Jointing in progress in clean conditions ................................................................................ 77
Figure 42. Completed joints.................................................................................................................... 77
Figure 43. Temporary cable termination assembly structure.................................................................. 78
Figure 44: 400 kV cable system being prepared..................................................................................... 83
Figure 45: A Cable being prepared for type approval ............................................................................ 83
Figure 46. High voltage AC commissioning test equipment .................................................................. 86
Figure 47. Three reactors located in a substation.................................................................................... 87
Figure 48. SCFF 525 kV 1,000 mm2 cable commissioned in Grand Coulee Dam in 1976.................... 92
Figure 49. SCFF LPP 2,500 mm2 cable, similar to that commissioned in Japan in 1994 ...................... 93
Figure 50. 500 kV XLPE cable ............................................................................................................... 94
Figure 51. Increase of cable shield stresses at higher transmission voltages.......................................... 95
Figure 52. Chart of XLPE cable design stress with system voltage. ...................................................... 99
Figure 53. Extrusion moulded joint (EMJ) schematic ............................................................................ 99
Figure 54. 500 kV XLPE cable and extrusion moulded joints in a tunnel .......................................... 100
Figure 55. One-piece joint (OPJ) schematic ......................................................................................... 101
Figure 56. 275 kV EPR OPJ in manufacture ........................................................................................ 101
Figure 57. 400 kV silicone OPJ in manufacture and routine test ........................................................ 102
Figure 58. Prefabricated composite joint (PJ) schematic...................................................................... 103
Figure 59. Prefabricated composite joint (PJ) during assembly ........................................................... 103
Figure 60. 500 kV PJ joints on test ....................................................................................................... 105
Figure 61, Outdoor termination with capacitor stress control .............................................................. 120
Figure 62. Outdoor termination with prefabricated composite, premoulded stress cone ..................... 121
Figure 63. Typical direct buried 400kV cable trench containing one Group of Cables ....................... 124
Figure 64. Component parts of a 400 kV gas insulated line ................................................................. 131
Figure 65. Two groups of 275 kV gas insulated line installed in a tunnel........................................... 134
Figure 66. One group of 400 kV gas insulated line installed on stilts in a substation .......................... 134
Figure 67. Cross section of a conceptual HTSC cable.......................................................................... 141
Figure 68. 13 kV, three phase, concentric HTSC cable construction ................................................... 144
Figure 69. Conceptual arrangement of an HTS cable in buried trough ................................................ 149
Figure 70. Conceptual cross section dimensions of a HTSC buried, three phase group / trench
arrangement .................................................................................................................................... 150
Figure 71. Conceptual installation swathe dimensions for a HTS cable trenches ................................ 151
Page 9 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 72: Construction and dimensions of Scoping Study 500 kV, 2500 mm, XLPE cable............. 164
Figure 73 Scenario 1 ............................................................................................................................. 167
Figure 74: Preliminary duct block arrangement ................................................................................... 169
Figure 75: Preliminary direct burial arrangement................................................................................. 172
Figure 76: Trench with sloped sides ..................................................................................................... 174
Figure 77: Spacing between Groups of Cables ..................................................................................... 176
Figure 78: Arrangement of circuits and construction Swathe.............................................................. 177
Figure 79: Photograph of construction swathe for four trenches.......................................................... 178
Figure 80: Sample ampacity calculation ............................................................................................... 179
Figure 81: Required phase spacing at increased laying depth .............................................................. 182
Figure 82: Requirement for cable installed by trenchless method........................................................ 183
Figure 83: Typical directional drill arrangement, plan view ................................................................ 183
Figure 84: Typical naturally ventilated tunnel ...................................................................................... 184
Figure 85: Compound containing two headhouses for naturally ventilated tunnels............................. 185
Figure 86: Typical reel dimensions and weight .................................................................................... 186
Figure 87: Conventional delivery ......................................................................................................... 187
Figure 88: Longitudinal reel on lowboy ............................................................................................... 187
Figure 89: Plan of typical joint bay....................................................................................................... 188
Figure 90: Longitudinal elevation of typical joint bay ......................................................................... 189
Figure 91: Elevation cross section across typical joint bay .................................................................. 189
Figure 92:Tunnel temperatures over a 10 year period .......................................................................... 191
Figure 93: Typical tunnel cable clamp (cleat) for a sagged system...................................................... 192
Figure 94:Tunnel cross section: deep tunnel......................................................................................... 193
Figure 95:Tunnel cross section: cut and cover...................................................................................... 193
Figure 96 Scenario 2, one group per circuit installed initially (black), the second later ...................... 194
Figure 97: Staging summary ................................................................................................................. 195
Figure 98: Scenario 2, staging for the duct-manhole system................................................................ 196
Figure 99:Scenario 2, staging for cables direct buried in the ground ................................................... 198
Figure 100: Scenario 2, staging for cables installed in deep tunnels .................................................... 199
Figure 101: Scenario 2, staging for cables installed in cut and cover tunnels ...................................... 201
Figure 102: Alternative SCFF 500 kV cable ........................................................................................ 204
Figure 103. Underground cable: design requirement............................................................................ 220
Figure 104 Cable spacing...................................................................................................................... 221
Figure 105. Cross bonding schematic ................................................................................................... 223
Figure 106. Detail of cross bonding components ................................................................................. 223
Figure 107: Proposed 500 kV design: extruded lead sheath ................................................................. 228
Figure 108: Proposed 500 kV design: welded aluminium sheath......................................................... 229
Figure 109: Proposed 500 kV design: corrugated aluminium sheath ................................................... 230
Figure 110: Proposed 500 kV design: copper wire screen and corrugated stainless steel sheath......... 231
Figure 111: Proposed 500 kV design: copper wire screen and lead sheath.......................................... 232
Figure 112: Proposed 500 kV design: wire screen and smooth aluminium sheath .............................. 233
Figure 113: Proposed 500 kV design: copper wire screen and aluminium laminate............................ 234
Page 10 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 114: Proposed 500 kV design: self contained fluid filled ......................................................... 235
Figure 115: Proposed 500 kV design: GIL ........................................................................................... 236
Figure 116 One piece prefabricated joint (OPJ) ................................................................................... 239
Figure 117. Prefabricated composite joint (PJ)..................................................................................... 239
Figure 118. Indoor GIS switchgear....................................................................................................... 240
Figure 119. Power losses for selected scenarios at different levels of transmitted power.................... 243
Figure 120. Power losses for an average load of 457.3 MW ................................................................ 245
Figure 121. Estimated capital cost components in $M for 4 groups of Cables, 10 km long ................ 251
Figure 125. Estimated capital cost components in $M for all overhead line (Scenario 6) ................... 255
Figure 126. Historic variation in the value of Canadian dollar............................................................. 262
Figure 127. Historic variation in copper price (USD) .......................................................................... 264
TABLES
Table 1. Description of Scenarios ........................................................................................................... 26
Table 2. Table of Scenarios..................................................................................................................... 27
Table 3. 500 kV Study Project costs, cost differences and cost ratios compared to all-overhead line... 31
Table 4. Ratio of cost of underground cable and transition stations to an equal length of overhead line
.......................................................................................................................................................... 32
Table 5. Duration of cable supply and installation for each scenario ..................................................... 33
Table 6. Power losses for each scenario at an average load of 457.3 MW............................................. 36
Table 7. Power losses per circuit for each scenario at an average load of 1,000 MW ........................... 37
Table 8. PV of losses and of revenue requirement ................................................................................. 38
Table 9. Number of suppliers for each undergrounding scenario........................................................... 43
Table 10. Minimum design temperatures for cable ................................................................................ 47
Table 11. Minimum design temperatures for splices (joints) ................................................................. 47
Table 12. Maximum and minimum design temperatures for air insulated terminations ........................ 48
Table 13. Maximum and minimum design temperatures for gas insulated terminations ....................... 48
Table 14. Scenarios considered............................................................................................................... 51
Table 15 Cumulative quantities of underground cables of all types in each country ........................... 106
Table 16 Commercial applications of large conductor XLPE cable with joints by voltage,
conductors size, and circuit length ................................................................................................. 109
Table 17 Summary of the cumulative lengths at each voltage of major XLPE circuits with large
conductors, long lengths and joints ............................................................................................... 109
Table 18 XLPE Cable system component statistics: 315 kV to 500 kV............................................... 110
Table 19 SCFF Cable system component statistics: 315 kV to 500 kV ............................................... 110
Table 20 Total cable system components installed up to end 2005: 315 kV to 500 kV....................... 111
Table 21 Comparison of statistics of XLPE circuit from three sources................................................ 111
Page 11 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Table 22 EHV installation types, three phase cable lengths and number of projects ........................... 129
Table 23. Details of significant GIL applications ................................................................................. 135
Table 24. Details of some HTSC cables and applications .................................................................... 147
Table 25 CIGRE failure rates of components in 220 kV to 500 kV XLPE cable systems................... 154
Table 26 Failure rates of components in 220 kV to 500 kV XLPE cable systems by cause ................ 155
Table 27 Conditioned failure rates of components in 220 kV to 500 kV XLPE cable systems ........... 156
Table 28 Unconditioned cable system failure rates for the study scenarios for one year in-service .... 156
Table 29 Conditioned cable system failure rates for the study scenarios for one year in-service ........ 157
Table 30 Unconditioned cable system failure rates for the study scenarios for 40 years in-service .... 158
Table 31 Conditioned cable system failure rates the study scenarios for 40 years in-service .............. 158
Table 32 Numbers of faults in all types of 220 kV-500 kV AC land circuits by installation type....... 159
Table 33 OHL failure rates for the study scenarios for one year in-service ......................................... 160
Table 34 OHL failure rates for the study scenarios for forty years in-service...................................... 160
Table 35 Tunnel dimensions for scoping study .................................................................................... 190
Table 36. Magnetic field from EMF report (Appendix, Section 13) .................................................... 213
Table 37 Supplier responses: Average capacitance and dielectric losses for XLPE cable................... 237
Table 38 Supplier responses: Average capacitance and dielectric losses for SCFF cable ................... 237
Table 39 Supplier responses: Average capacitance for GIL................................................................. 237
Table 40 Combined conductor and sheath losses: XLPE cable mean and maximum ....................... 238
Table 41 Conductor and enclosure losses of GIL ................................................................................. 238
Table 42. Power losses for each scenario at an average load of 457.3 MW......................................... 245
Table 43. Power losses per circuit for each scenario at an average load of 1,000 MW ....................... 246
Table 44. Estimated NPV of power losses over a forty year period. .................................................... 247
Table 45. Capital cost estimates for each scenario (2009 dollars)........................................................ 250
Table 46. Estimated NPV of the life cycle cost for each scenario........................................................ 256
Table 47. Effect on estimated cost of number of Groups of Cables ..................................................... 257
Table 48. Effect on estimated cost of staging ....................................................................................... 257
Table 49. 500 kV Study Project Estimated costs, cost differences and cost ratios compared to alloverhead line .................................................................................................................................. 258
Table 50. Ratio of estimated installed cost of underground cable to an equal length of overhead line 259
Table 51. Ratio of estimated cost of underground cable and transition stations to an equal length of
overhead line .................................................................................................................................. 259
Table 52. Estimated capital cost increase if SCFF cable is used .......................................................... 261
Table 53. Estimated capital cost change if Canadian dollar value should vary by 20% ...................... 263
Table 54. Estimated capital cost change if cable metal prices should vary by 50%............................. 264
Table 55. Duration of cable supply and installation for each scenario ................................................. 265
Table 56 Unconditioned failure rates for a 65 km cable route length for one year in-service ............. 269
Table 57 Conditioned failure rates for a 65 km cable route length for one year in-service ................. 270
Table 58 Unconditioned failure rates for a 65 km cable route length for forty years in-service .......... 270
Table 59 Conditioned failure rates for a 65 km cable route length for forty years in-service .............. 270
Page 12 of 310


United Kingdom
1
1.1
ER 381
19th February 2010
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Introduction
CCI has been engaged to perform a study into the feasibility of using 500 kV underground cable for a
transmission system in the Edmonton region of Alberta. The example used for the 500 kV Study
Project is generic and based on the two 3,000 MVA circuits known as the Heartland Project, with the
understanding that the findings could be applied to other 500 kV transmission applications in the
Edmonton region of Alberta. This report does not include an economic optimisation of the design as
this would be performed at some future stage should it be decided to proceed with an underground
option.
The scope of the feasibility study also includes the identification of the next steps to be taken if it is
decided to proceed with a detailed evaluation of an option that includes underground cable.
While the AESO and others have provided information to CCI relevant to the study, the findings and
recommendations are those of CCI alone.
The main issues that have been addressed are:
Technical feasibility of 500 kV underground cable systems

This is summarised in Section 1.3 and is discussed in Sections 4, 7 and 9.
Reliability
Reliability of the 500 kV cable system is summarised in Section 1.4 and is discussed within
Section 5.2.1.
Reliability of the 500 kV overhead line systems is discussed within Section 5.3 and
information is given in Appendix, Section 1.
Estimated costs
These are summarised in Section 1.5 and is discussed in Section 12, with detailed
information being given in the Appendices, Sections 2 and 3.
500 kV Study Project schedule

This is summarised in Section 1.6 and is discussed in Section 13, with detailed information
being given in Appendix, Section 4.
Power losses
This is summarised in Section 1.7 and discussed in Section 11, with detailed information
being given in Appendix, Section 5.
Page 13 of 310


United Kingdom
1.2
ER 381
19th February 2010
Recommendations for next steps

These are summarised in Section 1.8.
500kV Study Project risks

These are discussed in Section 15.
Method of approach
This report is based on the prospective requirement to use underground cable for all or part of two
500 kV Transmission circuits in the Edmonton region of Alberta. This is referred to as the 500 kV
Study Project. The example upon which the design parameters and the terrain of the route of the
500 kV Study Project have been based is the proposed Heartland Project, which consists of two parallel
500 kV, 3,000 MVA circuits with a route length of 65 km per circuit.
A summary of the division and sequence of work between CCI, HPT and AESO is given below:
CCI
Performed a scoping study as the basis for :

Invitation to cable suppliers to provide outline designs, budgetary costs and
manufacturing times.
Outline trench cross-section dimensions to be provided to HPT for a) normal
installation conditions and b) for special construction at a generic obstruction
crossing.
Participated in visits to Tokyo with AESO and HPT to evaluate a) the only operational, long
length 500 kV cable system in the world and b) the premises of two of the manufacturers
who supplied it.
Analysed the manufacturers design responses to provide averaged:
Cable sizes.
Installation layouts.
Manufacturing and jointing times.
Estimated capital costs of cable, accessories and spares; these were normalised to
allow for common metal prices and exchange rates.
Cable system energy losses.
Reviewed the state of the art of cable technology with respect to the 500 kV Study Project.
Advised:
Feasibility of the available cable technologies to the 500 kV Study Project.
Risks associated with 500 kV cable technology for use in the Edmonton region of
Alberta.
Next steps to be followed if an underground option is to be investigated further.
Page 14 of 310


United Kingdom
HPT
AESO
ER 381
19th February 2010
Selected preliminary routes for indicative civil and installation costing purposes, comprising
installation of a) cable laying in normal conditions and b) cable crossings of route
obstructions.
Selected the installation type, i.e. that the cable should be direct buried in the ground. This
being considered to be the lowest cost option.
Compiled a project schedule.
Compiled the total estimated capital costs of nine scenarios comprising a) different
proportions of underground cable to overhead line and b) transition stations.
Studied the effect of the underground cable on the operation of the system.
Studied the effect of reactive compensation on the operation of the transmission system
containing underground cable.
Compiled the lifecycle costs of nine different scenarios.
Calculated the cost of losses of the cable, reactors and overhead line.
In order to obtain information for the 500 kV Study Project on the availability of 500 kV cable systems
and the estimated costs for cable systems, a number of prospective manufacturers were contacted and
technical proposals and budgetary prices were requested. The request was based on the requirements
for the Heartland Project, with a generic underground route length of nominally 10 km. The ambient air
and ground temperature information given to suppliers was based generally on the design parameters
that had been used for the 240 kV Downtown Edmonton Supply and Substation (DESS) underground
cable project.
The estimated cost provided by each prospective cable supplier was given on the basis that, for
commercial reasons, it would remain confidential. The estimated cost and design information have
therefore been presented in this report a non attributable manner. A summary of the designs proposed
by prospective suppliers is given in Section 9.
Different scenarios, which each include some underground cable, were agreed for study; Figure 9,
Figure 10, Figure 11 and Figure 12. Each scenario comprises different combinations of underground
cable length, overhead line length and numbers of parallel Groups of Cables. These scenarios include
options for undergrounding the following generic lengths in a nominal 65 km route:
10 km underground cable (55 km overhead line)

20 km underground cable (45 km overhead line)
The estimated costs of the scenarios containing either a 10 km or 20 km length of underground cable
were compared with the estimated cost of a 65 km all-overhead line scenario, with no underground
cable. Some consideration was also given to the engineering implications of undergrounding the entire
65 km route, Section 14, although the costs were not estimated.
Page 15 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
To obtain representative costs for installation conditions, indicative routes in the Edmonton
Transportation Utility Corridor (TUC) were chosen by the HPT. The lengths of these indicative routes
do not necessarily correspond with the generic 10 km and 20 km lengths chosen for the study. These
are shown in Appendix, Sections 6 and 7. The work by the HPT is acknowledged with thanks.
Indicative installation designs were prepared by CCI so that the feasibility of undergrounding could be
evaluated and to determine the civil cost and practicability. These were based on the ground conditions
through which the cable system would have to be installed and the types of obstruction which would
have to be crossed. Details of these indicative designs are given in Section 7.
Information was collected and compiled for inclusion in this report by CCI from information supplied
a) on the cable system by the cable manufacturers and b) on the type of civil works installation supplied
by the HPT.
The estimated costs given in this feasibility study were expected to be within a range of plus or minus
thirty percent.
1.3
Technical feasibility findings
The conclusions are that:

Cable is technically feasible for the underground part of the 500 kV Study Project.
Cable with extruded, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) is the best choice of cable type.
The proviso is that the performances of the particular 500 kV XLPE designs of cable and accessories to
be offered by selected manufacturers must be validated on test as described in Section 1.3.7. Key tests
are:
Accelerated aging conditions at elevated voltage and high current loading for one year to
IEC 62067[1]
Simulated low ambient temperature for a representative period, this being a special
requirement for this 500 kV Study Project.
The reasons for the choice of this technology and the need to demonstrate performance are given
below.
1.3.1
Choice of cable technology

The most appropriate cable system technology for the 500 kV Study Project is cable
insulated with extruded, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE). XLPE cable has the benefits of:
Page 16 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Low energy loss.

Solid insulation that does not require impregnation with insulating fluid and
consequently a) risk of leakage into the environment is eliminated b) maintenance
is reduced and c) risk of fire spread is reduced.
XLPE cable is preferred to the alternative pre-existing design of cable, which is the selfcontained fluid-filled (SCFF) type insulated with polypropylene paper laminate (LPP) tape.
The numbers of applications and suppliers of SCFF cable are presently falling to a level
where it is foreseen that it will soon become obsolete for land cable applications. The
suitably trained and experienced personnel and specialist equipment which would be
required for a SCFF cable system for the 500 kV Study Project will consequently become
increasingly difficult to obtain. There are also environmental concerns regarding possible
leakage of insulating fluid from SCFF cable systems.
1.3.2
Other technologies of Gas Insulated Line (GIL) and High Temperature Superconducting
(HTS) cable have also been evaluated. GIL is a possible alternative for a tunnel application,
but is not recommended for a long length buried application. (No proposals for buried GIL
systems have been received from any prospective suppliers.) GIL has the advantages of a
high power carrying capacity and reduced need for reactive compensation. A long length
GIL circuit contains large volumes of Sulphur Hexafluoride (SF6) insulating gas and there
are some environmental concerns regarding possible leakage. HTS cable has not been
sufficiently developed for use in a high power, long length application with joints, such as
the 500 kV Study Project and so is not considered further.
500 kV XLPE cable system: supply capability and experience
The typical design of direct buried XLPE cable system proposed by prospective
manufacturers to meet the requirement to transmit 3,000 MW comprised two cables per
phase each having a copper conductor with a cross sectional area of 2,500 mm. This
conductor size is at the top end of the range that has been installed to date. Conductor sizes
of up to 3,500 mm have been developed for 500 kV cable.
The majority of the prospective manufacturers who were contacted were willing to offer a
500 kV XLPE underground cable system for the Heartland Project. From a supplier
perspective a 500 kV XLPE underground cable system is thus indicated to be technically
feasible. The cables and joints are prospectively suitable for installation either in the ground
(buried or in ducts), or in tunnels.
A fully tested and service proven off the shelf design of 500 kV XLPE cable system
(cables, accessories and ancillaries) does not exist for the 500 kV Study Project. Suitable
designs of proven 500 kV XLPE cables and terminations exist, but the analysis of
Page 17 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
manufacturers responses shows that only a small number of commercially available,

prefabricated, joints have commenced service experience at 500 kV. To date their initial
service experience is judged to be insufficient to accept the designs as service proven for the
substantially greater numbers required for the 500 kV Study Project. Some limited 500 kV
test experience exists, but has not been sufficiently quantified by manufacturers. A utility in
Shanghai[2] has awarded a major contract to two manufacturers for two 17 km long-length
parallel circuits of 500 kV 2,500 mm cable, which are at present at an advanced stage of
construction in a tunnel. Two different types of 500 kV prefabricated joint are being
installed. Other manufacturers submissions for the 500 kV Study Project indicated that
similar designs of 500 kV joints exist, in the form of either prototype joints undergoing inhouse evaluation tests, or as design proposals.
Three suppliers have commercial experience with the manufacture and installation of large
conductor 500 kV cable and joints. There are many 400 kV cable systems in operation that
contain XLPE insulated cables having the same 2,500 mm conductor size that would be
needed for the 500 kV Study Project. Many of these include the prefabricated joint types
proposed for the 500 kV Study Project. However, the 400 kV cables and joints operate at a
lower electrical stress than is required for the 500 kV Study Project. The existence of these
400 kV circuits is a good indicator that there are several more manufacturers who have the
right level of capability and experience to develop, manufacture and install a long length,
high power 500 kV cable system.
It is normal for manufacturers to custom-design underground EHV transmission circuits for
each particular application, including the necessary supporting development work and
Proving Tests.
1.3.3
Choice of installation technology
The most appropriate cable installation technology for the 500 kV Study Project is direct
buried, naturally cooled, in terms of simplicity and anticipated total costs. A forced cooled
system is more complex than a naturally cooled cable system. Because of the need for
planned or unplanned outages to maintain the cooling equipment, it is less likely to be
available for service. A naturally cooled system has no cooling equipment.
Prospective cable system suppliers provided designs and cost estimates for cable systems
suitable for installation in naturally cooled direct buried, naturally cooled duct-manhole and
forced ventilated tunnel arrangements. The HPT have provided installation cost estimates
for the direct buried, naturally cooled, method.
The layout proposed by most manufacturers comprised four trenches each containing one
Group of Cables. This is shown in Figure 23 and with installation dimensions typically as
Page 18 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
shown in Figure 78. This arrangement consists of two circuits, each comprising two Groups
of Cables. Each Group of Cables has three individual single core cables installed in one
trench. For the purpose of this feasibility study a total of eleven layout scenarios was
considered in varying levels of detail. The scenarios have either different lengths of
underground cable, different numbers of Groups (trenches) and different phased installation
time Stages. The scenarios are described in Section 2.2.
1.3.4
500 kV Study Project size
An underground cable system for the 500 kV Study Project would be one of the largest in
the world to date. If the route length were to be 20 km, and if two circuits, each consisting
of two Groups of Cable were to be selected, the quantities of cable would be equal to those
in the only very long 500 kV circuit in commission to date (in Tokyo). The Tokyo tunnel
circuit was supplied by four cable manufacturers and commissioned nine years ago. (Since
the installation of the Tokyo project, there has been a consolidation in the number of
Japanese cable makers from four to two). The quantities required for the 500 kV Study
Project are within the supply capabilities of cable manufacturers.
This would be the first application of direct buried, long length, large conductor 500 kV
XLPE cable.
The 500 kV Study Project has the combination of the highest system voltage of 500 kV and
one of the highest power ratings of 3,000 MVA, which results in a large conductor area of
2,500 mm and a large diameter cable. The large cable size poses challenges to the
manufacture, delivery and installation of worthwhile drum lengths of cable and in particular
to the designs and performance of the accessories (joints and terminations) required.
1.3.5
Project specific requirements

The location-specific requirements for the 500 kV Study Project are the crossing of route
obstructions; such as wide roads, railroads, wetlands and many oil and gas pipelines.
If a major obstruction is encountered in a particular future route, such as the North
Saskatchewan River valley, which is deep and wide, a separate feasibility study would be
required to select a suitable method of crossing.
Low temperature operation (see below).
Page 19 of 310


United Kingdom
1.3.6
ER 381
19th February 2010
Low ambient temperatures
The winter air and ground temperatures that occur in the vicinity of Edmonton are lower
than those previously reported for any other 400 kV and 500 kV applications of XLPE cable
systems. Some manufacturers submitted their experience lists for transmission voltages of
less than 400 kV. These showed that some long length, large conductor cable systems have
been supplied into locations in which the minimum winter ambient temperature is possibly
less than zero degrees Celsius. However, no evidence of recorded minimum ambient
temperatures was provided. For the 500 kV Study Project cable system to be acceptable it
is necessary to demonstrate the operational reliability at low temperature of the cables and
accessories. The cable accessories are prospectively the most vulnerable, because the
elastomeric insulation would be operating closer to the glass transition temperature at
which the properties of high elasticity, believed to be essential for reliable electrical
performance, are lost.
Temperature records from the 240 kV DESS duct-manhole project in Edmonton, show that:
240 kV elastomeric joints and XLPE cable installed at 1.3 m depth have been
exposed to a winter ground temperature of -8oC.
To give an adequate margin of safety for the 500 kV Study Project, design
temperatures are recommended of:
500 kV joints in a direct buried installation: -15oC
500 kV joints in a duct-manhole installation: -20oC
240 kV outdoor terminations have been exposed to a temperature of -46oC.

To give an adequate margin of safety for the 500 kV Study Project, the design
temperature is recommended to be in line with Alberta practices for outdoor
electrical equipment:
500 kV outdoor terminations in open air:
-50oC
To demonstrate suitability for winter operation it is recommended as mandatory that

prospective manufacturers participate in a series of development activities to demonstrate
the low temperature performance of their 500 kV XLPE cable system.
The winter design temperatures can be raised to higher and more acceptable temperatures at
which more service and test experience exists. Joint temperatures could be raised by burial
at greater depths, for example to a depth of 2.5 m, at which depth the minimum ground
temperature may be above 0oC, thus allowing the design temperature to be raised to, say,
-5oC. Cable termination temperatures can be increased by installation within a specially
Page 20 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
constructed and temperature controlled building. This should allow the minimum air
temperature to be maintained above, say, 0oC and the design temperature to be raised to,
say, -5oC. (It is recommended that these alternatives be investigated in the next steps)
A consequence of installing the cable system at greater depths is that system ampacity is
reduced under the limiting summer rating condition. To ensure that the cable at greater
depth does not exceed its maximum design temperature in summer the following studies are
recommended to be performed:
1.3.7
A cyclic ampacity calculation be performed to take advantage of the reduction in

heat generation due to the hourly fluctuating nature of the load current, in place of
the continuous ampacity calculation that was applied to the 500 kV Study Project
to meet the 3,000 MW requirement.
An investigation be performed to see if a more favourable ampacity can be
calculated in summer by taking into account the temperature of the ground at the
proposed increased depth of cable burial. The present ampacity calculation
method assumed that all of the ground is at a constant temperature, similar to the
temperature close to the ground surface. This is the conventional assumption used
in ampacity calculations for cables at depths of approximately 1 metre; but may be
pessimistic for the Edmonton region of Alberta where the temperature of the
ground at greater depths is significantly lower than that near the surface during the
summer period.
An evaluation be performed on increasing the number of cables per phase from
two to three to take advantage of the reduction of heat generation in each cable.
Proving the performance of the cable system before it is supplied

Both long term prequalification tests and low temperature tests must be performed
It is normal practice to require manufacturers to perform tests of proof on their systems
before providing supplies to applications such as the 500 kV Study Project. The
requirements for these tests are stated in international specifications[1] for cables. Some
cable system users formulate their own additional tests of proof to cover any special
requirements for a particular application.
It is recommended that the cable systems must pass the following proving tests before they
are supplied to the 500 kV Study Project:
Prequalification test: a one year test to demonstrate performance when the

particular cable voltage, cable conductor and joints have not been previously
prequalified.
Page 21 of 310


United Kingdom
1.4
ER 381
19th February 2010
Type test: a six week long series of high voltage laboratory tests to prove the
suitability of the cable system design selected for the study project.
Special proving tests: tests to demonstrate the reliability of the cable systems at
Edmonton cold winter temperatures. It is recommended that a specific series of
tests be specified and performed.
Most of the manufacturers expressed an interest in supplying the 500 kV cable systems for
this Project and in performing the necessary tests. Some manufacturers provided details of
the 500 kV proving tests that they had already commenced or completed, or are planning,
for 2,500 mm conductor cables and joints. None have yet completed a full series of tests
on the size of cable, type of joints and type of direct buried installation that would be used
for the Study Project. This is not considered to be an obstacle to them performing the
required 500 kV prequalification tests.
Estimates of reliability
Expectations of reliability
Utilities throughout the world are now purchasing XLPE cable systems at voltages up to the
highest EHV levels, which demonstrates their confidence in the reliability of this
technology.
Quality assurance and testing, care and maintenance

The 500 kV underground cable system can be expected to give reliable service, subject to:
Successful completion of proving tests before supply.
Quality control test programs during manufacture and installation.
Protection of the cable system from third party damage throughout its service life.
The objective in the design, Proving Testing, manufacturing and installation of a 500 kV
cable system is to eliminate failures in-service.
After site assembly, a commissioning test is performed with the objective of detecting
failures due to installation damage, or incorrectly assembled components. A high AC
voltage withstand test is applied for 60 minutes; this test is specified in IEC 62067[1].
Although not yet required by IEC specifications, it has become normal practice for utilities
to specify that partial discharge measurements be performed at each joint and termination.
This is a non-destructive test to ensure that no detectable incipient electrical activity is
Page 22 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
present. Any faults detected are repaired, or replaced, before the cable system is accepted
into service.
Statistics show that a significant proportion of cable failures are due to third party dig-ins.
Adequate protection measures must be incorporated into the design of the installation.
Adequate surveillance and maintenance must be conducted throughout the service life. The
incidence of third party damage can then be expected to be low.
Availability of the transmission line

It is a requirement of the design of the 500 kV Study Project that n-1 redundancy exists,
such that either of the two circuits can carry the peak load of 3,000 MW as a contingency
operation in the event that the other circuit is unavailable. For this redundancy to be
effective, the risk of coincident failures on parallel transmission lines must be low and the
repair time short. This report gives the failure rates and repair times of the cable system,
based on published data, so that a statistical analysis may be performed in the recommended
next steps.
The reliability assessment for the complete transmission system must be performed to
include the other components, which include overhead lines, transition station components
and substation termination components.
Repair times
The average estimated time to repair the 500 kV XLPE cable system is 29 days, with a
variation between minimum and maximum times of 14 days. This estimated time is based
on data collected from a survey of 220 kV to 500 kV XLPE cable installations. This time
includes an allowance of four days for delays resulting from the extremes of weather and
ambient temperature expected to be encountered in the Edmonton region of Alberta.
Published failure rates

Published failure rates exist [49], for XLPE cable systems for the voltage category 220 kV to
500 kV in which many installations exist at 220 kV, but few at 500 kV. Failure rates per
year of operation are given for the cable per 100 circuit km of length and for the accessories
per 100 items. The reliability of the underground portion of the 500 kV Study Project was
estimated for the particular quantities of XLPE cable, joints and terminations in each
scenario by applying these published failure rates. The numbers of failures increase with the
circuit length.
The suppliers of the failure data [49] have advised caution in the use of the calculated failure
rates as the data set is recognised as being too small to give reliable information. For this
Page 23 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
reason a direct comparison with published failure rates for overhead lines has not been
presented. For information purposes, the published overhead line failure rates for sustained
outages [79] have been presented separately in Section 5.3.
Based on the published data [49] the estimated numbers of faults per year that occur in the
500 kV Study Project are given below for different numbers of Groups of Cables.
One Groups of Cables in operation:

Two Groups of Cables in operation:
Three Groups of Cables in operation:
Four Groups of Cables in operation:
10 km
0.04 to 0.05
0.08 to 0.11
0.13 to 0.16
0.17 to 0.21
20 km
0.08 to 0.10
0.17 to 0.21
0.25 to 0.31
0.33 to 0.42
faults per year

faults per year
faults per year
faults per year
The above fault numbers include external damage (third party dig-ins, subsidence, etc).
Approximately 25% of the faults reported were as a result of external dig-in damage. This
demonstrates the importance of providing robust protection and surveillance systems for the
underground cable in the 500 kV Study Project.
The majority of internal failures were attributed to accessories. This demonstrates the
importance of robust design, stringent Proving Tests, quality control in manufacture, a high
level of jointer proficiency in their assembly and the use of stringent on-site after-laying
tests and in-service monitoring.
The above failure data only includes the cable system (cable, joints and terminations).
1.5
Estimates of capital cost
(Note: all costs in this report are in Canadian dollars, unless otherwise stated. All capital cost estimates
are in 2009 dollars).
The estimated capital cost for the underground part of the 500 kV Study Project has been derived from
anticipated price level information from prospective suppliers of 500 kV XLPE cable together with
estimates of the civil construction costs, which were supplied by the HPT. For the total route length of
65 km, the estimated costs also include the overhead line and the associated transmission equipment,
such as sub-stations, transition stations and reactive compensation, where required as depicted
diagrammatically in Figure 1.
Page 24 of 310


United Kingdom
Substation
Overhead Line
(OHL)
ER 381
19th February 2010
Transition
Station
Transition
Station
Overhead Line
(OHL)
Substation
Underground
Cable System
65 km
Figure 1. 500 kV Study project estimated capital cost main components

For the purpose of costing, the components in Figure 1 include the following:
Substations (two)
The equipment necessary for the new 500 kV Study Project transmission line additional to the
existing substation equipment. This includes telecommunication equipment and other items as
detailed in Appendix, Section 2.
Overhead Line (OHL)
The construction of the, double circuit, 500 kV overhead line for the 500 kV Study Project
including diversions of existing lines as detailed in Appendix, Section 2.
Transition Stations (two)
The construction of the new 500 kV transition stations between the overhead line and
underground cable. This includes telecommunication equipment, reactors, switchgear and other
items as detailed in Appendix, Section 2.
Cable system supply and install
The supply and installation of the new 500 kV underground cable system as detailed in
Section 12.1.
Page 25 of 310


United Kingdom
Other project costs:
1.5.1
ER 381
19th February 2010
Owners costs
Distributed cost:
Contingency
Engineering and Supervision (E&S)
Allowance for funds used during Construction (AFUDC)
Scenarios considered for costing
Estimates were prepared for eight scenarios for undergrounding either 10 km or 20 km of the 65 km
route, plus, for reference, an all-overhead line. The scenarios have (a) different proportions of
underground cable and overhead line lengths, (b) different numbers of groups of cables in parallel and
(c) different installation time stages in which not all of the Groups of Cables are installed initially.
These are shown schematically in Section 2.2, Figure 9, Figure 10, Figure 11, Figure 12 and Figure 15
Table 1 and Table 2 give descriptions of each of the scenarios.
Figure 2 gives a comparison of the cross section for each scenario, showing:
The number of Groups of Cables.
Whether they are installed in stage 1 or stage 2.
Scenario
1A.10
and
1B.20
2A.10
and
2B.20
3A.10
and
3B.20
4A.10
and
4B.20
6
Description
4 Groups of Cables (2 cables per phase),
all installed together
4 trenches
4 Groups of Cables (2 cables per phase),
2 installed initially and 2 later.
4 trenches total
3 Groups of Cables (2 circuits shared between 3 Groups of Cables),
all installed together
3 trenches
3 Groups of Cables (2 circuits shared between 3 Groups of Cables),
2 installed initially and 1 installed later
3 trenches total
All-overhead
Table 1. Description of Scenarios
Page 26 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Trenches shown in black would be installed in Stage 1 of the work.

Trenches shown on red would be installed in Stage 2 of the work.
Figure 2 Comparison of scenario trench cross sections
Circuit UGC
km
km
10
OHL
km
55
No. of
Groups
of cable
4
3
65
20
45
4
3
65
(all
overhead)
Staged
Scenario
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
1A.10
2A.10
3A.10
4A.10
1B.20
2B.20
3B.20
4B.20
65
Table 2. Table of Scenarios
Page 27 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Note: Scenarios with three Groups of Cables (3A.10, 3B.20) have less substantial n-1 redundancy
margins than Scenarios with four Groups of Cables (1A.10 1B.20) in meeting the contingency
condition of 3,000 MW, as there is one spare Group of Cables available, compared with two spare
Groups.
Details of the cost estimates are given in Section 12, and in Appendices, Section 2 and Section 3. These
are summarised below for convenience.
The estimated costs in this feasibility study are expected to be representative to within a tolerance
of 30%.
1.5.2
Estimated capital cost: comparison between scenarios
The estimated capital costs of the scenarios considered are given in Table 45 in Section 12.2 and are
shown diagrammatically in Figure 3.
In Figure 3:
- The total estimated capital cost for each scenario is the sum of the stage 1 and stage 2 costs.
- The group of four columns on the left hand side represent the costs of the 10 km underground
scenarios.
- The group of four columns on the right hand side represent the costs of the 20 km underground
scenarios.
- In each pair of columns:
o The left hand column represents the estimated capital cost if all the cables are installed
at one time.
o The right hand column represents the estimated capital cost if the cable is installed in
two stages.
- The blue sections of the columns represents the estimated capital cost of either:
o The total of the un-staged scenarios
or
o Stage 1 only.
- The red sections of the columns represent the estimated capital cost of the stage 2 costs of
staged scenarios.
- The column on the far right represents an all overhead line estimated capital cost for
comparison.
Page 28 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 3. Estimated capital costs in 2009 dollars.
1.5.3
Estimated Net Present Value: comparison between scenarios
The estimated Net Present Values (NPV) of the life cycle costs for each scenario over a period of
forty years are given in Section 12.4, Table 46, and are shown diagrammatically in Figure 4. The
estimated NPV of life cycle costs includes all the capital costs, the cost of losses and the costs of spares
and maintenance. The NPV takes into account when the costs are incurred and brings them forward to
the present value of money. The methodology of calculating the life-cycle costs is described in
Appendix, Section 3. NPV is a single number that expresses the estimated 40 year stream of costs in
terms of an equivalent lump sum paid today. In Figure 4:
- The four columns on the left hand side represent the estimated NPV of life cycle costs of the 10
km underground scenarios.
- The four columns on the right hand side represent the estimated NPV of life cycle costs of the
20 km underground scenarios.
Page 29 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
- In each pair of columns:

o The left hand column represents the estimated NPV of life cycle costs cost if all the
cables are installed at one time.
o The right hand column represents the estimated NPV if the cable is installed in two
stages.
- The red section is the total PV of the power losses in the transmission line over the 40 year life.
- The blue section represents the estimated PV of all other costs.
Figure 4 Estimated NPV of the life cycle costs for each scenario
1.5.1
Summary of cost estimates
The comparison of the estimates of capital costs and NPV of life cycle costs in Figure 3 and Figure 4
show:
- The all overhead line scenario with no underground cable has the lowest cost
- The 65 km route scenarios with 10 km of underground cable have lower cost than those with
20 km underground.
- The scenarios with three groups of cable are lower in cost than with 4 groups. This is true even
though more costly switching equipment is required in the transition stations.
(Note, if three groups of cables are used instead of four then the cable system will have less
operating margin in contingency situations).
Page 30 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
- The staged scenarios have the lowest estimated capital cost, but only in stage 1. When the
estimated cost of the stage 2 installation is added, the staged scenarios are higher in estimated
cost than the un-staged scenarios. This is because of the need to re-mobilize the installation
workers and equipment.
- The staged scenarios have a lower estimated NPV of life cycle costs than the un-staged
equivalent. The estimated NPV of life cycle costs for staged scenarios are 0.4% to 7.0% less
than the estimated NPV of life cycle costs of the un-staged scenarios.
The effect on cost of the number of Groups of Cable and of staging is shown in more detail in
Section 12.5.
1.5.2
Cost differences between cable and overhead line
Details of comparisons between scenarios are given in Sections 12.5 and 12.6, Table 49, Table 50 and
Table 51. The cost differences and ratios summarised in Table 3. Table 3 compares the estimated
capital cost and the estimated NPV of the life-cycle costs as:
Average costs of the 10 km and 20 km scenarios

Average of the 10 km and 20 km scenarios cost differences compared with all-overhead
line (Scenario 6)
Average cost ratios compared to all overhead line, for the 10 km and 20 km scenarios
Cable length
Average of
10 km
scenarios
Average of
20 km
scenarios
6
Estimated capital cost

Estimated NPV of Life Cycle costs
cost $M delta $M ratio
cost $M
delta $M
ratio
730
348
1.9
757
345
1.8
959
577
2.5
977
565
2.4
382
412
Table 3. 500 kV Study Project costs, cost differences and cost ratios
compared to all-overhead line
Page 31 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Table 3 shows that for the 65 km 500 kV Study Project:
The estimated NPV of the life cycle costs are greater than the estimated capital costs;
however the average cost ratio for each scenario compared to the all-overhead line scenario
is not significantly changed.
Increasing the length of underground cable from 10 km to 20 km, increases the average
estimated NPV of life cycle costs ratio from 1.8 to 2.4 and the average difference in
estimated NPV of life cycle costs compared to all-overhead line scenario from 345 $M to
565 $M.
Table 4 compares the average estimated capital cost per unit length of underground cable, both with
and without the transition stations, to that of overhead line:
excluding all other equipment

including transition stations and associated
other equipment
Average cost ratio

(installed underground cable to overhead line)
6.5
8.7
Table 4. Ratio of cost of underground cable and transition stations to an equal length of overhead line
1.6
500 kV Study Project duration
Details of the 500 kV Study Project duration are given in Section 13 and Appendix, Section 4 and are
summarised below.
The total times to procure, test and install the 500 kV Study Project were compiled by AltaLink and
EPCOR a) from times supplied by the suppliers for cable manufacture and b) for the civil installation
and construction durations. The work items are listed in Section 13.1 and 13.2 and the AltaLink &
EPCOR schedule basis is given in Appendix, Section 4.
The estimated duration and ISD (in service dates) are given in Table 55. The dates and durations for
the staged options refer only to stage 1 of each scenario. Each of the dates given are for the supply and
installation of all the equipment required for the particular scenario, including both cable and overhead
line.
The schedule was based on activities starting on February 01, 2010. As this date regresses, the ISD
will also regress.
Page 32 of 310


United Kingdom
Cable
Length
ER 381
19th February 2010
Number of
Groups of Cables
km
4/2
10
Un-staged
Time
Scenario
November 1, 2014 1A.10
57 months
November 1, 2014
57 months
November 1, 2014
4/2
57 months
November 1, 2014
3/2
57 months
All Overhead Line
March 29, 2013
3/2
20
In Service Date and Duration
3A.10
1B.20
3B.20
-
Staged
Time
December 1, 2013
46 months
December 1, 2013
46 months
November 1, 2014
57 months
November 1, 2014
57 months
-
Scenario
2A.10
4A.10
2B.20
4B.20
-
Table 5. Duration of cable supply and installation for each scenario

The draft project schedules, summarised in Table 5, show that:
1.7
The two 10 km long scenarios with two Groups of Cables to be installed in stage 1 have a
cable supply and installation time of 46 months.
All other scenarios have a cable supply and installation time of 57 months.
Power losses
Some power loss is expended as heat during the transmission of electrical power.
The power losses as a percentage of the transmitted power for the 65 km 500 kV Study Project at the
design average load of 2,000 MW are:
- 0.44% for the scenario having 20 km of four groups of underground cable.
- 0.35% for the all-overhead line scenario.
The losses in an underground cable and overhead line are comprised of two parts:
A fixed part of constant magnitude that is independent of load current. The fixed losses are
a function of the applied system voltage which is constant irrespective of the loading.
The fixed loss of a cable system is higher than that of an overhead line. The fixed losses
associated with a cable are:
Insulation losses in the XLPE insulation
Page 33 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Losses in the conductor due to the flow of charging current into the XLPE
insulation
Insulation and conductor losses in the reactors
A variable part that is dependent upon load current, this being the heating of the conductor
by the flow of load current.
The variable loss of a cable system is lower than that of an overhead line, as the overhead
line possesses higher conductor resistance than a cable. .
A cross over load exists at which the losses in the cable are equal to the losses in the same length of
overhead line.
1.7.1
Relationship of power loss to power transfer for the 500 kV Study Project
Teshmont performed a system study for AESO, Appendix Section 5, and compared the losses for each
of the scenarios. Each scenario has different lengths of overhead line and cable connected in series and
has reactors connected in parallel. In consequence the scenarios have a modified ratio of variable to
fixed losses.
A comparison of one circuit of a 65 km all-cable scenario with an all-overhead-line scenario in Figure
5 shows:
The cross-over load occurs at 1,700 MW at which the overhead line and underground
cable scenarios have equal losses.
For transmitted loads up to 1,700 MW, the all-overhead line Scenario 6 has lower losses.
For transmitted loads greater than 1,700 MW, the underground cable scenario has lower
losses. However, a single circuit will only experience loads in excess of 1,500 MW in
contingency situations in which the other circuit is un-available. Thus the prospective power
loss benefits of XLPE underground cables are unlikely to be realised in the 500 kV Study
Project.
Page 34 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 5. Power losses for selected scenarios at different levels of transmitted power
At loads less than the 1,700 MW cross over load, the scenarios containing a portion of cable have a
higher loss than Scenario 6, which is all-overhead line. The difference in losses compared to the
overhead line Scenario 6 is lowest in those scenarios that contain a) the shortest length of cable and b)
the fewest number of Groups of Cables. Figure 5 shows that:
Scenario 2A.10 has slightly higher losses than the overhead line Scenario 6. This is because
Scenario 2A.10 contains the smallest quantity of cable. It is the first stage of a staged
option and comprises one group of cables (per circuit) instead of two. Note that the losses
for Scenario 2A.10 are only plotted up to 1,500 MW as this is the limiting load for a single
Group of Cables.
Page 35 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Scenario 1A.10 comprises two Groups of Cables and so has a load capability under
contingency operation of 3,000 MW. The losses in Scenario 1A.10 above 1,700 MW are
less than those of the overhead line Scenario 6 because variable losses in the overhead line
conductor are greater than those in the underground cable conductor.
Scenario 5.B.65 comprises two Groups of Cables of 65 km length. The two Groups of
Cable, under contingency operation, have a load capability of 3,000 MW:
At 3,000 MW the losses in the cable Scenario 5B.65 are 16 MW compared to
28 MW in the overhead line Scenario 6.
At a nominal low load of, say, 400 MW the losses in the cable Scenario 5B.65 are
6 MW, compared to 0.5 MW in the overhead line Scenario 6.
1.7.2
Cumulative power losses for the 500 kV Study Project
Teshmont calculated the losses for each scenario for 40 years based on the forecast average loads as
follows:
Up to and including 2026:
2027 and beyond:
457.3 MW
1,000.0 MW
For the average load of 457.3 MW in the period up to and including 2026, the average power losses for
the relevant scenario Stages are presented in Table 6.
Scenario condition for the
loss calculation
2 Groups of Cables per circuit (Un-staged)
1 Group of Cables per circuit (Stage 1 only)
1 Group of Cables per circuit (Un-staged, with two Groups out of three in operation)
Total loss
1A.10
2A.10
3A.10
4A.10
Length
km
10
10
10
10
1B.20
2B.20
3B.20
4B.20
20
20
20
20

2.4
1.7
1.7
1.7
5A.65
5B.65
65
65
1 Group of Cables per circuit

3.4
6.5
65
1 overhead line bundle per phase
1.0
Scenario
Table 6. Power losses for each scenario at an average load of 457.3 MW
Page 36 of 310
MW
1.7
1.4
1.4
1.4


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
For the average load of 1,000 MW for the period 2027 and beyond, the average power losses for the
relevant scenario Stages are presented in Table 7.
Scenario
Total loss
1A.10
2A.10
3A.10
4A.10
Length
km
10
10
10
10

loss calculation
Stage 1 not applicable, Stage 2 identical to scenario 1
MW per circuit
3.9
3.7
-
1B.20
2B.20
3B.20
4B.20
20
20
20
20

4.4
4.0
-
5A.65
5B.65
65
65
Not applicable
7.1
65
3.5
Table 7. Power losses per circuit for each scenario at an average load of 1,000 MW
1.7.3
Estimated NPV of cumulative power losses
The estimated Net Present Value (NPV) cost of the energy losses taken over the forty year analysis
period is given in Appendix, Section 3 and is summarised in Table 8, which and shows that:
The total NPV of the power losses for all scenarios ranges from 33 $M for all-overhead line
Scenario 6 to 52 $M for Scenario 1.B.20.
The NPV of the power losses is 7.3% of the NPV Revenue Requirement* for Scenario 6,
all-overhead line, and between 4.2 and 4.7% of the NPV Revenue Requirement for the
scenarios that include cable. (*The NPV revenue requirement is the present value of capital
and maintenance costs, etc, as detailed in Appendix, Section 3.)
The Net Present Value (NPV) of the differences in losses between those of the scenarios containing
cable and the all-overhead line Scenario 6 are also given in Table 8, which shows that:
The difference in NPV of the power losses for all scenarios ranges from 5 $M
(Scenario 3A.10) to 19 $M (Scenario 1.B.20).
The difference in NPV of the losses as a percentage of the NPV Revenue Requirement
ranges from 0.6% (Scenario 3A.10) to 1.6% (Scenario 1.B.20).
Page 37 of 310


United Kingdom
Underground
cable length
OHL
length
ER 381
19th February 2010
No of Groups
of Cable
4
10
55
3
4
20
45
3
None
65
None
Staged
Scenario
PV
Revenue
Requirement
$M
PV of
losses
PV Loss difference
from OHL
No
Yes
No
Yes
1A.10
2A.10
3A.10
4A.10
756
727
696
691
$M
42
40
38
39
%
4.7%
4.5%
4.6%
4.7%
$M
9
7
5
6
%
1.0%
0.8%
0.6%
0.7%
No
Yes
No
Yes
1B.20
2B.20
3B.20
4B.20
1,020
951
886
865
52
47
43
44
4.3%
4.0%
4.1%
4.2%
19
14
10
11
1.6%
1.2%
1.0%
1.0%
No
380
33
7.3%
0.0%
Table 8. PV of losses and of revenue requirement

NPV is the net of PV of losses and PV of Revenue requirement.
1.8
Recommendations for next steps
The work described in this report has been the first step in evaluating 500 kV underground cables for
use in the Edmonton region of Alberta. The next step would be to enact this reports recommendations
to quantify the risks associated with key items and further refine and optimise the cable system design.
One key item is the minimum winter temperature that occurs in the Edmonton region of Alberta.
500 kV XLPE cable accessories have not been proven at these low temperatures. It is recommended as
mandatory that proving tests be performed to demonstrate low temperature performance and identify
whether any further development is necessary. The project risk can be reduced by installing the joints
deeper in the ground to provide thermal protection.
If a decision is taken to continue the study of undergrounding for any particular project, then the next
steps are to perform:
Study of end to end reliability and availability
System and design studies
Additional engineering studies, as required
Salient points relating to these steps are listed below:
Page 38 of 310


United Kingdom
1.8.1
ER 381
19th February 2010
Study of end to end reliability and availability
Study the reliability and availability of each scenario and select the optimum. The following
should be taken into account:
The combined reliability and availability of all the equipment, e.g.:
Overhead lines
Underground cables
Switchgear
Reactors
The level of n-1 redundancy required.
1.8.2
System and design studies
Establish the actual current carrying requirements for the particular identified application.
Perform a system design study under one or more of the following conditions:
Continuous loading
Emergency (short time) loading
Peak cyclic loading
The cable system would be designed and optimised to fulfil the particular requirements. For
example, if the peak load is only required for one or two hours in each period of twenty four
hours, with a lower load for the rest of the time, then the resulting maximum conductor
temperature would be less than that calculated for a continuous load. In this case a cyclic
ampacity calculation is recommended to be performed in place of the continuous ampacity
calculation with the objective of quantifying which of the following would benefit the
application most:
Installation of the 2,500 mm2 cable size at a greater depth.
Reduction in the likelihood that three cables per phase would be required for the
whole cable route to allow for a deep crossing under one or more major route
obstructions.
Installation of the 2,500 mm2 cable in a narrower width of trench and swathe at the
proposed depth of 1.3 metres.
Selection of a smaller conductor size than 2,500 mm2.
1.8.3
Carry out additional engineering studies, as required
Two of the key items for study are the low ambient temperatures and the small amount of service
experience with 500 kV joints.
Page 39 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
1.8.3.1 Low temperature studies

To investigate the feasibility of installing the joints at a depth greater than 1.3 metres to provide
protection from low winter temperature. Calculate ampacity for:
The particular application loading conditions, as described in section 1.8.2.
The measured increase in ground temperatures with depth for the particular route.
If the above study shows that the cables and joints can be buried at depths where they will not be
exposed to extremely low temperature, then the project risk will be reduced. The manufacturers would
then not have to demonstrate the performance of their joints at such low design temperatures.
The following information should be obtained:
From prospective suppliers:
More detailed experience lists including those at lower system voltages and lower
ambient temperatures.
The minimum ambient temperatures that their cable systems have encountered.
The types and numbers of accessories that they have supplied over a wider range
of lower system voltages (i.e. 220-500 kV) for use at lower ambient temperatures.
Any national or special tests that have been undertaken, which demonstrate low
temperature performance.
Any private developments that they have undertaken, which demonstrate low
temperature performance (e.g. tests performed on 345 kV XLPE cable systems[3][4]
in Montreal at the IREQ laboratory).
From utility companies, particularly those operating in regions of low ambient temperature:
Details of their engineering practices and experience of low temperature operation.

Details of National or in-house cable specifications concerning (a) limiting design
temperatures and (b) tests to validate low temperature performance.
From electrical test houses
If test houses have performed tests at low temperature on cable joints (e.g. tests
performed on 345 kV XLPE cable systems in Montreal at the IREQ laboratory).
Whether they have low temperature test facilities.
Whether they would be interested in performing low temperature tests.
Page 40 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
If the time and uncertainties associated with proving the performance of the joint designs for low
winter temperature operation are deemed to be unacceptable, then consider alternative actions:
Evaluate the feasibility of externally heating the joints in winter.

Select a tunnel installation with a controlled air temperature.
1.8.3.2 Obstruction studies

To perform more detailed designs of how the cables could cross the obstructions on the route without
compromising the power carrying ability of the circuit. In particular consideration should be given to:
The depth of all identified obstructions.

The way that the owner or operator of the obstruction would permit the cables to
cross.
Calculation of the ampacity if any heat is emitted from the obstruction (pipelines
may contain fluid at temperatures above ambient)
If directional drilling can be performed with sufficient positional accuracy.
1.8.3.3 Power system studies

Perform more detailed study of how the transmission lines would operate within the wider electrical
transmission network. Recommendations for further studies are given in Appendix, Section 5.
1.8.3.4 500 kV studies
Seek from the manufacturers further supporting evidence, if available, on electrical service
and test experience for joints at 500 kV.
If insufficient electrical service and test experience is available upon which to make a
decision, then either:
Sponsor a long term prequalification test.
Await results of the first two years of service experience from the 500 kV
Shanghai project, following its (proposed) commissioning date in 2010.
Install one or more short cable lengths, including at least one set of joints, on the
Alberta 500 kV network.
Page 41 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
1.8.3.5 Maintenance studies
Evaluate the feasibility and quantify the anticipated repair time following a cable fault in a
direct buried installation at the winter ambient temperatures of the Edmonton region of
Alberta.
1.8.3.6 Further discussions with prospective cable system suppliers
Instigate discussions with cable manufacturers with regard to possible future development
tests to demonstrate 500 kV operation and low temperature performance:
Draft new test schedules to prove low temperature performance for consultation
with the manufacturers.
Draft detailed schedules which would form the basis for enquiries to be sent to
prospective suppliers at the project bidding stage, comprising a) special low
temperature proving tests and b) pre-qualification (PQ) proving tests and type
approval tests (TAT) based on the IEC 62067[1] specification.
Draft and agree detailed specifications for manufacturing and jointing quality
control (QC) tests, noting that IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission)
and AEIC (Association of Edison Incorporated Companies) specifications do not
give complete coverage for all QC aspects.
1.8.3.7 Select how contracts should be divided between different suppliers

For the large size and duration of the 500 kV Study Project construction work, and to reduce the risk of
common mode failure, it is recommended that contracts be awarded to more than one supplier. If
possible, each group of parallel cables should be supplied and installed end-to-end by a different
manufacturer. One possible selection of supplier numbers for each scenario is given in Table 9:
Page 42 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Scenario Number Route length
Detail
Stage Number of trenches Number of suppliers
1A.10
10km
4
2
2A.10
10km
1
2
2
2
2
2
3A.10
10km
3
2
4A.10
10km
1
2
2
2
1
1
1B.20
20km
4
4
2B.20
20km
1
2
2
2
2
2
3B.20
20km
3
3
4B.20
20km
1
2
2
2
1
1
Table 9. Number of suppliers for each undergrounding scenario
The above is only typical; in the project schedule (Appendix, Section 4) a maximum of two suppliers
was assumed. The eventual number of suppliers used would depend on their technical capability and
ability to supply and install the volume of cables and accessories needed. One advantage of using
multiple suppliers is the reduction in the likelihood of multiple outages because of common mode
failure. The disadvantages are the difficulties of managing multiple subcontractors on the same project
and the need to hold a wider range of spares.
1.8.3.8 Evaluate and identify resources necessary for the project

Experience has shown that the most successful EHV (extra high voltage, i.e. 220 kV to 500 kV) cable
projects have been those in which the utility took an active interest and so obtained a reciprocal
response from the manufacturer.
It is recommended that the Transmission Facility Owners (TFOs) engineers be actively involved at
the manufacturers works in:
Auditing the factory prior to bidding and after awarding the work.
Monitoring design progress.
Witnessing the proving tests, prequalification tests, type approval tests and routine
HV (high voltage) and material tests
Observing the full-scale prototype jointing trials and jointer training.
Page 43 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
REQUIREMENTS FOR UNDERGROUND POWER TRANSMISSION SYSTEM FOR

THE 500 KV STUDY PROJECT
The following summarizes the functional requirements taken in this feasibility study for 500 kV AC
underground cables for use in the Edmonton region of Alberta.
These parameters were advised to us by the AESO. Where additional parameters were required, CCI
provided information.
2.1
Functional requirement:
2.1.1
Functional requirement: power transmission
The functional requirement for power transmission is given in Appendix, Section 0.
Voltage: 500 kV (nominal)
Total route length between end substations 65 km (nominal)
Two circuits
Power transmission requirement for ampacity calculations:

Normal operation:
Contingency operation:
1,500 MW (peak loading) at 500 kV per circuits loaded

simultaneously
3,000 MW (peak loading) at 500 kV per circuit, with the
second circuit out of service
For the purposes of calculating cable ampacity in this feasibility study, peak loading is
defined as meaning constant, or substantially constant, loading for a period of time long
enough for the cable to reach its design operating temperature.
Average power transmission per circuit requirement for cost of loss calculations:
2027 and thereafter:
457.3 MW
1,000.0 MW
Page 44 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Notes:
The peak load at any time during each year is expected to be some 1.5 times the
average load during the year. e.g. if the average load is 1,000 MW, then the peak
load is 1,500 MW.
To allow for contingency operation (i.e. when one of the circuits is out of service)
the remaining circuit is required to be capable of carrying the combined peak load
of both circuits. i.e. For two circuits, each with a peak load of 1,500 MW, the
maximum combined peak load is 3,000 MW. Each circuit must therefore be
capable of carrying 3,000 MW.
This is shown diagrammatically in in Figure 6 and Figure 7.

In normal operation as shown in Figure 6 each circuit on the overhead line shares the load by carrying
1,500 MW peak load and 1,000 MW average load in each circuit.
Figure 6. Overhead line: Normal operation

In contingency operation as shown in Figure 7 one circuit on the overhead line takes the full load by
carrying 3,000 MW peak load and 2,000 MW average load. The second circuit is depicted as being
unavailable, for example out of service for maintenance or repair. Thus each overhead line circuit is
required to be designed to carry a peak load of 3,000 MW.
Page 45 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 7. Overhead line: Contingency operation
2.1.1
Functional requirement: ambient temperatures

Maximum ground temperatures for ampacity calculations and cable sizing:
- Summer:
Ground at: 1.3 metres depth: 20oC
- Winter:
Ground at: 1.3 metres depth: 0oC
The above temperatures are based on those used in the design of the cable system for the recently
installed Downtown Edmonton Supply and Substation 240 kV cable system.
The minimum design temperatures for components are given in the following tables:
Cable
Splice (joint)
Air insulated termination
SF6 termination
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Table 13
Page 46 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Cable
Minimum ground temperature at 1.3 m depth for direct buried cable design
(expected temperature is 0C)
Minimum air temperature for manhole cable design
(expected temperature is -10C)
Minimum air temperature within deep tunnels for cable design
Minimum air temperature within cut and cover tunnels for cable design
Minimum outdoor air temperature for cable design
Minimum indoor air temperature for cable design
Design temperature
-15C
-20C
-10C
-20C
-50C
-10C
Table 10. Minimum design temperatures for cable

Splice (joint)
Minimum ground temperature at 1.3m depth for direct buried accessory

design
Minimum air temperature for manhole accessory design
Minimum air temperature within deep tunnels for accessory design
Minimum air temperature within cut and cover tunnels for accessory design
Table 11. Minimum design temperatures for splices (joints)
Page 47 of 310
Design
temperature
-15C
-20C
-10C
-20C


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Air insulated termination

Design
temperature
-50C
Minimum outdoor ambient air temperature

Minimum indoor ambient air temperature
Maximum ambient air temperature
-10C
36C
Table 12. Maximum and minimum design temperatures for air insulated terminations
SF6 termination
Design
temperature
-50C
Minimum outdoor ambient air temperature

Minimum indoor ambient air temperature
Maximum ambient air temperature
-10C
36C
Table 13. Maximum and minimum design temperatures for gas insulated terminations
Notes on Table 10, Table 11, Table 12 and Table 13:
2.2
There is a margin of safety between the expected minimum temperatures and the design
temperatures
These temperatures supersede those which were provided to potential suppliers of cable
systems as listed in Section 9.2 and Appendix, Section 15. They were revised following a
study of Edmonton temperature records, which are detailed in Appendix, Section 9.
For the purposes of this feasibility study, the minimum indoor ambient air temperature is
assumed to be -10C. Alternative temperatures could be considered if required as the
indoor design temperature would be dependent upon the heating system within the building.
Scenarios considered
The following scenarios were studied for compilation of cost estimates, voltage studies and loss
comparisons. These scenarios have different combinations of:
Page 48 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
- lengths of underground cable

10 km
20 km
65 km
0 km
(15% of the total route length

(31% of the total route length)
(The scenarios which include 65 km of underground cable route are not

considered in detail in this feasibility study. No cost estimates have been
prepared for these scenarios as the installation conditions for such a route would
vary somewhat from the installation conditions which have been studied.
Further comments on the implications of a 65 km cable length are included in
section 14.)
- Number of cable circuits in the underground part of the route
2 cable circuits
3 cable circuits
With one or two cable per phase

With one cable per phase
- Staging of installation
Un-staged: installation of full 3,000 MVA capacity for each circuit

or
Staged:
Stage 1:
Stage 2:
initial installation of part capacity on both circuits

(1,500 MVA on either circuit, with the other circuit out of
service)
later installation of full capacity on both circuits
(i.e. an additional 1,500 MVA per circuit)
A comparison of the cross section for each scenario of the Groups of Cables is shown in Figure 8 and a
description of each of the scenarios considered is given in Table 14.
Page 49 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Trenches shown in black are installed in Stage 1 of the work.

Trenches shown on red are installed in Stage 2 of the work.
Figure 8 Comparison of scenario trench cross sections
Page 50 of 310


United Kingdom
Scenario
Staged
1A.10
1B.20
2A.10
2B.20
3A.10
3B.20
4A.10
4B.20
5A.65
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
N/A
5B.65
N/A
No
ER 381
19th February 2010

Description
4 Groups of Cables (2 cables per phase), all installed together
4 Groups of Cables (2 cables per phase), 2 installed initially and
2 later. 4 trenches (2 per phase).
3 Groups of Cables (2 circuits shared between 3 Groups of
Cables), all installed together
3 Groups of Cables (2 circuits shared between 3 Groups of
Cables), 3 installed initially and 1 installed later
2 Groups of Cables (2 circuits with 1 Group of Cables per
circuit), for system studies only
4 Groups of Cables (2 circuits with 2 Groups of Cables per
circuit), for system studies only
All-overhead
UGC OHL Circuit

km
km
km
10
55
65
20
45
65
10
55
65
20
45
65
10
55
65
20
45
65
10
55
65
20
45
65
65
0
65
65
65
65
65
Table 14. Scenarios considered

The scenarios are shown schematically in:
Scenario 1A.10 and 1B.20
Scenario 5A.65
Scenario 5B.65
Scenario 6
Key to the symbols used in the diagrams:
Figure 9,
Figure 10,
Figure 11,
Figure 12
Figure 13
Figure 14
Figure 15
Figure 16
The cable group cross sections X-X in Figure 9, Figure 10, Figure 11 and Figure 12 are shown in
Figure 8.
Page 51 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The switching arrangement is indicative only; more representative arrangements are given in drawing
number 47DD-0001 in Appendix, Section 26.
Scenario Number
1A.10 (10km route length). Un-staged
1B.20 (20km route length). Un-staged
Figure 9 Scenario 1A.10 and 1B.20
Scenario Number
2A.10
2B.20
(Staged)
(10km route length)
(20km route length)
Stage 1
Stage 1
Page 52 of 310
Stage 2
Stage 2


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Scenario Number.
3A.10 (10km route length) Un-staged
3B.20 (20km route length) Un-staged
Scenario Number
4A.10
4B.20
(Staged)
(10km route length)
(20km route length)
Stage 1
Stage 1
Page 53 of 310
Stage 2
Stage 2


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Scenario Number
(For system studies only)
5A.65 (65km route length).

Figure 13 Scenario 5A.65
Scenario Number
(For system studies only)
5B.65 (65km route length).

Figure 14 Scenario 5B.65
Page 54 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Scenario Number
6
No cable installed: overhead line only. Un-staged

Figure 15 Scenario 6 : No cable
Figure 16 Key to scenario diagrams
Page 55 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
BASIC DESCRIPTION OF 500 KV AC UNDERGROUND TECHNOLOGY
This Section is an introduction to the components that form the cable system, the purpose of which is to
guide the reader in the terminology used in later sections.
3.1
Alternating current transmission system
Three conductors are necessary to form an alternating current (AC) transmission system. In North
America the current alternates, (flows to and fro) at a rate of sixty times per second.
Figure 17 shows different transmission circuits; an underground circuit of three cables, an overhead
line circuit of three conductors and a gas insulated line circuit of three pipes. Each of the three cables
and conductors must be in operation for the AC circuit to work.
Underground cable circuit
Overhead line circuit
Gas insulated line circuit

Courtesy AREVA T&D
Figure 17. Three parallel lines or cables are required to form an AC circuit
3.2
Voltage, current and power
3.2.1
Voltage
The transmission system voltage for the Study Project is 500 kV, where kV is the symbol for 1,000
Volts, thus 500 kV is 500,000 Volts. The voltage is the force that, in electrical terms, drives the flow of
load current from the generating station along the conductors to the consumer.
Page 56 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 18. Relative voltages of a 500 kV system

The 500 kV system voltage is the voltage between each of the conductors of the single circuit overhead
line, as shown in Figure 18. A feature of the AC system is that the voltage of each phase measured to
ground is significantly less than 500 kV and is a value of 290 kV. The ratio of 500 kV to 290 kV is
1.73 (the square route of three).
Figure 19. Voltages between individual 500 kV cables

Figure 19 shows that the voltages between each of the conductors of the underground cable are also
500 kV. However each of the conductors of the underground cable are surrounded by a metallic shield
connected to ground, so the electrical insulation only has to withstand 290 kV, as shown in Figure 20.
This has the benefit of reducing the thickness of the insulation that would otherwise be required.
Page 57 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 20. Voltage across the insulation of a 500 kV cable
3.2.2
Power
The unit of power is a Watt. A more useful unit used for power transmission is the Megawatt ( symbol:
MW). One Megawatt is equal to 1,000,000 Watts.
Power is calculated by multiplying the voltage (in Volts) by the current (in Amps).
3.2.3
Current
The current is the rate of flow of the electricity and is measured in Amps (symbol: A). When one
circuit of a 500 kV overhead line is transmitting 3,000 MW of power, each of the three conductors is
carrying 3,448 Amps. The power carried by a group of three 500 kV overhead line conductors is (3 x
290,000 V x 3,448 A) = 3,000,000,000 W, or 3,000 MW.
It is normal for two or more groups of underground cables to be provided to carry a power of the level
of 3,000 MW. In the case of two groups of 500 kV cables, each of the conductors carries 1,724 Amps.
The power carried by one of the groups of 500 kV underground cable conductors is (3 x 290,000 V x
1,724 A) = 1,500,000,000 W, or 1,500 MW.
Page 58 of 310


United Kingdom
3.3
ER 381
19th February 2010
Component parts of the cable
Figure 21 shows the component parts of a 500 kV XLPE cable in more detail. The cable is a single
core design, having one insulated conductor inside it.
Figure 21. Component parts of a 500 kV XLPE cable

The component parts of a single core XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene cable) cable and an SCFF (self
contained fluid filled) cable perform similar functions, but utilise different materials. The SCFF cable is
described in the following Section. The component parts of the XLPE cable are:
The conductor. The conductor carries the load current. The larger the conductor, the higher the
current that can be carried. The conductor in Figure 21 has a cross sectional area of high
conductivity, annealed copper wires of 2,500 mm2. An alternative measure of conductor area
used in North America is the unit kcmils (thousands of circular thousandths of an inch). The
2,500 mm2 conductor size, Figure 21, is approximately 5,000 kcmils.
The triple extrusion. The triple layer is extruded onto the conductor in one manufacturing
operation. The layers are:
The conductor screen (or shield). This is a layer of carbon loaded conducting
rubber. The purpose of it is to cover the irregularities in the outer surface of the
conductor and to form an electrically smooth interface with the overlaying
insulation. The material of the semiconducting shield in a 500 kV cable is a
super smooth grade.
Page 59 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The insulation. This is a layer of XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene). The material

used at 500 kV is an exceptionally pure, high quality grade and is called an EHV
super clean grade.
The insulation screen (or shield). In a 500 kV cable this is usually the same grade
of super smooth, semiconducting material as the conductor screen. The purpose of
it is to cover the insulation with a smooth conducting layer. The insulation shield
may be considered to be electrically connected to ground for the purpose of this
explanation. The shield entirely contains the 290 kV voltage within the XLPE
insulation.
The purpose of the triple extrusion is to achieve a fully bonded smooth interface
between the insulation and the shields. When the conductor carries load and
becomes hot, the insulation and shields will expand and contract as one solid
whole.
Cushioning layers. These permit the extruded cable and core to thermally expand without
becoming damage by contact with the outer metallic layers. The layers must be electrically
conducting to transmit the insulation charging current to the metallic ground conductor.
Metal sheath and ground conductor. This may be formed of one or two separate layers. In
Figure 21 one thick walled aluminium sheath performs the dual roles of safely carrying
longitudinal current of high magnitude in the case of a system short circuit and of providing
a water-tight radial water barrier to water. Other cables may have a thinner metallic water
barrier with a copper wire shield conductor (also called a neutral conductor in North
America) to carry the short circuit current. The ground conductor also carries the insulation
charging current in normal service operation back along the cable to a ground connection. In
a long cable circuit this current may be of high magnitude.
Distributed Temperature Sensing Fibre. It is normal practice to include a DTS (distributed

temperature sensing) system into the cable system. Pulses of laser light are shone along an
optical fibre that is either included within the cable construction, as shown in Figure 110, or
external to the cable in a separate tube as shown in Figure 75. As the pulse travels along the
fibre, a small proportion of light is reflected backwards, from which the temperature of the
cable at that position is calculated. Knowledge of the temperature is useful in planning the
loading of the circuit and in identifying limiting hot spots along the route. It is more usual to
include the fibre inside the cable in those cases in which the cable is to be pulled into a duct,
due to the difficulties of installing a separate tube. A number of fibres (to allow for
redundancy) are housed within a small diameter DTS tube that is normally stainless steel.
The DTS tube is positioned underneath the metallic water barrier. In the case of a cable
given an extruded metallic sheath, the DTS tube is helically wrapped between layers of
Page 60 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
cushioning tape. In the case of a cable with a copper wire shield conductor, the DTS tube is
laid between two of the helically wrapped wires, as shown in Figure 110.
3.4
Jacket. The jacket (also named an oversheath) is the outer extruded polymeric layer. The
function is threefold a) to protect the inner metallic water barrier from corrosion, b) to
electrically insulate the metallic barrier and ground conductors from ground and c) to be
sufficiently robust to protect the cable during installation. High power carrying cable
systems circuits such as that proposed for the 500 kV Study Project utilise special sheath
bonding. The connections between the link boxes and the cable joints are made in such a
way as to prevent the induced voltage from being able to drive a circulating current around
the integral ground conductors. The downside of these special connections is that a voltage
difference exists across the jacket to ground. If the jacket suffers undetected damage during
installation or in-service the voltage difference will promote rapid corrosion and puncture of
the metallic barrier. During routine maintenance work a test voltage is applied across the
jacket to check that it has not become damaged. The manufacturer applies a conducting
layer to the outside of the jacket to form a ground electrode and facilitate this test. The layer
is either a conducting varnish or a bonded thin semiconducting elastomeric extrusion.
Cable system
The underground part of the transmission circuit for the 500 kV Study Project is named a cable
system. The component parts of a short transmission system comprising two cable section lengths is
shown in Figure 22.
Figure 22. The component parts of a cable system
Page 61 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
A 500 kV cable system or overhead line must always have a minimum of three single core cables in
parallel. In this report the three single core cables are named a Group of Cables, and is shown in
Figure 23.
The three cables in each group are each connected to a separate phase conductor of the AC
transmission system. The phases are usually identified by letters as Phase A, Phase B and Phase C, or
visually by colour, for example, as Red Phase, Black Phase and Blue Phase.
The electrical connection to the AC transmission system is either made to other equipment within a
substation, or to overhead lines within a transition station. Figure 24 shows a 400 kV transition
station (also named a terminal compound) with the overhead line ending in a terminal gantry. Figure
25 shows the overhead line ending in a terminal tower. The terminal tower supports two separate 400
kV circuits, one to the left of the tower, Circuit 1, and one to the right, Circuit 2.
Each overhead line circuit comprises just three conductors each being one phase. (To improve
efficiency each overhead line conductor comprises three wires that are electrically connected
together, being named a bundled conductor. )
Figure 23. Two circuits comprising four groups of underground cables
Page 62 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The bundled conductor is brought down to connect onto the end of the underground cable at the top of
a cable outdoor termination. At the terminal tower in Figure 24 there are three cable terminations on
each side of the terminal gantry, such that one overhead line bundle is connected to one underground
cable termination. At the terminal tower in Figure 25 there are six cable terminations on each side of
the tower, such that one overhead line bundle is connected to two underground cable terminations, this
is shown diagrammatically in Figure 26.
Figure 24. 400 kV transition station with terminal gantry

Courtesy Prysmian Cables & Systems
Page 63 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 25. 400 kV transition station with terminal tower

Courtesy CCI
(For illustration purposes only)

Figure 26. Two overhead line circuits connect to four groups of underground cable
Figure 23 shows the cross section of the buried cables within the ground. The two groups of cables that
form Circuit two (groups 3 and 4) are each installed in separate trenches. The trenches are spaced apart
to allow the heat to escape more readily and to facilitate repair should one group of cables need to be
excavated. All conductors become warm when they carry load current. The overhead line bundled
conductor can efficiently dissipate its heat directly to the air without getting too warm and this permits
comparatively small size composite wires of aluminium and steel to be selected.
Page 64 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The underground cable cannot dissipate heat directly to the air so readily as it is surrounded both by a
layer of insulation and by the depth of ground. Design measures are taken by the cable system designer
to limit the temperature by a) to choosing a large conductor of high conductivity copper to reduce the
amount of heat, b) spacing each cable wider apart and c) surrounding cable with a special backfill
material to assist the flow of heat. If the current to be carried is too high for the cable size selected and
it is not possible to manufacture a larger cable, then a second group of cables as shown in Figure 23
must be installed to share the current that each carries. The latter is the case for the un-staged scenarios
of the 500 kV Study Project underground cables. Finally if sufficient heat cannot be dissipated by
natural cooling, a forced cooled design would be considered as described in Section 3.11.
3.4.1
Component parts of the cable system
The component parts of the cable system are shown in Figure 22 and are described below:
3.4.2
Cable spans
The length of the cable span is the length of the cable that is delivered to site on a cable reel, also
named a cable drum. For reasons of circuit reliability and economy, the cable supplier normally strives
to deliver the maximum cable length that can be transported, this being limited by the height of road
bridges, the maximum width of the road and the maximum permitted road weight or wheel loading. For
a given route length, the installation of long spans reduces the number of joints needed to connect them
together. The joints are the most sensitive part of the cable system and so increasing the cable delivery
lengths increases the prospective reliability of the cable system. Two methods of transporting large
cable reels by road are shown in Figure 27 and Figure 28 and by sea in Figure 29.
Figure 27. Delivery with cable reel axle crosswise

Courtesy LS cables
Figure 28. Delivery with cable reel axle lengthwise

Courtesy Nexans
Page 65 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 29. Loading cable reels in ships hold

Courtesy Taihan Electric Wire Co.
3.4.3
Cable Terminations
The terminations are also named Potheads in North America and Sealing Ends elsewhere. The
terminations are fitted to the end of the cable. The cable conductor has a connector (sometimes called a
stalk) that protrudes into open air through the top of the insulator. The stalk permits electric current to
flow into and out of the cable circuit. It is connected to other equipment in the substation or transition
station. Figure 30 shows outdoor terminations fitted with long conical insulators. The stalk is at the
high voltage of 290 kV and the insulator provides the long distance to insulate it from ground. Within
the insulator is the means to control the electrical stress distribution such that there is a smooth
transition from the very small thickness of the cable insulation to the very long length of the insulator.
The top and bottom of the insulator are fitted with corona shields, whose function is to electrically
shield the sharp edges of the top and bottom metalwork, and so prevent low level sparking in the
adjacent air, named corona.
Page 66 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 30. Outdoor cable terminations

Silec cable General Cable Group
Other types of terminations interface the cable with metalclad busbar equipment, for example into SF6
Gas Insulated Switchgear, these being named GIS terminations. As shown in Figure 31 GIS
terminations have very much shorter length insulator, this is because of the high electrical strength of
the pressurised gas.
Page 67 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 31, Cable terminations into gas immersed switchgear

Courtesy Viscas
3.4.4
Cable Joints
Joints connect each cable span together. Joints in North America are frequently named splices. The
three joints are always installed next to each other, either in single file, for example in a tunnel, or in
line abreast, in the ground as shown in Figure 32 or in a vault as shown in Figure 33. It is covered
overall with an electrically insulated joint protection box that serves the same function as the cable
jacket.
For high power circuits the joints would generally also include sheath sectionalising insulation
(interrupted shield gaps) to eliminate the flow of current in the cable sheaths from one side of the joint
to the other.
Page 68 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 32. A joint on a 400 kV XLPE cable prepared for burial
Figure 33. Part assembly of a joint on 240 kV XLPE cable inside a vault in Edmonton
3.4.5
Bonding equipment.
The equipment comprises link boxes and bonding leads. It is required that the cable system be
installed with a parallel ground conductor. In a long length 500 kV cable this ground conductor is built
into the cable construction usually in the form of a metallic sheath or shield wires. At each end of the
cable the ground conductor is connected solidly to a set of electrical ground electrodes.
Bonding cables. The connections are named bonds and the act of connecting is named bonding.
Page 69 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Link boxes. To permit maintenance tests to be performed on the cable jacket it is necessary to have
electrical access to it by disconnecting the bonding cables at each end. Disconnecting is performed by
unlocking the link box and removing the connections (sometimes known as links) contained within,
Figure 34. Different types of link boxes exist for above and below ground installation and for different
methods of bonding. Diagrams for a cross-bonded cable system, the type that would be expected for a
high power 500 kV circuit are shown later in this report (Figure 105 and Figure 106).
Underground link boxes would be installed in an underground pit with only the (typically cast iron)
manhole cover visible. Underground link boxes are commonly used in urban areas.
In a specially bonded circuit, current flow is prevented by interrupting the cable integrated ground
return conductors and shields at the accessories. The interrupted shield gaps experience unacceptably
high transient voltages during circuit switching and lightning strikes and must be protected by
connecting across them suitably rated nonlinear resistors called SVLs (sheath voltage limiters). The
SVLs are voltage sensitive and short the insulated gap to limit the magnitude of the transient voltage.
When the transient has passed, the SVL returns to high resistance and effectively becomes an opencircuit. Three cylindrically shaped SVLs can be seen at the top of Figure 34.
Figure 34. An above-ground link box housing the components for a cross bonded position
Figure 35 shows link pillars (also known as kiosks and pedestals) in a field near to the positions of
buried joints. The fences are the indicator that twelve buried 400 kV transmission cables cross the land.
Page 70 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The fenced enclosures are to protect the link boxes from damage by cattle. Robust pillars and fences
are fitted if mechanical harvesters are to be used.
Figure 35. Above ground link kiosks connected to 400 kV underground cable
Courtesy CCI
3.5
Ancillary equipment
The ancillary equipment is the generic term for the following:
Link boxes for bonding (XLPE and SCFF systems)

Pilot cables for system telemetry
Temperature-monitoring equipment
Fluid reservoirs and pressure-monitoring equipment for SCFF systems
Partial discharge* monitoring equipment for accessories in XLPE systems (optional)
*Note: A partial discharge (PD) is the occurrence of an electrical spark within a small air or gas-filled void (gap or split) in
the insulation. The spark is formed by the liberation of the capacitive charge stored in the void when it breaks down. The
name partial discharge distinguishes the event from the complete electrical failure of the cable, in which all of the energy
in the insulation is discharged.
Page 71 of 310


United Kingdom
3.6
ER 381
19th February 2010
Hydraulic system for SCFF cable systems only
The hydraulic system ensures that SCFF cables are provided with dielectric fluid to achieve their
designed dielectric strength during heating and cooling without experiencing extremes of pressure.
Pressure ensures that contraction voids can never form in an SCFF cable. The designer calculates the
size of external fluid reservoirs to absorb the volume of fluid thermal expansion when the cable is
heated and to re-supply the fluid volume when the cable contracts.
SCFF cables are described in Section 4.2.
3.7
Thermal design
The system thermal design ensures that the maximum possible current is carried by the cable system
without exceeding the specified continuous operating temperature of the conductor and insulation. The
designer selects the conductor size, the spacing between cables to limit mutual heating, and a stabilized
backfill (as shown in Figure 74, Figure 75 and Figure 76) with low thermal resistivity. The stabilised
backfill may be either compacted cement bound sand or a fluidised thermal backfill. The thermal
properties of the material above the backfill and to either side of the trench must also be measured and
approved. If the thermal resistivity of the native material is too high, then it will require to be replaced
with an approved imported material. The thermal backfill and the trench filling materials must be
compacted achieve to a specified value.
3.8
Thermomechanical design
The system thermomechanical design protects the cable and accessories from experiencing any
excessive forces and movements that are generated when the cable is heated, cooled, and load cycled.
Design solutions are selected to suit the method of cable installation. For example, in direct-buried or
closely clamped (sometimes known as close-cleated) systems, the cable is rigidly constrained. In
tunnels or on trays, the cable is unconstrained in wave or snake patterns. In a pipe or duct-manhole
system, the cable is semi-constrained and is allowed to expand laterally. In duct-manhole installations,
methods of constraint are required in joint vaults to protect the joints from movement. If the differential
thermomechanical forces cannot be withstood by constraining the adjacent cable, either the cable
system must be redesigned, or special accessories, such as anchor joints, must be installed to replace
the conventional straight joints.
Page 72 of 310


United Kingdom
3.9
ER 381
19th February 2010
Installation design
Installation design covers all aspect of laying the cable and assembling the accessories to form the
cable system.
3.9.1
Cable installation
Installation design specifies the methods and equipment necessary to install the cable into pre-laid
ducts, Figure 36, or directly into the ground, Figure 37, to protect the cable from third-party damage by
laying the ducts at depth and encasing them in concrete, and to cross obstructions such as roads, rivers,
and other services, using solutions such as cable bridges, horizontal directional drilling (HDD), thrustbores, or tunnels.
Figure 36. Duct-manhole cable installation
Page 73 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 37. Direct buried cable installation

The formation of the cables is important for ampacity and access for repair or replacement. Typical
cable installation configurations are shown in Figure 38 and Figure 39.
A
A
C
B
Flat spaced horizontal
Trefoil touching
Flat spaced vertical
Triangular
Figure 38. Typical formations for cables installed in ducts
Page 74 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 39. Typical formations for direct-buried cables

For cable circuits such as the 500 kV Study Project, which are required to carry very large amount of
power, cables are generally laid in a flat spaced, horizontal formation in groups of trenches similar to
those shown in Figure 40.
Figure 40. Preparation of cable trench crossing agricultural land

The main reason for the selection of cables in flat formation for high power capacity circuits is that the
heat emitted from cable must be dissipated through the backfills and soils surrounding the cable to the
ground surface; the more heat that can be dissipated then the more power that can be carried. The
formation must therefore be designed to permit the maximum possible amount of heat to reach the
ground surface without the maximum permissible temperature of the cables being exceeded. There is a
mutual heating effect between cables which limits the amount of heat which can be dissipated from
each cable. The further apart that the cables are positioned the less is the mutual heating effect. The
cables are generally laid as far apart as possible to maximise the power that can be carried. The cables
Page 75 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
are also generally laid a flat, horizontal formation rather than a trefoil arrangement. With a trefoil
arrangement, the lower two of the three cables would be further from the ground surface than
uppermost cable. Because of this increased distance, less heat could be dissipated and less power could
be carried.
Cables in flat spaced formation are also easier to access should a repair be required.
Consideration is sometimes given to the installation of a spare cable to permit the circuit to be quickly
returned to service in the event of damage to one of the phase cables. This is unusual. Most cable
laying configurations have symmetrical geometries, this being important if a specially bonded sheath
system is employed to prevent circulating sheath currents. In such configurations an asymmetrically
located fourth cable would unbalance the special bonding system and would require that the circuit be
de-rated. The presence of a fourth specially bonded joint introduces complexity into the sheath
bonding connections. The exception is a configuration which is initially designed such that a fourth
cable can be located symmetrically, as shown as the right angled triangular formation in Figure 38 for
duct-manhole systems. Such configurations are not appropriate for direct buried systems because they
are difficult to install and difficult to repair without damaging the adjacent cables. For these reasons, if
n-1 redundancy is required for a circuit, it is usual to provide an additional Group of Cables that shares
the load in normal operation and which alone can carry full load in contingency operation.
3.9.2
Assembly of joints and terminations
A temporary building called a joint bay is constructed over the cable ends. The bay is made clean and
dry. For high voltage cables the joint bay is well lit, heated and when necessary is air conditioned.
Different manufacturers joints are shown during assembly, Figure 41, and after assembly, Figure 42.
Page 76 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 41. Jointing in progress in clean conditions
Figure 42. Completed joints
Courtesy LS Cable
Courtesy Sudkabel GmbH
The outer joint metal casing (joint shell or joint can) shown in Figure 41 form both a water-tight
enclosure and an electrical continuation of the ground return conductor within the cable (formed by the
metal sheath or shield wire conductor). In the special sheath bonded system normally used for
transmission class cables, both the cable sheath and joint shell experience an induced voltage. To
prevent this voltage causing accelerated corrosion of the metal water barrier, the joint shell is encased
within the joint protection box shown in Figure 42. The joint protection box must retain its watertightness and its electrical insulation integrity throughout the life of the circuit. At intervals of typically
one to two years the cables are taken out of service and a DC high voltage test is applied to confirm
that the insulating and hence anti-corrosion protecting properties of the joint protection and cable jacket
are sound. As part of the type approval process the joint protection is submitted to a combined water
immersion, temperature cycling and voltage test, which is as equally searching as the high voltage type
test applied to the primary cable and joint insulation.
Outdoor cable terminations are assembled under similar clean conditions within the temporary structure
shown in Figure 43.
Page 77 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 43. Temporary cable termination assembly

structure
3.10 Route protection and identification

It is important to warn people about the presence of the underground cables and to protect the cable
system against third party interference. Should disturbance from dig-ins occur, it is important to be
able to locate and repair any damage caused. Details of how this is achieves are given below.
The cable system operator should put in place a policy with regard to any
excavations which is communicated to all his own employees, to other utilities
(including local authorities) and to all landowners along the route. This policy
should give requirements as to how to notify the owner prior to commencing any
excavations in the vicinity. It should also give requirements of any investigative
work which must be conducted before excavations are permitted to take place.
This can include the use of cable avoidance tools, ground radar, etc. The Damage
Prevention Process in Alberta is recorded in Appendix, Section 10.
To enable cables to be accurately located after installation, it is vital that accurate

route records are made whilst the cables are being installed. These must be
maintained during the lifetime of the cable, and any diversions or repairs recorded.
The route should be clearly marked on the ground surface with robust markers that
clearly identify the location, owner and type of the cable.
Page 78 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Routine surveillance should be conducted throughout the life of the cable system to
check that the route markers are in place and that that there is no present or
pending ground disturbance in the vicinity.
To give visual warning to any persons who might conduct excavations then a
brightly coloured and labelled warning tape should be placed in the ground above
the cables along the complete length of the route.
To give warning and protection to the cables and joints, rigid cover tiles should be
placed immediately above the backfill surrounding the cables. The cover tile
should be marked with wording to identify the owner and the presence of the
electric cables. These should be rigid, robust and non-biodegradable.
To give warning and protection to the cables they are encased in a robust, hard
backfill material such as cement bound sand or fluidised backfill. It is good
practice to add a distinguishing colour to the backfill such as bright red.
The cable jacket which is usually extruded from HDPE/MDPE should be identified
with embossed wording which as a minimum should include the words Electric
Cable and the voltage.
If the cable system is installed with a DTS system, this can also be configured to
give an alarm and a location if a fibre is broken. The optical fibres may be position
close to the surface of the cable or within the cable, the former prospectively
providing earlier warning.
Routine electrical tests should be conducted to confirm the integrity of the

insulation provided by the cable jacket, as any damage can result in corrosion
and/or water entry into the cable.
Should the cable suffer an electrical short circuit due to dig in damage (or internal
faults) then the cable must be disconnected automatically from the supply. Unlike
overhead line, faults on underground cables do not clear themselves, so any autoreclose system should be inhibited from operating on the cable.
3.11 Forced cooling

If it is not possible to cool a cable passively by natural heat dissipation, it is possible to consider the use
of a method of forced cooling. Four methods have been used and are described in [5]:
Page 79 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Lateral pipe cooling, in which the cables are laid in the ground at a sufficiently
close spacing that a cooling pipe can be laid between adjacent cables. Water is
pumped under pressure and circulated along one of the pipes and returned back
along another parallel pipe. Depending upon the particular configuration, inlet
temperature of the water and length of the cooling pipes, up to typically 80% of the
heat that would otherwise flow to the ground surface is absorbed by a rise in the
water temperature. Lateral pipe cooled systems have been used in special
locations in which the width available to locate a cable trench is restricted. A
typical example being under a road in a downtown location.
Integral sheath cooling, in which each single core cable is laid within a water filled
pipe. Water is pumped under pressure and circulated along one of the pipes and
returned back along another parallel pipe. 100% of the heat that would otherwise
flow to the ground surface is absorbed by a rise in the water temperature. This
system can be used for cables laid in the ground or in tunnels but has only been
used for a very small number of special applications.
Trough and weir, in which the group of three cables is laid within a series of
descending horizontal open water filled troughs, each separated by weirs to
control the water flow.
A forced ventilated tunnel, in which the cables are supported by clamps (cable
cleats) or laid on racks. Air is drawn from ground surface down a shaft and along
the tunnel. A high proportion of the heat emitted by the cable is absorbed by a rise
in the air temperature. A smaller proportion of the heat emitted by the cable is
dissipated through the wall of the tunnel to the surrounding ground. The hot air is
exhausted to atmosphere through a second shaft. This is the normal method for
cooling cables installed in long tunnels. A forced ventilated tunnel system is less
complex to design, operate and maintain than a water cooled direct buried system.
In closed water cooling systems, the heat from the hot water outlet pipe is extracted via a heat
exchanger usually to air. If a high ambient air temperature is present in summer it may be necessary to
also refrigerate the return water. If a sub-zero ambient air temperature is present in winter is necessary
to protect the cooling pipes, pumps, and heat exchangers from damage by freezing.
The disadvantages of a forced cooling system are:
Availability of the circuit to carry load throughout its service life is dependent
upon the operational condition of the cooling equipment, whereas a naturally
cooled cable is not dependent upon such equipment and is always available to
carry load.
Page 80 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
It is more difficult to extract heat from the joints than from the cable due to the
increased thickness of electrical insulation. The means to increase heat extraction
from the joints may increase the complexity of the joint design.
For applications in which a naturally cooled system can be used, the cost of a
forced cooled system is higher than a naturally cooled system.
3.12 Operation, maintenance and repair

When the cable system is commissioned, the as built design, including the electrical parameters
necessary to calculate the performance of the overall transmission system, is handed over from the
contractor to the client, as part of the commissioning process.
This would normally include operating and maintenance instructions, including recommendations for
remedial action in the event of a failure. Repairs to EHV cable systems are discussed further in
Section 7.22.
To ensure that a) the heat can be dissipated from the cable system, b) the cable systems are not exposed
to unacceptable forces or vibrations, c) the cable systems are not damaged by tree roots, and d) access
for maintenance and repair of the cable system is not restricted, there will be restrictions of land use
after cable installation.
3.13 Testing
The test standards that include 500 kV are IEC 62067 (2001)[1], IEEE Std 404-2006[6] and IEEE Std 482009[7]. Standards for lower voltage cables are ICEA-S-108-720-2004[8], AEIC CS2-97[9], AEIC CS906[10], IEC 60840[11].
Testing of cable systems can be grouped into three major categories:
Proving tests
Quality tests, consisting of factory (or shipping) tests and commissioning (after
laying) tests
In service maintenance tests and measurements
In the event of a failure then diagnostic tests would be performed to investigate the cause and extent of
a malfunction.
Typical durations are given below for some of the tests, in planning of tests, allowance also has to
made for manufacture of the components, erection of the test assembly, setting up of the measuring
equipment, dismantling, and formal forensic inspection of samples.
Page 81 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
3.13.1 Proving tests

The purpose of the proving tests is to demonstrate the adequacy of the design for the particular
application.
3.13.1.1 Prequalification tests
Long term formal Pre-qualification tests are performed to demonstrate satisfactory long term
performance for a particular application. For XLPE cable systems above 150 kV to 500 kV,
IEC 62067[1] requires the manufacturer to perform a Pre-qualification test as described below.
Clause 3.2.4, IEC 62067. Definition: Test made before supplying on a general
commercial basis a type of cable system covered by this standard, in order to demonstrate
satisfactory long term performance of the complete cable system. The Prequalification
Test need only be carried out once unless there is a substantial change in the cable system
with respect to material manufacturing process, design, and design levels. Note: A
substantial change is defined as that which might adversely affect the performance of the
cable system. The supplier should provide a detailed case, including test evidence, if
modifications are introduced, which are claimed not to constitute a substantial change.
Clause 13.1, IEC 62067: When a Prequalification Test has been satisfactorily performed
on a cable system, it qualifies the manufacturer as a supplier of cable systems with the
same or lower voltage ratings as long as the calculate electrical stresses at the insulation
screen are equal to or lower than for the cable system tested. Note: It is recommended to
carry out a prequalification test using a cable of a large conductor cross-section in order to
cover thermomechanical aspects.
The test assembly must include each design of accessory and the test arrangement shall be
representative of the installation design conditions. Figure 44 shows a 400 kV cable system being
prepared for test. A one year test is performed, comprising 180 thermal load cycles and 8,760 hours on
voltage. This is then followed by lightning impulse voltage tests and an examination of the
components to demonstrate that no damage has occurred. The overall duration of the testing will this
be in excess of one year.
Page 82 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 44: 400 kV cable system being prepared Figure 45: A Cable being prepared for type approval
for long term testing
testing
Courtesy Nexans
Courtesy of Sudkabel GmbH
3.13.1.2 Extension to prequalification tests

Clause 3.2.4, IEC 62067 states that, The Prequalification Test need only be carried out once unless
there is a substantial change in the cable system with respect to material manufacturing process, design,
and design levels. Note: A substantial change is defined as that which might adversely affect the
performance of the cable system. The supplier should provide a detailed case, including test evidence,
if modifications are introduced, which are claimed not to constitute a substantial change.
CIGRE Working Group B1.06 published Technical Brochure (TB) 303[51] to revise the qualification
procedures. The technical brochure uses a Functional Analysis Method to evaluate the evidence and
come to decision as to whether the prequalification test or other tests need to be repeated or not.
TB 303 recommended than a new test be performed in cases where a substantial change had not been
made as described below:
Page 83 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Item 2.4, page 27, TB 303. A simplified long term test (80) cycles called Extension of
Prequalification (EQ) test in case of:
Exchange of prequalified components (cable and/or accessories) with other components

that are already prequalified in other cable systems with the same or higher calculated
electrical stress at the insulation screen of the subjected system.
o Authors: for example, this would allow a pre-qualified cable, or an accessory, to be
supplied to another manufacturer to be used with his prequalified accessory, or cable,
providing that the cable screen stresses experienced by the accessory were the same or
lower.
Modification of a cable or an accessory within the same family in a prequalified system.

This is defined in TB 303.
Purpose of EQ, Item 2.3.2, page 24, TB 303. The 60 daily heat cycles without voltage plus the
20 heat cycles of the type test applied to the test loop are intended to allow relaxation of most of
the mechanical stresses trapped in the cable insulation during manufacture.
o Authors: this is the full IEC 62067 type test procedure, (Item12, page 31, therein) with
amendments including:
An additional 60 daily load cycles at the front end

Two joints of each type, instead of one, to be in the configuration of the rigid or
flexible installation fixing they were designed for.
3.13.1.3 Type Tests

The satisfactory performance of a new design of cable and accessories is validated before supply by
performing a formal Qualification Test (Type Tests). Figure 45 shows an XLPE cable being prepared
for a type test.
Clause 3.2.4, IEC 62067. Definition: Test made before supplying on a general
commercial basis a type of cable system covered by this standard, in order to demonstrate
satisfactory performance characteristics to meet the intended application. Once
successfully completed, these tests need not be repeated unless changes are made in the
cable or accessory materials, or design or manufacturing process which might change the
performance characteristics.
Page 84 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The tests include a range of material and electrical tests on cables and accessories, but do not require
that they be installed in a way which is representative of how they are to be installed in service. The
tests do not therefore simulate the thermomechanical forces that would be encountered in service. The
Type Tests specified in IEC 62067 has a typical duration of six weeks, including 20 daily loading
cycles.
3.13.1.4 Special Proving Tests (customer acceptance tests)

In addition to requiring the pre-qualification test, most customers, when purchasing an EHV cable
system for the first time for their application, specify that a full electrical and mechanical Type Test be
performed for the exact cable system that they are to receive for their intended application, even if a
prior type test had been performed for other customers.
Some customers have their own in-house Type Test specifications. These commonly have more
stringent requirements particular to their application, than those of international specifications upon
which they are based.
In applications where a particular performance requirement is identified by the customer (utility) that is
not included in national or international specifications, a special witnessed proving test is formulated
and specified prior to the bid stage which the cable supplier is required to perform as a condition of
supply.
3.13.1.5 Private Tests

The cable supplier may separately identify particular performance requirements and may chose to
perform in-house development tests, however, these are not necessarily disclosed or independently
witnessed.
3.13.2 Quality tests

The purpose of these tests is to demonstrate the quality and consistency of the manufacture and
installation of the cable system for the particular contract. These are also contractual stages.
Both these types of test are described for EHV cable systems in IEC 62067 and the AIEC CS9.
Page 85 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
3.13.2.1 Factory tests

The quality of the cable and accessories is verified at the end of manufacture by performing routine
tests (shipping tests, factory tests, production tests) at 100% frequency of product and by more onerous
sample tests performed at a reduced frequency.
3.13.2.2 Site commissioning tests
A formal acceptance test, which is also called a commissioning test, or after-laying test, is performed
on-site on the completed cable system to verify that the installation workmanship is satisfactory, that no
installation damage has occurred and that the circuit is safe to connect to the network. Figure 46 shows
mobile, high voltage, AC test equipment that has been part unloaded from a truck and set up to test an
XLPE insulated cable circuit.
Figure 46. High voltage AC commissioning test equipment

Courtesy Nexans
3.13.2.3 In service maintenance tests and measurements

Condition assessment tests are performed at periodic intervals during an installed cable systems life to
identify deterioration and permit preventative action to be taken.
Page 86 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
These are not covered by international specifications. A customer would specify the in-house
requirements and specifications to which the supplier must comply. The customer would also require
that the cable system supplier should provide operating and maintenance instructions as a contractual
stage.
3.14 Permissible length of an AC underground cable circuit

The technical limits to the length of an AC transmission system are a) the voltage drops arising from
the flow of current through the conductor and b) the reduction in useful power carrying ability due to
the capacitive charging current drawn by the insulation:
A transmission class cable does not have a significant length limit due to voltage drop,
because the conductor resistance is high and the inductance is low (a property arising from
the geometry of the cable spacing and the magnetic field).
A power cable does have a length limit due to a reduction in the useful power that can
delivered because of the increase in charging current with circuit length.
The circuit length limit caused by capacitive charging current can be substantially eliminated by
installing items of equipment called reactors at intervals along a long route. The purpose of the
reactors is twofold; to increase the power carrying efficiency of the cable and to limit voltage increases
on the transmission system. A photograph of three reactors in a substation is shown in Figure 47.
Figure 47. Three reactors located in a substation
Page 87 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Insulation charging current

In an AC transmission system all types of electrical insulation draw current from the supply and
ultimately from the power plants. This is termed insulation charging current. This current is in
addition to the current that is drawn through the transmission system by the load at the far end. The
conductors in the overhead line or cable have a limited amount of current (the rated current) that they
are allowed to carry without overheating as the flow of current through their electrical resistance
produces heat. The insulation charging current is subtracted from the rated current and what is left is
the maximum load current that can be carried by the transmission system. An underground cable draws
more current than an overhead line and so the load current is reduced more. The following factors
increase the charging current:
Thin insulation thickness; a cable has thin insulation and so will draw a higher charging
current than an overhead line.
The type of insulation; solid cable insulation draws a higher current than the air insulation
around an overhead line, or the gas insulation around a gas insulated line. XLPE insulation
draws about 130% more charging current than the same thickness of air. XLPE draws the
least charging current of the types of available conventional cable.
The length of the circuit; a 20 km length will draw twice as much charging current as
10 km.
The system voltage; the same insulation thickness and length connected to a supply
voltage of 500 kV compared to one of 24 kV will draw twice the charging current.
The frequency of the AC supply voltage; insulation experiencing the North American
frequency of 60 cycles per second, compared to the European 50 cycles per second
frequency, will draw 20 % more charging current.
The distance between reactors is calculated for each individual application and may vary widely. In the
500 kV Study Project, reactors were located at the transition substations at each end of the
underground cable for both the 10 km and 20 km long underground cable scenarios.
In lower voltage cables of lengths less than approximately 20 km, the charging current is small in size
and so only a small reduction of the cables rated current results (i.e. less than 4%) and is usually
accepted. The charging current can be halved in magnitude by positioning an inductive reactor at the
load end of the cable. The reactor may be positioned at a transition station or a substation. If a longer
length of underground cable is required it may be necessary to consider installing reactors at regular
distances along the route, however in practice this is unusual, one reactor is normally sufficient. In
some circumstances the natural inductive reactance of the overhead line at the load end can be helpful
in reducing the cable charging current. Conversely the presence of the cable capacitance can be helpful
to offset the inductance of some overhead line circuits. In a long length submarine cable it is not
physically possible to locate intermediate reactors on the seabed and so the size of the cable conductor
is increased to carry the charging current without exceeding its design temperature. It is not usually
Page 88 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
economic or possible to do this with high power, land transmission cables as they tend to be already at
the maximum size that can be manufactured.
The property of the insulation material and geometry which defines its ability to draw charging current
is called capacitance. The presence of the capacitance of the cable insulation at the end of an overhead
line, (which has the property of inductance) can, under certain conditions, produce an undesirable
increases in voltage. The location of a reactor at the end of the cable beneficially reduces this effect.
Page 89 of 310


United Kingdom
4
4.1
ER 381
19th February 2010
STATE OF THE ART FOR 500 KV UNDERGROUND POWER TRANSMISSION

Introduction
The state of the art is considered with respect to whether:
An underground 500 kV AC cable system is feasible for the 500 kV Study Project in the
context of achieving and maintaining a reliable transmission of power for a 40 year design
life.
Technology exists to design and supply the type and number of components necessary to
fabricate the cable system.
The required power level is 3,000 MVA, which is either a) shared between two parallel circuits in
normal operation, or b) is carried by a single circuit in a contingency situation. The ampacity rating
studies (Sections 7 and 9) have shown that:
A conductor size of 2,500 mm2 is needed for an XLPE cable, but for an SCFF LPP cable,
3,000 mm would be required. Proven service experience exists with 2,500 mm conductors
at both 400 kV and 500 kV AC system voltages with both XLPE and SCFF insulated
cables. 3,000 mm conductors have been used in DC LPP cables, which can utilise a
different design of conductor to that required for AC cables.
Each AC circuit needs a minimum of two cables per phase, comprising a total of six parallel
cables (3 phases and two cables per phase). The two circuits require 12 cables arranged in
four groups, each group having three single phase cables.
Large numbers of cable lengths and joints are needed. The generic circuit lengths of 10 km
and 20 km considered in the 500 kV Study Project (Scenarios 1 and 2) study require:
Total cable lengths of 120 km and 240 km respectively.
Total numbers of delivery reels, each holding up to 700 metres, of 180 reels and
360 reels for 10 km and 20 km respectively.
Total numbers of joints of 168 and 348 for 10 km and 20 km respectively.
(The average reel length in the responses from prospective suppliers was less than
700 metres, requiring, say, 30% more reels and splices)
The design ambient temperature limits determined for the 500 kV Study Project are:
Summer:
36oC
20oC
Maximum air temperature:

Maximum ground temperature:
Page 90 of 310


United Kingdom
Winter:
ER 381
19th February 2010
Minimum air temperature:

Minimum ground temperature:
joint direct buried:
joint duct-manhole:
Minimum air inlet temperature, tunnel:
-50oC
-15oC
-20oC
0oC
The following review considers the technology of EHV cables (extra high voltage), which is defined as
the transmission voltages within the range of 215 kV up to and including 500 kV. Numerically there
are more 400 kV transmission systems in the world than 500 kV. Applications of 400 kV underground
cable are therefore a good indicator of the availability of technology to be applied to the 500 kV Study
Project
4.2
Self-Contained Fluid Filled Cables (SCFF)
SCFF cable is the type that preceded XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene) cable. SCFF cable is insulated
with layers of lapped paper or laminated polypropylene paper (LPP) tapes and is completely
impregnated with a low viscosity dielectric fluid (a synthetic, low viscosity hydrocarbon). SCFF cables
were originally impregnated with a blend of mineral oil and were then called low pressure, oil-filled
cables. The first 400 kV 2,000 mm2 large conductor, long length cable circuits containing joints were
installed in the UK in the late 1960s in direct buried applications. A 400 kV 2,600 mm2 long length
tunnel circuit was installed in the early 1970s[12].
Page 91 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 48. SCFF 525 kV 1,000 mm2 cable commissioned in Grand Coulee Dam in 1976
Notable applications of SCFF cable at 500 kV and above are:
Grand Coulee Dam, Washington, in tunnels. Two manufacturers supplied the
paper insulated 525 kV cables, Figure 48, which were installed in tunnels. The
conductor sizes are 1,000 mm2 and 1,250 mm2. The circuits were commissioned in
1976. Long term Proving Tests were performed[13] [14] [15].
Development tests on 750/1100kV paper insulated cables reported in 1979[16].
Vancouver Island. A subsea crossing of 39 km total length was commissioned in

1984[17], comprising two 1200 MW circuits of 525 kV, 1600 mm2 paper insulated
submarine cables. A distributed temperature system was retrofitted to the cables
and is described in a CIGRE 2006 technical paper[18].
Honshu-Shikoku Interconnecting Line[19] is a major land and bridge link across

Tokyo Bay. The conductor size is 2,500 mm2 and it is insulated with LPP
(laminated polypropylene paper). The link is a single circuit 22 km long,
comprising a cumulative land length of 14 km and bridge length of 8 km. The
number of accessories is 133 joints and six outdoor terminations. The circuits were
Page 92 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
installed in two stages in 1987 and 1993 and were commissioned in 1994. An LPP
cable is shown in Figure 49.
Canada, IREQ, long term tests on 800 kV LPP cable with accessories. The
conductor size was 2,000 mm2. The tests were performed in 1991.
On technical grounds SCFF cable is a prospective second choice to XLPE for the Edmonton region of
Alberta as it has proven 500 kV and low temperature operating capabilities. SCFF cable is more
forgiving of short term high temperatures than XLPE even though it may suffer shortened life in the
longer term.
The low temperature capabilities are limited only by the temperature limit of the O-ring rubber seals in
the accessories and by the temperature at which the standard hydrocarbon impregnant begins to
thicken, this being around -40oC. The paper and LPP tapes are capable of operating at cryogenic
temperatures (e.g. -270oC) in combination with a liquid helium or liquid nitrogen impregnant.
Figure 49. SCFF LPP 2,500 mm2 cable, similar to that commissioned in Japan in 1994
The substitution from SCFF cables to XLPE cables at 400 kV and 500 kV first began in the late 1980s
for short cable circuits with small conductor sizes (less than 1,000mm2) and without joints and in the
mid 1990s for long cable circuits with large conductors (1,200mm2 and greater) and with joints. The
number of SCFF cable systems selected by utilities for new applications fell worldwide to minimal
proportions during the period 2000-2005 due to their preference for XLPE cables. Since 2000 some
SCFF manufacturing facilities have been closed. The surviving manufacturers with an SCFF capability
have all switched to XLPE cable manufacture and at the present time have effectively mothballed their
SCFF equipment. The expectation is that these manufacturers will dispose of their SCFF manufacturing
and repair capabilities well within the 40 service life of the 500 kV Study Project.
Page 93 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The maintenance of SCFF cable requires specialist equipment as skills. On grounds of maintainability
SCFF cable is not recommended for the 500 kV Study Project.
4.3
Cross-Linked Polyethylene Cable (XLPE)
XLPE cable is the recommended first choice for the 500 kV Study Project.
Although deceptively simple in construction, modern EHV XLPE cables have only been made possible
by major developments in dielectrics science[20] [21], polymer chemistry, clean materials, manufacturing
equipment and accessories[22] .
Figure 50. 500 kV XLPE cable

XLPE has a combination of properties that have led to its development for high voltage, high power
cable applications. The base compound is LDPE (low density polyethylene). Polyethylene is a thermoplastic which upon heating starts to soften at 60 oC to 70 oC and which at 107 oC changes from a white,
semi-crystalline solid to a low viscosity transparent liquid. . When in liquid state a tube of it can be
extruded over the cable conductor shield. The long chain LDPE molecule has side chains which permit
it to be linked (cross-linked) to adjacent molecules; the material is then called XLPE. Cross-linking is a
chemical process which is initiated by heating the liquid tube to approximately 200oC. This process is
performed in a long metal tube called a (CV) continuous vulcanising tube. Instead of melting to
become a liquid at 107 oC, it becomes a soft rubber (elastomer). The cross-linked insulation is then
Page 94 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
cooled to return to its original solid, white, semi-crystalline state. The cross-linking process permits the
safe operating temperature of the cable insulation to be raised to 90oC, so that it can competitively carry
similar levels of power to the SCFF cable. Additionally, some of the electrical properties of XLPE are
superior to those of SCFF insulation, such as low power loss, which further improves its power
carrying efficiency.
The main thrust of the development of EHV XLPE cable has been to increase the design stress of such
that thickness of insulation, overall cable diameter, cable span length, and most importantly, service life
reliability are competitive with those of the highly evolved paper and LPP cables. The development of
high stress XLPE cable systems is described by Attwood et al in 1998[23]. Figure 51 shows how the
cable design stress at the conductor shield (screen) and insulation shield have been increased at higher
system voltages. A key design parameter for the accessories is the stress at the cable insulation shield.
Different manufacturers select different design stresses, the value in Figure 51 for a 500 kV cable,
being approximately 7.5 kV/mm. This is similar to the average of the design stress values proposed by
the manufacturers who participated in the 500 kV Study Project.
Figure 51. Increase of cable shield stresses at higher transmission voltages

XLPE cable has now supplanted the SCFF type at all system voltages up to and including 500 kV.
Numerically, there are now many service applications of XLPE cable at 400 kV, although individual
times in service are comparatively short compared to SCFF cable.
Notable early applications of XLPE 400 kV and 500 kV, large conductor, long length cable circuits
with joints are:
Page 95 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
1996
400 kV Metropolitan Power Project in Copenhagen[24], comprising a 12 km and a 9 km
circuit length with a conductor size of 1,600 mm2. The circuits were installed direct buried.
This is the first long length circuit of 400 kV cable with joints to be installed in Europe. A
third 12 km circuit was installed in 1999. Two types of prefabricated joints were installed.
1998 and 2000

380 kV Berlin Diagonal Project[25] [26], comprising a 6.3 km and a 5.2 km double circuit
length with a conductor size of 1,600 mm2. The circuits were installed in two tunnels in
2000.
2000
500 kV Shinkeiyo-Toyosu Project in Tokyo [27] [28] [29], comprising a 40 km long double
circuit length with a conductor size of 2,500 mm2. The circuits were installed in a tunnel
and commissioned in 2000. This is the first 500 kV XLPE circuit with joints and is still the
longest EHV cable circuit in the world.
2004
400 kV Barajas Airport[30] in Madrid, comprising a 12.8 km double circuit length with a
conductor size of 2,500 mm2. The circuits were installed in a tunnel.
2005
400 kV Elstree-St Johns Wood [31] [32] [33], London comprising a 20 km single circuit length
with a conductor size of 2,500 mm2. The circuit was installed in a tunnel.
Progress in the adoption of 400 kV XLPE cable projects in Europe is recorded in Jicable technical
papers in 2003[34] and 2007[35].
4.4
Advantages of extruded cross-linked polyethylene cables
4.4.1
XLPE cable has the advantage over the SCFF type of :

No risk of fluid leaks into the environment.
Reduced likelihood of fire spread to adjacent circuits in tunnels and buildings.
Reduced maintenance due to the absence of pressurizing equipment and the need to monitor
and refurbish it.
Inherent low energy loss due to the properties of XLPE.
Reduced capacitive reactance due to the properties of XLPE.
Page 96 of 310


United Kingdom
4.4.2
ER 381
19th February 2010
XLPE cable technology
The electrical strength of the cable is dependent upon minimising the number and size of a)
particulate contaminants in the insulation and b) surface protrusions from the semiconducting shields23[36]. The design and manufacture of the high stressed insulation
necessary for EHV cable applications requires careful QC (quality control) management of
contaminant levels at the front end of manufacture i.e. the incoming insulation and shielding
materials, the materials handling equipment and the extrusion equipment.
XLPE has a low resistance to partial discharging (low level electrical sparking in gas filled
voids in, or on, the insulation). In manufacture the cable insulation must be kept completely
free of voids and surface damage. Joints and terminations must be designed and assembled
in such a way that air gaps are excluded and cannot reform during service life.
XLPE insulation is vulnerable to loss of electrical strength in-service due to the growth of
water trees. The rate of growth is accelerated if a) water is present, b) the insulation and
shields contain defects and c) if the electrical design Stress is greater than 2 kV/mm. The
design stress in a 500 kV cable is approximately five times greater than this limit and so
trees would rapidly grow. As yet no accepted means exists of continuously monitoring and
detecting water entry into a cable through damaged outer coverings. It is accepted industry
practice that EHV cable should have :
Insulation that is subject to a factory drying process to remove traces of the
moisture that are chemically produced as a by-product of the cross-linking
reaction.
A water tight metallic sheath and around accessories a completely water tight
enclosure.
A longitudinally water blocked construction to prevent the flow of water along a
complete span length should the outer coverings be punctured either by third party
damage or by primary electrical failure. The spaces between the wires in the
conductor are filled and the gaps under the metallic sheath are filled, typically by a
water swellable tape.
A robust outer jacket to withstand abrasion during the cable installation process
and puncture by stone/rock damage in-service. A robust, thick layer of extruded
high density polyethylene jacket is normally applied for buried and duct
applications.
A protected environment such as being laid in specially sieved or strained layers of
backfill material (sometimes called bedding and blinding), or into a duct with
clean, smooth walls and joints.
Regular maintenance checks on the integrity of the jacket during service life. The
purpose is to detect and repair damage before the metallic sheath is punctured by
corrosion. At intervals of typically no greater than one to two years a 5 kV DC
voltage is applied between the metallic sheath and ground for 1 minute to detect
Page 97 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
and locate damage. For the purpose of testing, access to the sheath is provided by
link boxes connected to the sheath at each accessory.
The measures described above to protect and monitor the outer jacket and the metallic sheath
of an XLPE cable are the same as those for the service proven methods used for SCFF cables.
However, SCFF cables have the advantage that the internal fluid pressure is continuously
monitored, such that an alarm is given when the sheath is punctured. No such warning is able
to be provided for an XLPE cable.
Manufacturers of XLPE cable have been freed from the constraint of applying a thick walled
extruded metallic sheath to contain fluid pressure in SCFF cable types. They have developed
lower cost designs with thinner metallic walls. These are prospectively more vulnerable to
puncture by mechanical damage and corrosion. For direct buried and duct installations the
XLPE cable can be expected to be exposed to moisture from the ground. It is important to
specify a robust design of sheath and jacket and to ensure that routine maintenance tests on the
jacket are diligently performed. In a lower risk, protected environment, such as a dry tunnel,
advantage may be taken of a lighter design of metallic sheath.
4.5
Accessories for XLPE cable systems
The accessories (joints and terminations) are the critical components on which the reliability of the
XLPE cable system for the 500 kV Study Project primarily depends. Accessories are of equal, if not of
more importance, in achieving circuit reliability than the XLPE cable, and so the key international test
specification, IEC 62067[1] and the key North American constructional specification, AEIC CS-9, both
advocate the systems approach in which one manufacturer is responsible for the design of the system,
the Proving Tests, the manufacture and the assembly of the cable and accessories.
The critical location within the accessories is the electrically stressed interface between the outer
surface of the cable insulation and the inner surface of the joint or termination insulation. It is essential
that air filled gaps are eliminated from the interface.
The above technological challenges resulted in the service experience of joints in Japan lagging that of
cable by 10 years at each transmission voltage, as shown in Figure 52 and listed below:
1988: 500 kV 800 mm2 XLPE. The first circuit with 500 kV XLPE (no joints).
1993: 275 kV 2,500 mm2 long-length cable circuit with joints commissioned.
2000: 500 kV 2,500 mm2 long length cable circuit with joints commissioned.
Page 98 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 52. Chart of XLPE cable design stress with system voltage.
In the first generation of 275 kV and 500 kV joint designs installed in Japan, the elimination of the
critical interface was achieved by bonding the joint insulation to the cable insulation in an on-site
extrusion moulding process (EMJ), which closely replicated the factory extrusion and cross-linking
processes. The EMJ joint is shown diagrammatically in Figure 53 and a photograph of in-service joints
is shown in Figure 54. 500 kV EMJ joints have given good service experience in the nine years since
their commissioning in a 40 km long circuit in Tokyo in 2000. The extrusion moulded joint has the
disadvantages that the assembly and inspection processes are complex and long. An assembly time of
five weeks being required to complete a group of three joints. This time makes it unsuitable for present
day cable projects and use as a maintenance spare.
Figure 53. Extrusion moulded joint (EMJ) schematic
Page 99 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 54. 500 kV XLPE cable and extrusion moulded joints in a tunnel
Courtesy J-Power Systems Corporation
The second generation of joint designs use factory prefabricated components. The assembly time of
three joints is typically ten to fifteen days
The removal of air voids at the critical interface between the cable and joint insulation is achieved by:
Application of high skill and diligence by the jointer in preparing and polishing the
outer surface of the cable insulation on site to a high surface finish.
Fitting onto the cable, a factory pre-moulded rubber insulating component with a
smooth inner surface.
Applying pressure to the rubber insulation to hold it in compressive contact with
the cable interface.
Designing the joint and selecting the materials such that the rubber insulation will
remain in compressive contact during extremes of operating and ambient
temperatures during the 40 year design life.
Three types of prefabricated joints (PJ) joints have been proposed by prospective manufacturers for the
500 kV Heartland Project, each being of the factory prefabricated type, in which the insulation is
moulded or cast and is then subjected to an IEC 62067[1] high voltage routine acceptance test in the
factory on each component.
The proposed designs of joint for the 500 kV Study Project are:
EPR OPJ (one piece joint). This OPJ has a pre-moulded insulation of EPR (ethylene
propylene rubber). A schematic of the assembled joint is shown in Figure 55. When fitted to
the cable the rubber OPJ has a residual stretch of approximately 25-30%, which applies
Page 100 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
compressive force to the cable interface. It is essential that the grade of rubber has a low
compression set, so that the residual stretch and compressive force does not relax with time.
The photograph in Figure 56 shows a 275 kV OPJ moulding with an injection moulding
machine in the background. As part of manufacturing QC (quality control) it is usual to
perform an X-Ray inspection, a stretch test and then to electrically test the OPJ.
Figure 55. One-piece joint (OPJ) schematic
Figure 56. 275 kV EPR OPJ in manufacture

Courtesy of CCI
Silicone rubber OPJ (one piece joint). This OPJ has pre-moulded insulation of silicone
rubber. The photograph in Figure 57 shows a 400 kV silicone rubber moulding undergoing
routine inspection and high voltage test in manufacture. The mechanism of operation is the
same as that for the EPDM. In general silicone rubber components are soft and have good
Page 101 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
conformability to the cable surface, but some grades of silicone rubbers may have a lower
tear strength than EPDM. Silicone rubber OPJs typically use a slightly lower design stretch
and compressive force. In general silicone rubber would be expected to retain its elastic
properties to lower temperatures than EPDM rubber.
Figure 57. 400 kV silicone OPJ in manufacture and routine test

Courtesy Brugg Cables
PJ (prefabricated composite joint). The PJ has a precast centre insulation of epoxy resin and
two pre-moulded stress cones of either EPR rubber or silicone rubber (Figure 58). The stress
cones are fitted onto the cable with a low stretch. Compressive force is applied by a solid
thrust cone held in position by an annular ring of metallic coil springs. Each stress cone is
thrust into a conical bore in each end of the epoxy resin centre casting. The length of the
coil springs has to be sufficient to accommodate the thermal expansion and contraction of
the stress cone, cable and epoxy resin casting whilst maintaining a near constant force. To
accommodate low temperature operation a) the springs are of increased length and b) the
metallic inserts cast into the epoxy resin centre casting (such as the high voltage electrode)
and the grade of epoxy resin are carefully selected to give good crack resistance. It is usual
for manufacturers to perform thermal shock tests and X-ray or ultra-sonic tests as part of the
QC program, either at a reduced, or a 100%, sampling rate, in addition to the electrical
withstand test. These are normal QC procedures in the cable industry for epoxy resin
insulation.
Page 102 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 58. Prefabricated composite joint (PJ) schematic
Figure 59. Prefabricated composite joint (PJ) during assembly

Courtesy LS Cable
At the present stage in the technical evaluation for the 500 kV Study Project there is no preference for
the type of prefabricated joint. It is necessary for each of the participating manufacturers to demonstrate
a satisfactory low temperature capability on test.
There is a lack of significant long term service experience in major 500 kV XLPE cable systems for the
types of joints proposed for the Heartland Project. Some 500 kV test experience does exist. The
available test experiences give confidence that some of the available types of joints will be capable of
operating satisfactorily at 500 kV, either in their present form or with amended designs.
Page 103 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Experience of 500 kV joints on 2,500 mm2 XLPE cables in service and on test is summarised below:
The Shinkeiyo-Toyosu Project [27] [28] [29] in Tokyo is a 40 km long, double circuit, tunnel
application has been in satisfactory service operation for nine years. The service proven
designs of field moulded joints are no longer offered by the original four manufacturers
(now two manufacturers), nor are they preferred for future applications by the utility. The
joint type is considered to be unsuitable for future applications in the role of either a primary
joint or as a repair joint, because of a) the long times required for jointing and quality
inspections and b) the complexity and size of the extrusion equipment and the clean jointing
enclosure needed to house it. The field moulded joint has prospective attractions for
operation in the low winter temperature of the Edmonton region of Alberta. The interface
between the joint and cable cannot be disturbed as the extrusion process bonds the XLPE
joint insulation to the XLPE cable insulation. Overall it is agreed that for manholes and
vaults in direct buried and duct manhole systems it would be impractical to achieve high
levels of cleanliness and to bear the long jointing times.
The Shibo Sub Station circuit in Shanghai is a 17 km long double circuit tunnel application,
which is presently under construction, each with 630 metre section lengths and 78 joints.
Each circuit is from a different supplier and has a different type of joint. One joint is of the
OPJ type with EPDM insulation. The other is of the PJ type with EPDM insulation. The
terminations are into GIS.
The OPJ type of joint has gained much experience at 400 kV with large conductor cables.
Some premoulded insulation uses EPR rubber[37][47] and some silicone rubber[38]. Both
technologies can be extrapolated to 500 kV. Service experience for 500 kV OPJ types of
joint has been gained on the Ochakovo circuits at Kaliningrad, Russia. This experience
consists of one circuit of 2500 mm cable with three joints commissioned in December
2008, and a further circuit of 2500 mm cable with three joints commissioned mid 2009.
There is also one 500 kV circuit of 800 mm cable with six joints commissioned mid 2009.
For all these circuits the terminations at one end are of the outdoor type and at the other end
are of the GIS (gas immersed switchgear) type.
The 500 kV PJ type of joint was originally developed in Japan as the replacement to the
field moulded joint. The PJ types have completed a number of 500 kV Prequalification
Tests[39] which included a 6 month test in Japan at the Yamasaki test centre on a 3,500 mm2
cable in 2003 and a one year prequalification test in China at the Wuhan HV Research
Institute on 2,500 mm2 cable in 2008. Figure 60 shows two 500 kV joints on test. The PJ
joint was the first type to successfully complete 400 kV one year prequalification tests in
Milan in 1996, these being funded by Berlin Electricity as a prequalification requirement for
two tunnel circuits.
Page 104 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 60. 500 kV PJ joints on test

Courtesy VISCAS corporation
4.6
Cumulative service experience of XLPE cable systems
The cumulative quantities of underground cables of all types in the voltage range of 220 kV to 500 kV
is given in Table 15, which was abstracted from CIGRE Technical Brochure TB 338[40], Dec 2007,
Statistics of Underground Cables in Power Networks. The table is ranked in descending order of the
country having the highest quantity of cable circuit length. The worldwide cumulative quantities for
each voltage range are given of a) underground cable of all types and b) for polymeric cable alone
where this can be identified. Polymeric cable may be taken to be XLPE cable in the voltage range
315 kV to 500 kV and predominantly XLPE in the voltage range 220 kV to 314 kV.
As most of the cable circuits analysed by CIGRE would be expected to consist of one Group of Cables,
the terms circuit and cct are taken to be equivalent to a Group of Cables, i.e. three single core
cables, one for each phase, throughout Section 4.6 of this report.
Page 105 of 310


United Kingdom
Country
Japan
USA
France
Singapore
United Kingdom
Spain
Italy
Korea
Mexico
Canada
China
Germany
Ireland
Brazil
Australia
Austria
Denmark
Others
TOTAL cct km
Polymeric
Non-polymeric
Polymeric to total %
ER 381
19th February 2010

220 kV to 314 kV 315 kV to 500 kV 220 kV to 500 kV
cct km
cct km
cct km
%
1,440
123
1,563
22
663
536
1,199
17
903
2
905
13
651
111
762
11
496
166
662
9
479
80
559
8
197
34
231
3
0
221
221
3
170
3
173
2
153
16
169
2
156
0
156
2
45
65
110
2
106
0
106
1
22
55
77
1
15
58
73
1
5
54
59
1
0
52
52
1
75
15
90
1
5,576
1,591
7,167
100
2,230
3,346
40
430
1,161
27
2,660
4,507
37
Table 15 Cumulative quantities of underground cables of all types in each country

An impression of the increasing accumulation of worldwide service with large conductor XLPE cable
circuits containing joints is shown in Table 16. A summary of the cumulative lengths at each voltage is
given in Table 17. Although there are 34 individual projects at 400 kV, which is many more than the 3
projects at 500 kV, the cumulative circuit length at 500 kV of 115.8 km is a comparatively high
percentage (33%) of the 351.8 km length at 400 kV.
In Table 16 the projects are ranked in ascending order of:
System voltage in the range 220 kV to 500 kV.
Date of completion of installation or commissioning. Projects still under installation, but which are
expected to complete in 2010 are also listed.
Page 106 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The information was obtained from the experience lists submitted by prospective manufacturers for the
Heartland Project, from CIGRE Technical Brochure 338, December 2007[40] and the EPRI
Underground Transmission Systems Reference Book, 2007[41].
Notes:
Not all the manufacturers submitted complete experience lists for voltage of less than 400 kV and so
the applications in the lower voltage range of 220 kV to 345 kV will be understated.
Circuits may have been energized later than the years indicated and some may not be energized yet,
so cumulative time in-service will be overstated.
Equivalent three phase cable circuit length has been calculated in some cases as manufacturers
prefer to supply cumulative lengths of single core cable and not circuit length.
Where details of the project have not been declared, the likely presence of joints has been deduced
from the presence of a high length of equivalent three phase circuit, so the number of projects
containing joints will have been overstated, particularly for voltages in the 220 kV to 345 kV
range.
The type of installation was not always given in the manufacturers experience list, in which case
the entry is left blank.
The country of installation should not be taken to be the country of origin of the cable manufacturer.
Projects in countries which are expected to experience a low winter ambient temperature relevant to
the Edmonton region of Alberta have been included. In general manufacturers did not supply
this data and so the number of low temperature installations will be understated.
System
Voltage
kV
220
Commercial Applications of Large Conductor XLPE Cable with Joints by

Voltage, Conductor Size, and Circuit Length
Year
Conductor Size
Circuit Length
Country
mm2
km
of Installation
1995
1997
1,600
1,600
47.2
14.0
Qatar
Ireland
1998
2002
2004
2005
2005
2006
2006
2007
2007
2007
2007
2009
1200
1600
1200
1,600
2,500
1,200
1,200
1,200
1,200
1,200
1,600
1,200
20.6
12.4
20.4
12.0
3.3
8.8
7.9
4.7
28.1
11.4
13.9
29.7
Sweden
Vietnam
Germany
Italy
Oman
Russia
Russia
Russia
Russia
Russia
Russia
Russia
Page 107 of 310
Installation
Type
Direct buried
Direct buried and river
crossing
Tunnel
Direct buried
Direct buried and pipes
Direct buried
Direct buried


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
1997
2001
1,200
1,200
22.6
4.6
France
France
2001
1,200
17.9
France
2002
1,600
8.3
France
2002
1,600
7.4
France
1994
1998
2002
2006
1,200
2,000
1,267
1,267
7.7
33.0
8.2
38.0
India
Singapore
USA
USA
1990
2002
2009
2,500
2,500
1,600
12.1
28.8
10.3
Japan
Japan
UK
Tunnel
Tunnel
Direct buried
2010
2,000
26.2
Russia
Direct buried
345
2000
2003
2006
2007
2008
2,500
2,000
1,600
1,600
1,500
20.6
19.6
13.9
3.8
13.0
Taiwan
Korea
USA
USA
USA
Tunnel
Tunnel
Duct manhole
Duct manhole
Duct manhole
380-400
1997
1998
1999
2000
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
1,600
1,600
1,600
1,600
2,500
1,200
1600
2500
1,200
21.3
12.6
12.0
10.4
11.2
4.0
6.0
12.5
27.0
Denmark
Germany
Denmark
Germany
Saudi Arabia
Iraq
Spain
Abu Dhabi
Denmark
225
230
275
Duct bank
Duct bank, trough and
tunnel
tunnel
tunnel
tunnel
Direct buried
Duct-manhole [42]
Ducts and direct buried
330
Direct buried [24] [35]

Tunnel [25] [26] [35]
Direct buried [35]
Tunnel [35]
Direct buried
Tunnel
Direct buried
direct buried and duct
[35] [43] [44]
2006
2004
2005
2005
2005
2,000
2,500
2,500
2,500
1,200
16.8
25.6
20.6
5.4
10.4
Italy
Spain
UK
UK
Austria
2005
1,600
4.5
Netherlands
direct buried [35] [45]

Tunnel [30] [35]
Tunnel [31] [32] [33] [35]
Tunnel
Direct buried and
tunnel [35] [46]
Direct buried and duct
[35]
Page 108 of 310


United Kingdom
500
ER 381
19th February 2010
2005
2006
2006
2007
2007
2007
2007
2008
2009
2009
2009
2009
2010
2010
2010
2010
2010
2010
2010
1,200
2,000
1,200
2,500
2,000
2,000
1,600
1,200
2,000
2,500
2,500
1,600
2,500
2,500
1,200
1,600
2,500
2,500
2,500
1.3
2.7
8.2
13.3
3.5
13.2
1.5
7.8
1.3
6.0
16.4
5.0
22.0
11.2
12.8
4.4
7.3
11.0
1.8
Italy
UAE
Italy
UK
Italy
Turkey
Netherlands
Netherlands
Qatar
Abu-Dhabi
Qatar
France
Qatar
Qatar
Netherlands
Netherlands
UK
UK
UK
2000
2,500
80
Japan
Direct buried
Direct buried
Tunnel
Direct buried
Direct buried
Direct buried
Direct buried [47]
Direct buried
Duct
Direct buried
Direct buried
Ducts [48]
Direct buried
Tunnel
Trough
Tunnel and bridge [27]
[28] [29] [35]
2007
2010
2,500
2,500
1.5
34.3
Russia
China
Tunnel
Table 16 Commercial applications of large conductor XLPE cable with joints by voltage, conductors size, and circuit length
System Voltage kV
220
225
230
275
330
345
400
500
TOTAL
Circuit km
234.4
60.8
86.9
51.2
26.5
70.9
351.0
115.8
997.2
Table 17 Summary of the cumulative lengths at each voltage of major XLPE circuits
with large conductors, long lengths and joints
The CIGRE Technical Brochure 379[49], published in April 2009, recorded the update of cumulative
service experience of HV underground cable systems up to the end of the year 1995 in the voltage
Page 109 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
range of 315kV to 500 kV. The data included cable circuits of all conductor sizes with and without
joints. The two dominant types of land cable system are the SCFF (self contained fluid filled) and the
extruded XLPE system.
Table 18 compares the quantities of cable and the numbers of each type of accessory for XLPE
systems.
Components
Type and Construction

Sub-total
Total
Extruded or welded metallic barrier
229 cct km
Cable
Laminated foil metallic barrier
21 cct km
250 cct km
All cable types
Pre-moulded joint
336
Joints
Site made joint
394
730
All joint types
Outdoor, composite insulator Fluid filled 36
107
Dry type
12
Outdoor, porcelain insulator Fluid filled 59
Terminations
GIS or transformer
Fluid filled 193
205
Dry type
12
312
All termination types
Table 18 XLPE Cable system component statistics: 315 kV to 500 kV
Table 19 compares the quantities of cable and the each type of accessory for SCFF systems.
Components
Cable
Straight joints
Terminations
Type and Construction

Sub-total
Total
All cable types
724 cct km
Straight joint
2,936
Stop joint
442
3,378
All joint types
Outdoor, porcelain insulator fluid filled
775
GIS or transformer fluid filled
1023
1,798
All termination types
Table 19 SCFF Cable system component statistics: 315 kV to 500 kV

Table 20 compares SCFF and XLPE cumulative quantities of cable and accessories at 315 kV to
500 kV. The table shows that the quantity of installed XLPE cable has not yet exceeded that of SCFF
cable, although this will soon happen as the number of major XLPE projects has progressively
increased since the first installation in 1997, whilst the number of new SCFF projects fell to near zero
after 2002 to 2005.
Page 110 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Components
SCFF
XLPE
Total
Cable
724 cct km
250 cct km
974 cct km
Joints
3,378
730
4,108
Terminations
1,798
312
2,110
Table 20 Total cable system components installed up to end 2005: 315 kV to 500 kV
Table 21 compares the statistics of XLPE cables from three sources. The statistics show a) a significant
increase in the cumulative circuit length with time in the voltage range of 315 kV to 500 kV and b) that
the Table 3 figures for the 220-314 kV range are understated. The latter is mainly attributable to the
exclusion of circuits with small conductors and with no joints.
System
Voltage
kV
220-314
315-500
TOTAL
Circuit Length (equivalent single circuit length) km

CIGRE 379[49]
CIGRE 338[40]
Table 17, Compilation of
Service Experience of
Statistics of UG cables
large conductor, long length
Cables
circuits with joints
All circuits in-service
All circuits in-service and
Selected circuits in-service
to
in progress to
and in progress to
2005 end
2006 end
2010 end
1,138
2,230
433
250
430
564
1,388
2,660
997
Table 21 Comparison of statistics of XLPE circuit from three sources
4.7
Electrical tests for XLPE cable systems
It is normal practice to require manufacturers to perform tests of proof on their systems before
providing supplies to applications such as the 500 kV Study Project. The requirements for these tests
are stated in international specifications for cables. Some cable system users formulate their own
additional tests of proof to cover any special requirements for a particular application.
It is recommended that the cable systems must pass the following proving tests before they are supplied
to the 500 kV Study Project:
- Prequalification test: a one year test to demonstrate performance when the particular
cable voltage, cable conductor and joints have not been previously prequalified. A long
term prequalification test layout is shown in Figure 44.
- Type test: a six week long series of high voltage laboratory tests to prove the suitability
of the cable system design selected for the study project. A type test assembly is shown
in Figure 45.
Page 111 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
- Special proving tests: tests to demonstrate the reliability of the cable systems at
Edmonton cold winter temperatures. The reliability of the cable system, and particularly
that of the joints, needs to be proven for the extremes of temperature conditions it may
encounter in service life. The Edmonton region has lower winter ambient temperatures
than most other parts of the world where high voltage transmission cables of the XLPE
type have been installed. Some manufacturers have performed limited low temperature
testing, and have service experience in low ambient temperatures. None of the
manufacturers offered experience at the low winter temperatures expected to be
encountered in the region of Edmonton.
To ensure that the 500 kV XLPE cable systems will be able to operate reliably at
minimum in situ temperatures, it is recommended that a specific series of tests be
specified and performed.
4.7.1
Importance of prequalification tests for EHV XLPE cables
The application to install two 380 kV tunnel installations in Berlin in 1998 and in 2000 is of particular
significance to the evolution of prequalification tests, because the utility BEWAG sponsored two series
of tests[25][26] in Italy at the CESI Milan laboratories. These were based on the tests recommended in
ELECTRA 151[50]. Six manufacturers took part in parallel tests in each series. Each manufacturer
assembled a 100 m test loop with samples of each type of accessory and samples of each type of
installation method (buried, tunnel, and duct). The first test series showed that the accessories, and in
particular the joint, were a major weakness with only one manufacturer completing the tests, which was
due to the robust design of a pre-fabricated composite straight joint. The first test series showed that
factory-prefabricated joint insulation had a superior performance to hand-taped insulation in resisting
disturbance from both heat and stress deformation and from conductor thermomechanical forces.
Designs of prefabricated accessories were installed in the second test series, and these exhibited a
greatly improved performance. Even then, only one manufacturer initially completed the second test
series without distress or failure. The other five manufacturers either reassembled or replaced
components and successfully completed the tests.
The majority of utilities have since required evidence of the CIGRE 151, CIGRE 193 or their
successor, IEC 62067[1], long-term prequalification tests to demonstrate compatibility of cable,
accessories, and installation design.
North American standards ICEA S-108-720-2004[8] and AEIC CS9-06[10] were issued in 2004 and
2006, respectively, and share the CIGRE and IEC approach of performing qualification and
prequalification tests. A significant difference is that in Europe the manufacturer is free to optimize and
to take responsibility for the design of the cable system, providing evidence of IEC tests are supplied,
Page 112 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
whereas in North America, the standards also specify the cable design stress limits and the dimensions
of the cable, leaving the manufacturer with the responsibility for quality control.
Manufacturers and utilities internationally have found difficulty in deciding when a change in cable
design, accessories, installation, manufacturing plant, and materials warrants performing a new oneyear prequalification test. The tests are expensive and delay projects. CIGRE, therefore, published a
revision of the qualification procedures in ELECTRA 303 (CIGRE 2006)[51]. The revision describes an
extension of qualification test procedure for changes in designs in EHV cable systems including their
cables and accessories. The revision also recommends a prequalification test procedure for HV cable
system design with high stresses when no earlier experience is available.
4.7.2
Prequalification test recommendations for the 500 kV Study Project
It is recommended that the IEC 62067[1] one year prequalification test be performed as an essential
precaution for the 500 kV Study Project, even if manufacturers wished to claim exemption based on
similar, but not identical, tests previously conducted. This is to reduce the risk arising from the
combination of increased design stresses, the low ambient temperatures and the large supply quantities.
The manufacturers have indicated for the operating stress within both the OPJ and the PJ joints
proposed for the Heartland Project at the critical jointer prepared interface between the outer surface of
the cable and the inner surface of the joint will be approximately 7 kV/mm, an increase of 17% over the
typical value of 6 kV/mm at 400 kV. This is sufficient to justify the application of the Prequalification
Test.
The following is a list of some of the references that refer to prequalification test experience on 500 kV
XLPE cable systems:
Japan
References[27][28][29] and Japanese cable manufacturers in house publications describe the 500
kV prequalification tests to Japanese Standards that were performed prior to the supply of the
500 kV 2500mm2 XLPE cable and extrusion moulded joints (EMJs) for the for the worlds
longest 500 kV cable installation in Tokyo. One reference[39] describes a long term test to
Japanese Standard JEC 3408 at the Yamasaki Test Centre of the Kansai Electric Power
Company. The standard requires a six month test period. The test was performed on a 500 kV
3,500 mm2 XLPE cable and a prefabricated composite joint (PJ) with part EPR insulation.
3,500 mm2 is the largest known conductor size at a transmission voltage above 66 kV. To date
this size has not been supplied commercially.
Page 113 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Canada
References[3][4] describes a 345 kV type test to Hydro Quebec Standard SN-49.1 performed at
the IREQ laboratories in Quebec. The test was performed by a European manufacturer on a 345
kV 1,600 mm2 XLPE cable with a prefabricated joint of the EPR one piece type (OPJ) and
both outdoor and SF6 gas immersed terminations. The cable was installed in a duct-manhole
formation with the joints being located in an air filled chamber. This was followed by a series of
long term tests comprising 138 days at 345 kV, 33 days at 400 kV and 364 days at 500 kV and a
further 83 days at 400 kV. The 345 kV 1,600 mm2 cable and accessories therefore completed a
prequalification test for 500 kV application.
Europe
This reference[52] describes a 400 kV prequalification test at the CESI laboratories in Milan by a
European manufacturer to IEC 62067 on a 400 kV 1600 mm2 XLPE cable with two
prefabricated joints of the EPR one-piece type (OPJ), two outdoor terminations and two SF6
gas immersed sealing ends. One joint and a length if cable was direct buried, another joint was
installed in an air filled chamber, the two GIS terminations were installed in an air filled
chamber. Lengths of cable were also installed in a duct section and in a tunnel section. The test
installation completed 424 days at 400 kV including 184 heating cycles. Following the 400 kV
prequalification test, the test installation went on to complete 408 days at 500 kV including 180
loading cycles. The 400 kV 1,600 mm2 cable and accessories completed a prequalification test
for 500 kV application.
China
A long term 500 kV prequalification test to IEC 62076 was performed in 2009 by the Wuhan
test station in China. The test was performed on a Japanese manufactured 500 kV 2,500 mm2
cable with a prefabricated composite joint (PJ) an outdoor sealing end and an SF6 gas
immersed sealing end. The cable was direct buried and the joint was in a tunnel. The test report
is in Chinese.
If a manufacturer submits a prequalification test report, compliance with the following items needs to
be validated:
Is the test voltage 500 kV for the heating cycle voltage test?
Is the number of heating cycles 180 and the total test period 8,760 hours as specified in IEC
62067?
Is the conductor size 2,500 mm or larger?
Is the electrical stress at the conductor screen and at the insulation screen greater than or equal
to that proposed for the 500 kV Study Project?
Page 114 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Are the accessory designs the same or equivalent to those being proposed for the 500 kV study
project?
Is the test arrangement representative of the installation design conditions as specified in
IEC 62067? For the 500 kV Study Project, are cables and joints buried direct?
Is the thermomechanical design appropriate for the 500 kV study project (particularly in terms
of the mechanical restraint to the joints and terminations, and of the cable adjacent to the
accessories)?
If the above items are not validated, can any exemptions be claimed for non-compliances using the
recommendations in CIGRE Technical Brochure 303[51]?
4.8
Low temperature operation
Low temperature operation of the joints and terminations for the Edmonton region of Alberta is
identified as posing a significant technical risk to achieving reliable service operation. The cable
systems must be capable of operation at the minimum temperature that they may encounter in service.
One of the worst case situations being when the cable is allowed to cool to the minimum ambient
temperature prior to being re-energised. It is recommended that the risk be minimised to an acceptable
level by selecting suitable joint and termination designs and by subjecting them to low temperature
Proving Tests. It is recommended that suitable test specifications be formulated, as at present
international specifications do not exist.
4.8.1
Ambient temperature levels for the Edmonton region of Alberta
In meteorological terms Alberta experiences a continental climate with a range of temperatures wider
than the service experience that has been typically accumulated to date by EHV cable circuits. The
range of ambient temperatures given for the Edmonton region of Alberta are:
Maximum summer air temperature:
Minimum winter air temperature:
Air temperature range:
36oC
-50oC
86oC
The maximum design air temperature is 36C. Extreme temperatures of 34.5C and 35.3C have been
recorded at Edmonton City Centre and Edmonton International weather stations
(www.climate.weatheroffice.gc.ca)
The expected minimum operating temperatures (in brackets) for the XLPE cable system in the 500 kV
Study Project and the recommended minimum design temperatures, which include a performance
margin, are:
Page 115 of 310


United Kingdom
In air terminations:
Direct buried joints:
Duct-manhole joints:
Tunnel joints:
ER 381
19th February 2010

Expected
(-46 oC)
(-5 oC)
(-8 oC)
(0 oC)
Design
-50 oC
-15 oC
-20 oC
-10 oC
The minimum winter air temperature of -50oC is considered to be exceptionally low, with respect to
previous EHV XLPE cable and accessory experience. The corollary is that the range of conductor
operating temperature of 140oC (-50oC off load in winter to +90oC on load in summer) is exceptionally
high compared to that normally experienced.
A significant proportion of terminations for EHV cable systems are installed outside and are exposed to
the open air. They are expected to operate normally in the extremes of ambient air temperature and
solar heating.
Depending upon the type of installation, the cable and the joints have a measure of thermal isolation
from the above ground air temperature and in consequence experience a reduced range of ambient
temperature. Cables in the ground have the best protection from the ambient temperature. However
burying the cable deeper is counterproductive as the heat generated by the cable conductor in summer
must then flow through a higher thermal resistance path to reach the ground surface at its high summer
ambient temperature. If cables are buried deeper then the cost of the cable system may be increased
unnecessarily. The spacing between each individual cable must be increased or a larger size of copper
conductor must be selected. If the widest spacing and largest conductor are already selected, as is the
case for 500 kV Study Project in which a minimum of two cables per phase are required, then three
cables per phase may have to be selected to carry 3,000 MVA.
The minimum depth of burial in publically accessible land depends upon the regulations in the
particular country. A typical minimum depth for HV and EHV circuits to the top of the cable is 900
mm, this being increased to 1,050 mm in farmland to avoid damage from agricultural equipment. The
preliminary minimum depth of burial selected for the 500 kV Study Project was set at 1,300 mm to
give a reasonable measure of protection both from ploughs and the low winter surface temperature.
Ground isothermal plots indicated that the winter ground temperature at this depth would be
approximately -3oC. The 1,300 mm depth is also supported by its use in the 240 kV XLPE DESS
circuit to the north of downtown Edmonton. The DESS cable has an inbuilt optical fibre temperature
monitoring system, the records for which were analysed to establish the coldest cable temperatures in
the 2008/9 winter. It was found that the lowest temperatures were:
At an outdoor termination position in-air:

-46oC
Cable at a spot position in a particular duct run:
-8oC
Joints within a vault:
-7.5 oC
Joints in the vault were colder than the adjacent cable by: 3 to 4oC
Page 116 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
More details of the temperature records are given in Appendix, Section 9.

Experience with most EHV cable circuits is gained in countries which have a smaller range of
temperatures, for example: a) in temperate climates with typical air temperature of 25oC maximum, 15oC minimum and 40oC range and b) in tropical climates with typical 50oC maximum and 0oC
minimum, a range of 50oC. International specifications do not specify a minimum conductor
temperature design limit for EHV cable systems. There would be an expectation for installation in a
temperate climate that the conductor in an XLPE cable would operate from 90oC maximum, as given in
international specifications, to -10oC, which is not. However, there is no published information to
substantiate this lower temperature.
Specified electrical prequalification and type approval tests require that the cable test installation
comprising cable and joints be load cycled from a maximum conductor temperature of 95 to 105oC,
depending upon the particular test specification, down to an unspecified minimum temperature given
for a type test as 15oC above ambient with a maximum limit of 45oC. Type approval tests are normally
performed inside a test house with a typical ambient air temperature of 15 to 20oC. Prequalification
tests on the cable and joints are typically performed outside in a buried, duct-manhole or tunnel
installation. They receive, by nature of their installation and degree of conductor and insulation heating,
a measure of protection from cooling to sustained low winter air temperatures.
Low temperature operation is recommended to be included in the design of the cable system. New low
temperature proving test specifications are recommended to be drafted. The Proving Tests are
recommended to be agreed with the prospective suppliers before the bidding process. The winter
ambient air temperature and ground temperature are significantly lower than those for the 500 kV
Tokyo and Shanghai applications and so this experience cannot be used in full to give confidence for
use in the Edmonton Region of Alberta.
Some low temperature service experience and test knowledge already exists amongst manufacturers.
XLPE cables for lower system voltages and with smaller conductors have been supplied to countries
with low ambient temperatures (e.g. Russia, Northern China, Iceland, Norway, Sweden, Finland,
Northern Japan and Canada), although none have been advised to us to be as low as those in the
Edmonton Region of Alberta. The key questions are whether a) the temperatures of any circuits have
fallen to sub-zero ambient levels during a sustained outage and b) whether they were re-voltage
energized under cold conditions.
The manufacturers who replied to the request for 500 kV, low temperature operation responded
positively. They advised outline designs of joint types and their estimated minimum operating
temperatures, however these spanned a wide range (-30oC average, 0oC maximum and -50oC
minimum). Generally only a limited basis of experience, whether service, engineering or test, was
provided to substantiate these figures and so they should be noted with caution. Useful discussions
concerning low temperature performance were held with the utility and the two Japanese manufacturers
who had the experience of installing the nine year old 40 km long Shinkeiyo-Toyosu Project in Tokyo.
Page 117 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
It is recommended that:
Discussions be held with other utilities and manufacturers to quantify their service
experience in supplying and operating lower voltage XLPE cable and accessories
in low temperature applications.
Discussions be held with manufacturers and independent test houses to gain
comments on an outline low temperature test specification.
At a later stage of either technical prequalification or formal bid submissions,
manufacturers provide a full technical justification for their proposed low
temperature designs, based on calculations and preliminary, private in-house tests.
The method of funding the low temperature development work and Proving Tests requires
consideration. The possibilities are:
4.8.2
To require the selected manufacturers to perform the tests at their own expense
after award of the contract and prior to commencing manufacture of cable and
accessories.
To wholly or partly fund the manufacturers to perform tests in advance of the
bidding process as part of a prequalification requirement.
Low temperature risks
Prospective low temperature risks are listed below in decreasing order of ranking:
Loss of radial contact of a rubber pre-moulded insulation component in a joint or termination with
the cable XLPE insulation.
Disturbance of the interface with the rubber component by longitudinal retraction of the cable
insulation.
Cracking of epoxy resin insulating components containing embedded metalwork.
Splitting of premoulded rubber components.
Failure of the conductor connectors in terminations and joints, due to increased thermomechanical
retraction forces, noting that the large 2,500 mm2 conductor size will develop high retraction
forces.
Failure of the watertight seals between the metallic sheath and the accessory casings due to
thermomechanical retraction, resulting in water entry and/or loss of electrical continuity of the
screen conductors.
Failure of the watertight joint protection around the metallic casing, resulting in the electrical
shorting of the sheath cross-bonding system, corrosion and water entry.
Page 118 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Low temperature risks for joints

In prefabricated joints, both the XLPE cable insulation and the rubber premoulded joint insulation
have glass transition temperatures at which they become rigid, brittle materials of high stiffness
(modulus). It is essential that the premoulded rubber insulation retains sufficient elasticity, softness and
compressive deflection, such that it is able to continuously maintain intimate contact with the XLPE
cable insulation when both cables cool to low ambient temperature. If intimate contact is lost a void
between the cable and the accessory will form in which incipient electrical distress in the form of
partial discharging will occur leading to complete electrical failure of the accessory. The
commencement of the change from an elastomeric to a brittle state is not easily predictable from bench
top tests on small material samples, as it depends upon the particular loading conditions. Having
evaluated the material it is recommended that Proving Tests be performed on the complete accessory
assembled on the cable whilst voltage energized under a range of operating conditions e.g.:
Sustained minimum ambient temperature

Cyclic temperatures
Transient temperatures,
Each of the above loading conditions should be performed both with and without axial
thermomechanical loads applied by the adjacent cables to the joint.
The joint protection that surrounds the metallic casing is at risk of disturbance, cracking or loss of
adhesion. The international test specification IEC 62067[1] gives tests on outer protection for buried
joints. The test comprises the application of 20 temperature cycling whilst immersed under one metre
head of water, followed by electrical tests on the cable jacket, joint protections, sheath interrupter
insulation and bonding lead. The maximum temperature is within 15 to 20oC of the design temperature
of 90oC (i.e. 70 to 75oC) and the minimum temperature is within 10oC above the ambient of the test
house (unspecified). It is recommended that the method of test be amended to cool the joint down to 20oC during temperature cycling.
Low temperature risks for terminations

The low temperature operation risks are greater in an outdoor termination, because of the -50oC
ambient temperature. The cables can either be terminated directly into an air insulated termination or
into metalclad gas insulated switchgear terminations (GIS). (The abbreviation GIS should be taken to
refer to metalclad gas filled terminations as these may or may not be connected to switchgear).
Three designs exist for 500 kV XLPE outdoor terminations:
Capacitor cone and insulator, Figure 61. A stress cone formed of either moulded
rubber or wrapped polymeric sheet is fitted to the lower part of the cable core
Page 119 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
immediately adjacent to the cable core shield termination. A long cylindrical

capacitor cone is fitted above the stress cone. Cylindrical electrodes comprising
layers of aluminium foil are interspersed between cylindrical layers of a special
type of insulating paper. The top foil is connected to the conductor and the bottom
foil to ground. The length and overlap of each foil gives a uniform voltage
distribution from the top to the bottom of the termination that is better than the
other types described below. A cylindrical insulator of glazed porcelain or of
moulded silicone rubber sheds on a fibre reinforced epoxy resin impregnated tube
(a composite insulator). The insulator is fully filled with an insulating fluid. To
prevent swelling of the polymeric cable and accessory insulation a low viscosity
hydrocarbon oil is not selected. Either silicone fluid or a PIB fluid is used. This
design has the longest service experience at 500 kV. Low temperature risks are that
a) the insulating fluid would become too viscous to maintain impregnation of the
capacitor cone and b) that thermal contraction may disturb the insulating
components and fluid seals.
Figure 61, Outdoor termination with capacitor stress control
Page 120 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Stress cone and insulator. A premoulded rubber stress cone insulator is stretched
and slid over the cable insulation. A porcelain or composite insulator is fitted and
filled with insulating fluid. Low temperature risks are the same as those described
for capacitor cone and insulator termination and the prefabricated joints.
Prefabricated stress cone and insulator, Figure 62. This is a variant of the
prefabricated and insulator type. Firstly, a premoulded rubber stress cone
insulator, as described above is fitted. An epoxy resin casting with a conical bore is
then fitted above the stress cone. The rubber stress cone is inserted and held into
the conical bore by a bank of helical metallic springs. The purpose is a) to increase
the contact pressure at the critical moulding/cable interface and b) to replace the
fluid in the high electrically stressed zone around the stress cone with high strength
epoxy resin. Low temperature risks are the same as those described for capacitor
cone and insulator termination and the prefabricated joints.
Figure 62. Outdoor termination with prefabricated composite, premoulded stress cone
The following three designs exist for 500 kV GIS terminations. The low temperature risks are the same
as those described for the outdoor terminations, with the additional risk that cracks may occur within
the epoxy resin insulator adjacent to the cast-in metalwork.
Page 121 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Capacitor cone and insulator. This is closely similar to that described for the
outdoor design. The insulator is a cylindrical tube of cast epoxy resin of
significantly shorter length.
Stress cone and insulator, wet design. This is closely similar to that described for
the outdoor design. The insulator is a cylindrical tube of cast epoxy resin of
significantly shorter length. It is named a wet design because the insulator is
filled with dielectric fluid.
Prefabricated stress cone and insulator, dry design. The design is closely similar
to one half of a prefabricated composite joint. The external insulator is an epoxy
resin casting with a conical bore. The rubber stress cone is inserted into the conical
bore and held in intimate contact with the interfaces by a bank of helical metallic
springs. The design does not require to be filled with dielectric fluid and so is
named a dry design. The advantage is that no monitoring or maintenance checks is
required to check that the dielectric fluid is at the correct pressure and has not
leaked either into the cable or into the environment.
Low temperature risks for the XLPE cable

The cable remote from the accessories is considered to have a good low temperature performance
providing it is not subjected to movement when cold. The extruded XLPE insulation and MDPE or
HDPE jackets are robust mechanical entities. Test specifications exists to test the cable insulation and
the jacket for conditions likely to be experienced during installation in temperate climates, these being
bend tests, abrasion tests and impact penetration tests. It is recommended for the 500 kV Study Project
that these tests be performed at low temperature, for example at -20oC, to determine the minimum safe
temperature at which the cable can be installed a) to determine the duration of the season available for
installation and b) the ambient temperatures at which replacement cable could safely be installed
following a service failure in winter. In the UK it is practice for the cable reel to be preheated to above
-5oC for an MDPE or HDPE jacketed cable and to only install if the ambient temperature is above -5oC.
It is believed that other countries have lower limits. Standard practice for medium voltage XLPE cables
is to store indoors overnight in a heated garage before installation in cold weather. Experience near
Edmonton was that a medium voltage cable that was at -35C temperature split the insulation to the
conductor when an attempt was made to install it. The limiting minimum ambient temperature for
installation of a 500 kV, 2,500mm, cable must be quantified for the Edmonton region of Alberta.
Whilst the HPT is not planning to install any cable during the winter months due to the risk of damage
to a cable reel, a repair strategy would have to be prepared for all seasons.
In the cable factory, thermal contraction to ambient temperature occurs after a) the XLPE insulation
extrusion and cross-linking processes and b) the MDPE or HDPE jacket extrusion process. The
thermal contraction produces significant locked-in stress and strain. A manifestation of this is that
local longitudinal contraction occurs when the cable is cut during jointing. Most of the longitudinal
contraction is prevented by the distributed radial compressive and friction forces. The risk in temperate
Page 122 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
climates exists that excessive contraction will occur at the accessories. Specifications exist to test cable
samples in the factory to ensure that the magnitude of the contraction does not exceed a prescribed
limit.
For the 500 kV Study Project it is recommended that Proving Tests be formulated to ensure that
damage due to excessive contraction does not occur to the cable or terminations when the cable is
cooled to -50oC.
4.9
Types of cable installation
There are three types of installation that can be considered for a 500 kV cable land installation:
4.9.1
Direct burial
Duct-manhole
Tunnel
Direct Buried Installation
A direct buried installation in open land as shown in Figure 63 is the most efficient in terms of
installation costs as trenches of long length can be cut to match the maximum cable reel length. It also
slightly more efficient than a duct system in dissipating heat by natural cooling to the ground surface,
so it may be possible to select either a closer cable spacing or a smaller conductor size. In response to
inquiries for the Heartland Project, prospective manufacturers proposed maximum reel lengths of up to
700 metres for the 500 kV 2,500 mm2 cable.
Page 123 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 63. Typical direct buried 400kV cable trench containing one Group of Cables
A direct buried system gives the most intimate mechanical support to the cable and joints from the
thermomechanical loads generated by the expending and contracting cable conductor as it heats and
cools. A direct buried system is named as being thermomechanically rigidly constrained. The cables,
joints and terminations are prevented from moving either longitudinally or laterally, but in consequence
develop maximum axial loads during heating and cooling. The conductor connections, the termination
structures and the joint supports must be designed to withstand these forces.
It is good practice to a) encase the cables within the firm support and protection provided by cementcontaining materials such as cement bound sand (CBS) or fluidised thermal backfill (FTB) that set
solid and b) to sit the joints on a concrete pad, hold them by clamps (sometimes known as cable cleats)
and support them on CBS or FTB. CBS and FTB are designed to be sufficiently strong to support the
cables and withstand their loads, whilst being sufficiently weak to be removable in the event that the
cables have to be uncovered to effect a repair. In practice some materials can be difficult to remove
without damaging the cables so it is important to approve the material and to check it immediately prior
to use. In locations vulnerable to traffic ground loading (temporary or permanent traffic movements),
the cables and the joint bay may also be covered with a metallic plate.
In open land it is advantageous to dig a trench with battered sides, i.e. sides that are sloped to avoid
collapse, thus avoiding the cost of shoring (sometimes referred to as close-timbering) a rectangular
shaped trench. Close timbered trenches are required in locations of restricted width such as a)
Page 124 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
installation in urban streets and b) increased depth in open land, such as crossings under route
obstructions (roads, railroads and pipelines). Direct burial is not common in North America for EHV
cables.
The disadvantages of a direct buried installation are:
To install a given length, say 700 metres, of direct buried cable then the same
length of trench must be open. In built up urban areas open to traffic and the
public it may be difficult to obtain permission to open a long trench.
Setting up the trench for cable installation is complex and labour intensive. Skill
and experience are required.
Fencing and high security is required on the open trench and on the cable within it,
both to protect the public and vehicles from falling in and to protect the cable from
malicious damage and theft.
In certain environmentally important locations it may be required to fence the
trench and construct temporary bridges to permit indigenous creatures to cross the
trench.
To keep to the project schedule it is essential that the three reels holding the
particular lengths of cable for the designated open trench are delivered and are set
up on time.
Unpredictability of cable laying due to delays and trench damage by heavy rain,
flooding and snow falls.
The external protection is generally less than that provided by ducts encased in a
concrete duct bank. Direct buried cables are thus more susceptible to dig-ins and
third part damage.
Fault location and repair requires excavation of the Right of Way, work in
proximity to other cables and the addition of repair splices in the circuit.
4.9.1.1 Installation of the direct buried system

The trench is first dug; then a specially sieved or strained layer of thermally stabilised bedding,
typically dry CBS or fluid FTB is laid, compacted and smoothed. Cable rollers are then placed at close
spacing along the trench and skid plates are positioned around bends in the trench. Having ensured that
the bottom of the trench is clean, one cable is pulled in. 500 kV XLPE cables with a robust metallic
sheath and jacket are likely to be pulled in by a nose-pull. The leading end of the cable is attached to
a steel wire bond that is wound onto a powered winch positioned at the remote end of the trench. The
risk of damage to the metallic sheath on a 500 kV SCFF cable must be avoided as it contains the
pressure of the dielectric fluid. If it considered that there is risk of damage to the sheath of an XLPE
cable by excessive sidewall force at a bend, then the additional use would be made of a bond-pull (a
parallel wire bond to which the cable is tied at short intervals), or distributed cable engines (a pair of
Page 125 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
driven wheels or caterpillar tracks in contact with the cable). Cable engines would not be used if the
trench is expected to be wet as traction will be lost by slipping.
The first cable is carefully lifted off the rollers and placed in position on the floor of the trench. The
second and third cables are then pulled in. Having laid the three cables, their spacing is carefully
checked and adjusted. Ancillary services are then laid, usually in the corners of the trench, these being
small optical fibre P&T cables (pilot and telephone) or small empty ducts for future telecommunication
use. The array of cables is then covered (blinded) with the specified thickness of dry CBS or fluid FTB.
Robust cover tiles of concrete or plastic are laid to completely cover the blinding. Wide plastic marker
tapes are laid overall. Finally the trench is backfilled to ground level with the indigenous soil that had
been dug out. In some locations layers of road base and tarmac or concrete are laid to reinstate the
surface of the road or street.
4.9.2
Duct-manhole system
Duct-manhole installations are used in urban areas where it is not permissible to open a long length
trench. Although the materials are more expensive than a direct buried system, major advantages are:
The project program is more flexible as the installation date of the ducts is isolated
from that of the cable delivery. There is freedom to install cable spans in any
sequence at any position along the route.
The security measures and risks are reduced.
The joint vaults may be sealed until cable pulling occurs.
A high degree of protection is obtained if the ducts are encased in a duct block
formed of concrete or more usually of fluidised thermal backfill.
Cable installation does not require the same amount of skill as is needed for direct
burial since the ducts are designed to be within the mechanical design constraints
of the cable that is to be installed.
Cable fault repair would involve replacement of duct lengths so that additional
splices would not be added to circuit runs.
Splices are accessible for inspection and testing.
Pulling tensions can be more predictable.
A duct system is classed thermomechanically as being semi-constrained. Sufficient clearance is
provided in the duct to permit the cable to be pulled-in and to expand laterally when heated. The
advantage of lateral expansion is that the sinusoidal and helical patterns that form absorb some of the
thermal expansion strain and so reduce a) the axial thrust on the joints in the vaults and b) the sidewall
forces on the cable insulation at duct bends.
The disadvantages of a duct-manhole system are:
Differences in duct route geometry on either side of the vault apply differential
axial thrust on the joint, which can be of high magnitude. The cable clamping
Page 126 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
systems in the manholes have to be carefully designed to restrict movement on the

splices.
The cable metallic sheath is subjected to cyclic bending and the risk of fatigue
failure. It is important that the vault constraint system be designed to protect the
cable, joint and the support metalwork from buckling and slippage, as the loads
generated by a 500 kV 2,500 mm2 cable are high. It is equally important that the
cyclic sheath strains are calculated for the particular cable construction and duct
clearance to ensure that they fall within the fatigue limit. Thermomechanical duct
design for XLPE cables is now understood and design methods are available (EPRI
report 1001849 and NSpan software).
The possibility exists that in some locations, ground water will fill the ducts and
vaults and upon freezing may damage to the cable, joints and duct. This requires to
be evaluated as a consequence of the low ambient temperatures that occur in
Edmonton region of Alberta.
Each repair would usually involve the installation of a span length of cable
(manhole to manhole) thereby increasing the value of the inventory of spare
materials.
The civil installation cost of a duct-manhole system is generally greater than that
of a direct buried system
The ducts must be tested for blockage or breakage and any defects made good
before cables can be installed. This can delay installation.
If the pulling tension rises during cable installation, then there is little opportunity
for alterations to the cable pulling arrangement to allow the tension to be reduced.
4.9.2.1 Installation of ducts

Short lengths of duct are installed. The ducts vary in length according to the preferred duct material and
diameter. Small diameter polyethylene (PE) pipes are available on reels of 50 to 150 metre length. The
advantage of selecting a long length is that the number of duct joints is reduced, both saving time and
cost and in particular reducing risk of damage to the cable jacket when it is pulled in. Large diameter
PE pipes will be supplied in straight lengths of 13 metre length, this being dictated by truck length. To
reduce cost and time and to improve quality, four of these pipes may be jointed together at ground level
and then lowered into the trench.
PVC ducts that have a minimum temperature rating are commonly used in Canada. Some ducts are
rated as high as 90C. Joints are typically bell and spigot or with plain couplings and glued.
Fibre reinforced epoxy (FRE) ducts are rigid and supplied in 6 metre lengths. They are joined together
by bell and spigot, scarf joints. Great care has to be taken to ensure that the joints are of good quality
and the cable is pulled in the correct direction to reduce the risk of jacket damage. The claimed
Page 127 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
advantages of FRE are that it is a) unlikely to distort at bends and b) less likely to suffer thermal
damage in the event of a high energy cable fault, thus permitting the cable to be pulled-out.
The three ducts are positioned in the trench at the correct spacing by being fixed to plastic formers at
regular spacings. A fourth empty duct may be installed to house a replacement cable should a failure
occur and it is not possible to extract the faulted cable. Smaller auxiliary cables ducts are installed to
house the pilot and telecommunication cables.
Fluidised backfill is poured around the ducts to form a duct block.
A mole (or mandrel) is pulled through the duct to ensure that the duct is of correct circular diameter
and that there are no obstructions at the duct joints. The duct is also pigged to ensure it is clean. It is
good practise to inspect the inside of the duct using a CCTV pipe inspection system.
The ducts are sealed to the joint vault (historically named a manhole), which is usually a pre-cast
concrete construction. The joints are clamped to a constraint system which in turn is bolted to the walls
and floor of the vault. The vault also houses the link box. Alternatively in some installations a
temporary joint bay is formed, which after cable jointing has occurred, is backfilled, thereby reducing
cost. The disadvantage is that access to the joints is lost for maintenance and more that complexity is
required to seal the open duct ends to the cable to prevent entry of the backfill.
4.9.3
Tunnel Installation
Cable tunnels are installed in cities, where:
It is not reasonably possible either to find a route in roads congested with other
services, or to obtain permission to open trenches and stop traffic.
Part of the route is required to cross under a major obstacle, such as a wide river.
Tunnels are generally the most expensive form of construction; however they have the advantages of:
Providing independence from weather delays during tunnel construction, cable
installation and jointing.
Providing uniform route cross-section geometry to facilitate the installation of the
cable, without the need to incur engineering complexity and cost increases
associated with route obstructions encountered at ground level.
Providing a protected environment for the cable, free from risk of third party digins and, if the tunnel is designed to be water tight, reduced risk of water damage to
the cable, joints and link boxes.
Providing access for the 500 kV Study Project to all parts of the cable at any time
of the year for monitoring, maintenance and repair.
Page 128 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Providing an asset for future use, either in installing more circuits or in replacing
or repairing existing cable without need to disturb the ground at surface level.
Permitting use of a cable with a lower cost, less robust design of metallic sheath.
However, the proposals by the cable manufacturers for the Heartland Project were
did not show this.
Deep tunnels are typically built at 20 to 60 metres depth, are circular and are equal to or greater than 3
metres in internal diameter. The thermal resistance is too great to permit heat to dissipate naturally to
the ground surface and so forced cooling is employed by drawing cool air down a shaft. The air flows
along the tunnel where it extracts the heat from the cable to be vented to atmosphere at another shaft at
a typical spacing of 3 to 5 km. A maximum air flow rate of 5 metres per second and a maximum
exhaust air temperature of 50oC are typically specified. Acoustic baffles are fitted to reduce cooling fan
noise to an acceptable level. A tunnel design study was performed for the 500 kV Study Project showed
that for a 5 km long section between shafts it is possible to cool the cables in summer and, by
restricting air flow in winter, to limit the minimum joint temperature in the tunnel to 0 oC. This would
give a wider choice of joint design and reduce low temperature risk.
Shallow tunnels are normally of the cut and cover type and are rectangular in cross section. The
advantage is that they are lower in cost and prospectively faster to construct as tunnelling machines and
deep shafts are not required. It is possible to dissipate some of the cable heat by conductive heat flow to
the ground surface, but forced air flow will still be required.
4.9.4
Service experience with different methods of installation at 400 kV and 500 kV
The first major 400 kV cable circuit in Europe was installed direct buried in Copenhagen in 1997[24].
In 2005 a 400 kV 2,500mm2 XLPE cable circuit with a 1,600 MVA power rating was commissioned in
a 21 km long deep tunnel under London[32] [33]. The first major 500 kV 2,500 mm2 XLPE circuit was
commissioned in 2000 and was in a 40 km shallow tunnel under Tokyo.
Table 22 shows that at 400 kV two thirds of the three phase cable lengths are direct buried and these
comprise two thirds of the number of installations. One third of the circuit lengths are installed in
tunnels. The average three phase circuit length at 400 kV is approximately 10 km for both buried and
tunnel installations.
System Voltage kV
400
500
TOTAL
Direct buried
km
#
225.4
20
1.5
1
226.9
21
Duct
km
1.5
0
1.5
#
1
0
1
Tunnel
km
#
109.9
9
114.3
2
224.2
11
All Types
km
#
336.8
30
115.8
3
452.6
33
Table 22 EHV installation types, three phase cable lengths and number of projects
Page 129 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
There are two significant installations to date at 500 kV one in-service, the 40 km long ShinkeiyoToyosu Project in Tokyo, and one in construction, the 17 km long Shibo Sub Station circuit in
Shanghai[2], both of which are installed in tunnels. The average three phase cable lengths for the two
tunnel installations is 40 km, this being the same length as would be required for the 10 km scenario in
the 500 kV Study Project which has a maximum of four groups of cable.
Combining the 400 kV and 500 kV installation statistics, results in 50 % of the project three phase
lengths being direct buried and 50 % being in tunnels, with the average length per project being 10 km
and 20 km in tunnels.
One of the major disadvantages of tunnels, especially if more than one circuit is installed, is fire. An
incident on one cable can cause fire or arc damage to adjacent cables or circuits. Whilst XLPE cables
are superior to SCFF in this respect, they will still burn under some circumstances.
4.9.5
Service experience with forced cooled systems
The majority of long tunnel installations are cooled by forced air ventilation, for example, the 6.3 km
and 5.2 km long, 400kV, 1,600 mm, installations in Germany[25][26] and the 20.6 km long, 400 kV,
2,500mm installation in UK[31][32][33]. Some tunnels have assisted cooling by the presence of water
circulation in one or more pipes separate from the cables with the function of cooling the tunnel
air[27][28][29].
The majority of direct buried and duct-manhole systems are naturally cooled. Two notable forced
cooled XLPE cable systems are:
direct buried, 400 kV 1,200 mm installation in Austria[46] which uses lateral water
pipe cooling.
400 kV 1,600 mm system in the Netherlands[48] which uses integral sheath water
cooling.
Forced cooling is described in Section 3.11.
4.10 Gas insulated lines

GIL is considered to be a feasible alternative to XLPE cable for the 500 kV Study Project for
installation in a tunnel. At this time, GIL is not considered to be suitable for long length burial in the
ground and so is not recommended. Technical information and budgetary bids were sought from
suppliers of GIL, however not all responded. GIL was offered for installation in a tunnel and budgetary
prices were provided. GIL was not offered for direct burial in the ground.
The direct burial method of installation was considered by HPT and CCI to provide the most
economical cable and installation costs, for which conventional XLPE cable had been proposed by
suppliers. In consequence GIL was not an available alternative and was not evaluated further. Should
Page 130 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
installation in a tunnel be revisited for the 500 kV Study Project, then GIL is recommended to be reassessed as a prospective alternative solution.
4.10.1 Description of GIL

GIL (gas insulated lines) are extended lengths of GIS (gas insulated switchgear) busbar, of which there
is large worldwide experience up to and including 500 kV.
The technical definition[53] of GIL that separates it from GIS is:
where all or part of the HV gas-insulated line is directly buried, or
where the HV gas-insulated transmission line is located, wholly or partly, in an area
accessible to the public; or
where the HV gas-insulated transmission line is long (typically longer than or equal to
500m).
Figure 64 shows a cross section of the component parts of GIL, which are describes below. A
description is also given in Reference[54].
Figure 64. Component parts of a 400 kV gas insulated line
Page 131 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Conductor
The conductor is a hollow busbar normally fabricated from aluminium tube. Example dimensions are
280 mm diameter with an area of 13,000 to 15,000 mm2. A conventional cable has a maximum size of
copper conductor of typically 2,500 mm2; the equivalent size in aluminium being approximately
4,100 mm2. Thus GIL possesses 3 to 4 times more conductor area and has the prospective capability of
achieving a similar increase in power capacity. The load current of 3,460 A for the 500 kV Study
Project rating of 3,000 MW could be carried by one Group of three GIL compared to two groups of
conventional cable.
Sections of busbar are typically 13 m long. They are connected by electrical plug-in connectors that
permit it to axially expand and contract when heated. Thus the generation of thermomechanical forces
in the busbar is avoided. Sliding elastomeric seals are provided to contain any particulate contaminants
that may be produced and prevent them from entering the gas insulation. The specified permissible
temperature rise of the connector usually dictates the maximum current rating of the GIL.
Support Insulator
The busbar is supported on insulators, as shown in Figure 64. The insulators are cast from a
thermosetting material that is formulated to reduce the accumulation of space charge and the attraction
of particles. Special diaphragm insulators are used to support the busbar at the ends of a gas section
and segregate the gas compartments. These insulators are usually conical in shape and have sufficient
thickness to withstand the pressure forces when one GIL gas section is depressurised. In the event of
an internal electrical fault the diaphragm insulators stop the power arc, (which travels longitudinally
under Lorentz forces), from passing into the adjacent GIL section, thereby limiting the length of
surface damaged busbar and enclosure.
Insulating Gas
The insulating gas is either a) 100% SF6 (sulphur hexafluoride) at a pressure of approximately 4 to 5
bar at 20oC, or b) an SF6/N2 nitrogen mixture, for example 20% to 80% with a pressure of
approximately 7 bar. The electro negative properties of SF6 gas give high breakdown strength. The gas
mixture was introduced to reduce the concentration of SF6 available to leak into the atmosphere.
Special gas handling plant is available to store and refurbish the gas mixture for reuse.
Enclosure
The enclosure is a spirally welded, aluminium alloy tube with typical dimensions of 600-700 mm
diameter and 10 mm wall thickness. The thickness is calculated to:
Provide sufficient low electrical resistance to limit the heat generation and temperature rise to
specified limits. A voltage is induced along the enclosure by the magnetic field from the
Page 132 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
primary load current in the busbar. The GIL enclosure is solidly bonded to adjacent phases and
to ground at certain positions along the route. The induced voltage drives a circulating current
along the enclosure. The enclosure has low electrical resistance and so the magnitude of the
circulating axial current is high and is of almost equal magnitude to the load current in the
busbar. In comparison, the metallic sheaths and shields of conventional transmission class
cables are specially bonded to prevent current circulation and to avoid the derating effects of
unwanted heat.
Withstand the internal gas pressure and remain within its elastic limit.
Prevent power arc burn-through in the event of a short circuit.
Particle traps are positioned on the floor of the enclosure. The traps locally distort the electrostatic field
and so generate dielectrophoretic force, which attracts and traps any conducting particles that may be
present.
In early designs, the 13 m long sections of GIL enclosure were provided with flanges that permitted
them to be bolted together on site. Present designs of GIL enclosure are flangeless, Figure 65 and
Figure 66, and are joined together on site by automatic orbital pipe welding machines. This technique
achieves economies in material and fabrication and prospectively reduces the risk of gas leakage.
The diameters of the busbar and the enclosure are optimised to provide an economical design by:
Achieving the minimum radial electrical clearance necessary at the limiting electrical design
stress at the busbar. The optimum geometry occurs when the diameters are in the ratio of 2.7:1.
Increasing the gas pressure to raise the electrical withstand strength of the insulating gas, whilst
remaining within the pressure retraining design limits of the enclosure.
Ensuring that the resultant dimensions maximise convective and radiant heat transfer.
The inner and outer surfaces of the busbar and enclosure may be treated and coated to improve the
electrical withstand strength and heat transfer.
For applications in air the outer surface of the GIL enclosure is typically left unjacketed to maximise
heat transfer. For direct burial the enclosure would require to be protected by a corrosion resistant layer
of the type used on pipe lines, together with a design of cathodic/electrolytic cell protection. Such
protection would be required to withstand the enclosure currents (circulating current and short circuit
through current).
Page 133 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 65. Two groups of 275 kV gas insulated line installed in a tunnel
Courtesy of Siemens
Figure 66. One group of 400 kV gas insulated line installed on stilts in a substation
Courtesy of Siemens
4.10.2 GIL Experience

Table 23 shows that the first recorded applications of GIL occurred in 1972 to 1975 and were direct
buried. Direct burial was not repeated until 1998 when EDF[55] performed long term tests on buried 400
kV GIL to evaluate its possible use in France as an alternative to overhead line. EDF also performed
Page 134 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
similar tests on conventional direct buried 400 kV XLPE cable. Applications followed in France for
conventional 400 kV XLPE cable, but to date have not occurred for buried GIL.
Table 23 shows that GIL has generally been selected for special applications that require high power
transmission in air in the controlled environment of a substation or tunnel (note: as such these fall
outside the original definition of GIL). The number of applications compared to conventional cables
and overhead lines is small. The longest circuit length of GIL is 3.25 km, which occurred in a utility
owned tunnel in Japan in 1998.
Table 23 records the in-progress installation for RWE Transportnetz Strom GmbH at Frankfurt airport
in Germany of two 0.9 km long 400 kV GIL circuits. This application is of significance as it is the first
true commercial application of direct buried GIL with a length of greater than 0.5 km for 33 years. The
commissioning date is planned for the first quarter of 2010. In their internet web press release, a
spokesman for RWE said that What we want to do with this pilot project is to try this transmission
technology as an alternative to cable solutions. We have already carried out joint tests with the
manufacturer on a prototype, which have provided convincing proof of its technical feasibility. Each
GIL conductor matches the rating of one overhead line conductor of 2,598 A. A group of three GIL has
a rating of 1,800 MW. 500 lengths of 10.8 m long GIL tube have been delivered to site for the
conductor bus-bars to be plugged together and the outer enclosure to be welded in-situ to make gastight joints.
Table 23. Details of significant GIL applications
Year
Length
Circuit
Total
km
km
Voltage
Current
kV
SF6
%
GIL Type
Installation
Method
Application
Type
1972
0.414
0.414
230
100
buried
commercial
1975
1.45
1.45
138
1250
100
buried
commercial
1975
0.58
500
3000
100
buried
commercial
1977
0.13
0.13
138
100
buried
commercial
1975
-
0.7
-
1.4
0.14
400
275
820
6300
100
100
tunnel
tunnel
commercial
test
1998
0.07
400
3200
20
tunnel
test
1999
0.1
400
4000
20
buried
test
1998
0.3
400
4000
10
buried
test
1998
2 x 3.25
19.5
275
2730
5980
100
tunnel
commercial
Page 135 of 310
Project
Na
me
US, Hudson SS
NJ
US, Lynchburg
Indianapolis
US, Ellensburg
Washington
US, Spy Run SS
Indianapolis
Germany, Wehr
Japan, CRIEPI
Test Site
Germany, IPH
Test Site
Germany, IPH
Test Site
France, EDF
Test Site
Japan,
Shinmeika-


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
1997-2000
8 x ~2.1
17.0
400
1200
100
stilts
commercial
2001
6 x 0.4
2.4
220
2000
20
tunnel
commercial
2002
5 x 0.24
1.2
500
4000
60
stilts
commercial
2004
1.64
1.64
400
4000
10
commercial
2010
0.9
1.8
400
2600
stilts and
covered
trench
buried
>2010
0.155
0.155
400
20
tunnel
Pilot/
commercial
commercial
Tokai[56]
Saudi Arabia,
PP9[57]
Switzerland,
Palexpo[58]
Thailand, Sai
Noi[59]
UK, Hams
Hall[60]
Frankfurt
Airport
Austria,
Limberg II[61]
4.10.3 GIL: Advantages and Disadvantages

GIL has advantages of:
A low characteristic impedance, because the inductive and capacitive reactances are of similar
magnitude and so nearly balance. The impedance of GIL is more resistive than that for
overhead line (inductive) and underground cable (capacitive) and thus has prospective system
design merits for long distance transmission as there is less need for reactive compensation than
there is with conventional cable.
Suitability for installation in a tunnel, Figure 65, having low risk of fire spread to other circuits.
Suitability for installation on stilts in non-public land, Figure 66.
High power, voltage and ampacity ratings on a single group of three GIL, for example 4,300
GW, 500 kV and 5,000 A in a force ventilated tunnel application.
Near zero external emf.
Ease of connection to GIS, thereby avoiding the complexity and cost of either overhead line
bushings or cable terminations.
GIL has prospective disadvantages of:
Doubt about suitability for direct burial, because of:

o High mechanical loads in the enclosure and in expansion bellows due to the
superimposition on to existing pressure related loads of a) axial thermomechanical
loads due to constrained enclosure thermal expansion and b) soil loading.
o Increased difficulty of protecting the large diameter, pressure retaining enclosure from
corrosion compared to conventional cables.
o Risk of bimetallic corrosion between the enclosure and the ground electrode
connections.
Inability to follow routes requiring changes in direction of small bending radii.
Page 136 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Tunnels and shafts need to be designed differently from those required for conventional
flexible cables, to a) withstand different and prospectively greater mechanical point loading at
some fixing points and b) have shaft access to lower the rigid sections of GIL and to transport
them to the point of assembly.
Risk of leakage of increased volumes of the greenhouse gas SF6 due to the high volume of long
length GIL. SF6 is a green house gas with a Global Warming Potential (GWP) of 22,200. To
reduce the leakage risk, GIL is segregated into smaller gas sections, enclosures are welded and
diluted gas mixtures with reduced concentrations of SF6 are available.
Increased complexity of the maintenance necessary to monitor the GIL pneumatic equipment
compared with overhead lines and buried cables.
The risk of impairment of the dielectric performance due to particulate contaminants. The
number of connections between GIL sections in a long route increases the risk and prospective
failure rate.
Risk of liquefaction of the gas at extreme low ambient temperatures. It was stated by a GIL
supplier that SF6 is suitable for operation down to -40oC.
4.11 High Temperature Superconducting Cable

Present day funding of research and development into HTSC (high temperature superconducting)
cables has produced a succession of technical papers and press releases concerning possible
applications. The following account is written to permit the reader to distinguish between the present
state of the art and possible future applications with respect to the required reliability and availability of
the power system. It will be seen that good progress has been made in the installation of short length,
low to medium power HTSC field trials.
Approximately 50% of the manufacturers of conventional transmission class cable who were
approached with respect to the 500 kV Study Project also have an R&D activity in HTSC cable. These
manufactures were not specifically requested to provide bids for HTSC cables and equally none of
them offered this possibility as an alternative to conventional cables for the 500 kV Study Project.
The feasibility study concluded that significant progress and experience is still to be gained before
HTSC cable can be considered to be ready for a major, long length, high power, commercial
application such as the 500 kV Study Project. The time until a commercially available and
operationally viable high power system becomes available is not predictable at this time.
4.11.1 Superconductivity
The metallic conductors used in conventional room temperature cables posses the property of electrical
resistance to current flow, which is manifested in the generation of unwanted heat and power loss.
Conventional cables and their installation environments are designed to a) reduce the magnitude of the
Page 137 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
heat and power loss by selecting a large conductor size and b) dissipate the heat efficiently to ambient
temperature. The present generation of superconducting cable is quite the opposite as it operates at a
very low temperature. It is necessary to:
Design the HTSC cable and its installation environment to minimise the inrush of heat into
the cable from ambient temperature.
Provide a forced cooled refrigeration system to extract a) the residual heat that enters the
cable from the environment, b) the heat that is generated within the HTSC cable by the
passage of AC current and c) the heat that is generated by the flow of the coolant.
Should an ideal superconductor be found it would exhibit zero resistance, zero heat generation and an
unlimited current rating at room temperature. An ideal superconductor would conceptually permit a
group of three, small diameter cables, to transmit an unlimited level of power, at low AC voltage, over
very long distances, with complete independence of the thermal environment. Should such a
superconducting material be found it would revolutionise all electrical equipment and the present way
of life. For the latter reasons intensive research into superconductivity has been directed since the
discovery in 1911 of the first superconductor, this being the metal mercury in solid form at a
temperature of 4.2 K (-268.8oC) i.e. a temperature close to absolute zero at 0 K (-273oC). The physics
of superconductivity is described in Tinkham[62].
4.11.2 Low temperature superconductors

Mercury was identified to be within a group of superconducting metals and alloys named Type 1
superconductors[63]. Type 1 superconductors are now referred to as low temperature superconductors
(LTS). It was found that the superconducting property ceased to exist above certain limits of critical
current density, critical magnetic flux density and critical temperature, which limited the
superconductors use to special applications. LTS materials have critical temperatures in the range of 8
K to 20 K (-265 oC to -253 oC). This temperature is sufficiently low to:
Restrict the choice of coolant (also named the cryogen) to liquid helium this being a high cost
liquid. Helium is suitable for the extraction of heat by circulation in liquid form in the
temperature range between 3 - 5 K (melting point) and 4.2 K (boiling point).
Restrict the choice of thermal insulation to a vacuum vessel containing wrappings of super
insulation (also named the cryostat).
Require powered refrigerating equipment to extract heat from the helium cryogen.
One of the most suitable Type 1 LTS superconductors for industrial application was found to be
Niobium and some alloys, such as niobium-tin, that being ductile could be formed into tapes and wires.
These are suitable for the fabrication of the coils of electromagnets to generate magnetic fields of high
strength in high technology applications such as clinical magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), electrical
Page 138 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
power storage devices and atomic particle accelerators. These applications are rendered practical
because the coil is contained in a box shaped cryostat of comparatively small dimensions.
Power cable applications of superconductivity are perhaps the most difficult to realise[63][64]. The long
circuit lengths of typically 0.3 km to 50 km, and their inaccessibility for maintenance, requires
containment in an equally long vacuum containing cryostat envelope. Pumps and heat exchangers are
required to be distributed along the route, each having high reliability, availability and long life.
The first experimental, model superconducting AC cable was constructed in 1968 in London. It was
designed to operate at 138 kV and to carry 1,000 MVA. The model was only a few metres in length and
was far from a practical component of a transmission system, comprising only one cable, having a
limited design of termination and no joints. In 1984 a technical paper reported field trials performed at
the Brookhaven National Laboratory on a more advanced single phase cable rig designed to carry 1,000
MVA. In 1983 a technical paper reported a demonstration application in which a 50m length of
superconducting cable was connected for a period of time to the Austrian National Grid. The
development of these LTS cables was not taken further as they could not compete on cost with
conventional cables having copper wire conductors and natural heat dissipation.
4.11.3 High temperature superconductors

In 1986 superconducting properties were discovered in a ceramic, mixed metal oxide material LBCO
(lanthanum barium copper oxide) with a critical current of 38 K ( -235 K). This led to the formulation
of the HTS group of superconductors. The critical temperature is taken to be the current at which a one
metre length of wire has perceptible resistive properties by exhibiting a potential difference of 100
V. HTSC materials have sufficiently high critical temperatures to permit a useful magnitude of
current to be carried at liquid Nitrogen (LN2) temperature. The cost of LN2 as a coolant is
approximately 3% that of liquid Helium. This cost driver reinvigorated the R&D of superconducting
cable applications. LN2 is suitable for the extraction of heat by circulation in liquid form in the
temperature range between 63 K (-210oC), the melting point, and 77.2 K (195.8oC), the boiling point.
The maximum permissible current per wire is progressively increased by reducing the temperature
below the critical temperature. To achieve a worthwhile cable ampacity rating, the operating
temperature should ideally be close to 63 K (-210oC) and the critical temperature of the HTS material
should be significantly greater than 77.2 K (-195.8oC).
The brittle-like nature of the ceramic superconducting material requires that it be supported either in, or
on, a metallic carrier. In this way the bending strain is uniformly distributed and maintained within safe
limits when:
It is wound onto a spool for delivery to the cable factory.

The many layers are wrapped onto a cylindrical former to construct the cable conductor.
The finished cable is wound onto the despatch drum
Page 139 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The cable is installed around the various bends present in the route.
The HTSC superconducting wires are actually ribbon shaped. Two types have been developed for
power cable prototypes:
OPIT (oxide powder in tube) wire technology. This produces 1G (first generation) wires). A
powder of BSCCO (bismuth strontium calcium copper oxide) is used to fill a round silver
tube. BSCCO has a critical temperature of ~110 K (-163 oC). The tube is swaged to a small
diameter and is then flattened into the shape of a ribbon. The ribbon is heated to high
temperature to turn the powder into a ceramic. The swaging process also stretches the wire
ribbon to a length in excess of 1,000 m. The dimensions of the ribbon are typically 4 mm wide
by 0.2 mm thick (with an area of 0.8 mm2). The majority of HTSC cable prototypes have used
OPIT wires, these being reasonably robust and hermetically sealed. The silver encapsulation
permits the ribbons to be jointed together by soldering without losing the superconducting
properties. The down side is the silver tube is a significant cost item.
CC (coated conductor) technology. This produces 2G (second generation) wires. A buffer layer
is deposited onto a thin, wide metallic ribbon. Thin layers of superconducting material are then
deposited onto the buffer layer. The superconducting material is YBCO (yttrium, barium
copper oxide), or similar. YBCO has a critical temperature of ~92-110 K (-181 oC to -163 oC).
The tape is slit to a similar 4 mm width to the OPIT wire, but is usually thinner. The advantage
of the 2G wire is that its manufacturing cost is lower. The initial disadvantage is that the
effective critical current density has been lower than that of the 1G wire, although it is hoped
that this will be increased with development.
An individual 1G wire at 77 K is prospectively capable of carrying a current in a practical AC

transmission application of 50-100 A, (in comparison the critical current in an ideal DC transmission
application may be 100- 200 A). In comparison, a conventional copper conductor wire of 0.8 mm2 in a
naturally cooled, buried AC cable would carry approximately 0.8 A and in a forced cooled application
~1.5 A. For the same conductor size, the prospective increase in AC ampacity rating of the HTSC
conductor is in the range of 30-60 times. For reasons of overall cable and system design the achieved
increase in power in a prototype AC cable has typically been 3-5 times higher than a conventional
cable of the same overall size.
4.11.4 Construction of a conceptual HTSC cable

As with a conventional cable circuit, a minimum group of three cables is required for an AC
transmission system, which can be one three core cable or three single core cables. For the 500 kV
Study Project power level of 3,000 MW, the cables are of large diameter and a single core construction
is preferred.
Page 140 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
A conceptual 3,000 MW cable design is shown in Figure 67. The cable would have similar dimensions
to the 500 kV 2,500mm2 cable described in this report and thus prospectively the despatch reel would
accommodate the same typical 700 m length. The HTSC conductor would be required to carry
approximately 12,550 A, compared to 1,732 A for the 500 kV Study Project XLPE cable. To take
advantage of the high current rating, the system voltage may be reduced from 500 kV to 138 kV. The
reduction in voltage permits the thickness of insulation to be reduced. The reduction in thickness
provides room for the additional outer HTSC conducting layers and the vacuum filled cryostat. The
reduction in system voltage also permits the insulation design stresses to be reduced for both the cable
and the joints.
The components of one of the three single core HTSC cables are described below Figure 67. A
photograph of a 13 kV concentric three phase cable is shown in Figure 68.
Figure 67. Cross section of a conceptual HTSC cable
Former
Cable manufacture starts with a flexible tube or cylinder.
Inner Quench Conductor
A conventional copper wire conductor is stranded (wound) onto the former. The purpose of the quench
conductor is to carry the rated short circuit current for the specified circuit breaker clearance time. This
Page 141 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
is because sufficient HTSC wires are applied to take the rated current of 12,550 A only and thus they
would lose their superconducting property and would quench. The quench conductor is placed inside
the HTSC conductor to protect it from magnetic induction.
Inner HTSC Conductor
Sufficient HTSC wire ribbons are applied to carry the rated current; for example 170 tapes each
carrying an average of say 75 A. The diameter of the former is increased until the magnetic field on the
outer layer of HTSC tapes falls to a sufficient value that the 100 A superconducting rating can be
achieved (in conjunction with a suitably low LN2 temperature of say 65 K.) Layers of tapes are
applied in alternate lay directions (left and right hand). The detailed construction of an AC HTSC
conductor are important. The AC magnetic field induces eddy currents in the metallic components
which must be kept small a) to reduce generation of conventional I2R heating in them and b) to reduce
the magnitude of any residual magnetic fields that do not cut the superconductor parallel to its surface
as these adversely affect its superconducting properties.
Insulation and Shields
For the conceptual Study Project HTSC cable a CD (cold dielectric construction is preferred). In a CD
cable the whole cable is housed within an LN2 cooled cryostat. A wet dielectric has the most
experience of use in prototype CD cables. The wet type comprises lapped tapes, which are 100%
impregnated with pressurised LN2, which performs the role of the dielectric fluid. The tapes are
usually PPLP (polypropylene laminated paper). The wet CD cable is therefore closely similar to the
SCFF cable except the hydrocarbon impregnant DDB (dodecyl benzene) is replaced with LN2.
The inner and outer shields are formed of conducting tapes.
Inner HTSC Conductor
Layers of HTSC wire ribbons are applied to form the outer conductor. After the cable system is
installed, the three outer HTSC conductors are bonded together and to ground at their ends. The
magnetic field from the inner conductor induces a voltage in the outer HTSC conductor, that circulates
a current of equal and opposite magnitude. This has the essential benefit of eliminating the magnetic
field external to the cable, such the three cables are magnetically isolated and shielded from each other,
thereby ensuring that the HTSC tapes only experience a cylindrical field. The secondary benefit is that
the surroundings of an HTSC cable experience zero external magnetic field. The downside is that
almost twice the number of HTSC wires are required.
Outer Quench Conductor
A conventional copper wire conductor is applied onto the insulation outer HTSC conductor. This
performs the same protective role as the inner quench conductor in carrying short circuit current.
Page 142 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Sheath
Depending upon the particular design of the HTSC cable a sheath is applied over the cable core. In
the case of a wet design of CD cable the sheath may be a permeable tape. In the case of a dry design
of CD cable, the sheath would be formed of, say, longitudinally welded stainless steel is applied to
permit the surrounding LN2 to permeate the insulation and conductors.
Annular LN2 Duct
The duct is formed by the annular gap bounded on the inner side by the sheath and on the outer side by
the cryostat. LN2 is pumped longitudinally along the cable for a distance named a hydraulic cooling
section. The pressure of the LN2 falls along the hydraulic section due to its hydraulic impedance. The
maximum inlet pressure is typically 20 bar and the minimum outlet pressure is typically 5 bar. The
minimum pressure limit ensures that the insulation is fully impregnated and that the LN2 boiling point
is depressed such that N2 gas filled voids cannot form in the insulation.
Cryostat
The cryostat comprises two stainless steel sheaths with an annular gap in between. The inner sheath is
wrapped with super thermal insulation comprising multiple layers of thin metalized mylar tape. The
purpose of the super insulation is to reflect radiant heat and prevent it entering the cable. The annular
gap is evacuated and held at a high vacuum to minimise conductive heat transfer into the cable. A
chemical getter may be included within the gap to absorb residual gas.
Outer Jacket
The cryostat is covered with an extruded polymeric layer (for example polyethylene) similar to that
applied to conventional cables. The jacket provides protection from abrasion during installation and
from corrosion when installed below ground level.
Page 143 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 68. 13 kV, three phase, concentric HTSC cable construction

Courtesy NKT Cables
4.11.5 HTSC Cable System Experience
Page 144 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
records the progress of the development of HTSC cables. The HTSC cable systems have moved from
being laboratory test prototypes to field demonstration test prototypes. Operational experience is now
being gained when connected to either industrial or utility grid systems. This progress and the
majority, if not all of the projects, have been assisted by funding.
The applications fall into two types:
Low system voltage, three core cable applications, in which a conventional cable application is
replaced by an HTSC cable of similar size, but of three to five times power supply capability.
The HTSC cable can increase the power rating of a substation in an existing downtown
location, when there is no room a) to bring in either multiple conventional cables, or a single
higher voltage cable and b) to locate a voltage step-down transformer. Plans were being
prepared[65] [66] in 2007 and 2008 for a possible 6 km long demonstration project in down town
Amsterdam. An existing 150 kV gas pressure cable in a pipeline with a power rating of 100
MVA was proposed to be replaced by a 50 kV concentric three phase HTSC cable having a 2.5
times higher power rating of 250 MVA. An example of a 13 kV cable with a concentric three
phase construction is shown in Figure 68.
Higher system voltage, single core applications, in which the need to install a short length of
higher voltage transmission cable can be avoided. The commissioning of the 138 kV, 574
MWA, single core demonstration cables at Holbrook, Long Island Sound, in 2008, is the closest
application to the 500 kV 3,000, MW Study Project. Work to develop a 225 kV HTSC was
reported in 2000[67], was subsequently discontinued. It is understood that R&D is presently
being performed in Japan to produce a 275 kV cable. For an HTSC cable to be considered for a
future commercial 3,000 MW application the following would require to be demonstrated:
o An increase in cable current rating from 2,400 A to ~12,500 A,
o Practical designs of joints that can be quickly assembled and which are suitable for
maintenance spares. At present there are none in the demonstration cable.
o Ability to scale up manufacturing capacity from supplying a 0.6 km route length to
supplying a 10 km route.
o Ability of the vacuum filled cryostats to maintain their long term thermal efficiency and
to be maintained.
o The operational reliability and availability of the LN2 hydraulic circuits together with
their distributed pumping and refrigeration equipment.
Page 145 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Year
Design
Current
Length
Power
Voltage
Cable Type
Cold or
Cores
Warm
#
Joint
Type
MVA
kV
1999
50
400
115
2,000
WD
yes
test
2001-2007
30
27
12.4
1,250
CD
3 con
no
grid
demo
2001-2003
30
104
30
2,000
WD
1x3
no
grid
demo
2002
100
115
66
1,000
CD
no
test
2003-2005
500
133
77
3,000
CD
no
test
2005-2006
100
50
23
1,260
CD
yes
test
2006
300
69
13.2
3,000
CD
yes
grid
demo
Page 146 of 310
3 con
Application
Location
Italy, Milan HV
lab[68]
US, Carrolton,
Georgia
Denmark, AMK
SS,
Copenhagen[69]
Japan, Yokosuka
test site[70]
Japan, Yokosuka
test site[71]
Korea, KEPCO
test centre[72][73]
US, Bixby,
Columbus,
Ohio[74] [75]


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
2006-2009
350
48
34.5
800
CD
yes
grid
demo
2008
610
574
138
2,400
CD
1x3
no
grid
demo
2010-2011
300
62
13.8
3,000
CD
3 con
no
grid
demo
2011
1,760
48
13.8
2,000
CD
3 con
yes
grid
demo
US, Albany, NY
US, Holbrook,
Long Island
Sound[76] [77]
US, Manhattan,
NY City
US, LabarreMetairie SS,
Louisiana, New
Orleans
Table 24. Details of some HTSC cables and applications

Notes:
CD: cold dielectric; a cable in which the conductor(s) and insulation is cooled to LN2 temperature.
WD: warm dielectric; a cable in which the inner conductor contains a LN cooling duct and is surrounded by the cryostat.
Everything outside the cryostat is nominally at room temperature. the insulation is applied over the cryostat and so is
named a warm dielectric.
Cores:
1:
one single core cable manufactured for laboratory test.
1 x 3:
three single core cables usually manufactured for a demonstration trial application connected to a
utility or industrial grid.
3:
a three core cable in which the three cores are housed within a common cryostat.
3 con:
a single cable comprising three concentric phase conductors separated by annular layers of insulation.
Triax is one trade name.
4.11.6 Installation of a conceptual HTSC cable system for the Study project
To provide n+1 redundancy for maximum reliability and availability it is proposed that the cables
would be installed as shown in Figure 69, Figure 70 and Figure 71:
Each cable to be cooled by containment in an annular LN2 duct. A central conductor duct is not
to be used. This simplifies the design of the cable and avoids the need for joint designs to have
complex LN2 stop and feed capabilities.
Each single core cable to have its own separate LN2 cryostat return pipe, instead of a shared
return through a parallel cable. If one cable is damaged, the other two will be retained in sound
condition.
Each cable and return pipe to be housed in a separate trough to permit access without disturbing
the adjacent cables. HTSC cables are thermally and magnetically independent and so an
increase in spacing is permissible.
Two groups of three cable to be provided per circuit, each normally carrying half load and only
taking the full 3,000 MW load in a contingency situation. This is the arrangement recommended
for the 500 kV Study project. The HTSC cable has the additional advantage that the symmetry
Page 147 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
of their spacing is not critical. If a single cable should be taken out of service, then its place can
be taken by one cable from the adjacent Group of Cables. This can be repeated three times,
thereby maximising n+1 redundancy.
The resulting 39 m width of the swathe, Figure 71, required for two circuits of 138 kV HTSC cable,
each comprising two Groups of cable is closely similar to the 40 m width required for the conventional
500 kV cable shown in Figure 78. No advantage in the swathe width of an HTSC installation for the
500 kV Study Project is envisaged.
Conceptual HTSC cables do have a prospective advantage for the 500 kV Study Project in that they are
thermally independent of their environment. The crossing of route obstructions at depth would not have
the thermal limitations experienced by conventional cables.
Page 148 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
a
l
19th February 2010
To provide appropriate mechanical protection and to provide sufficient access to the

cables to permit removal and replacement of cables, the following dimensions are
proposed:
Dimension
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
mm
200
150
200
200
50
50
1000
h
i
j
k
l
75
75
75
75
500
Figure 69. Conceptual arrangement of an HTS cable in buried trough
Page 149 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
To provide appropriate mechanical protection, the following dimensions are

proposed:
Dimension
a
b
c
d
e
mm
1000
3050
500
1000
1500
Figure 70. Conceptual cross section dimensions of a HTSC buried, three phase group / trench
arrangement
Page 150 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
To allow physical separation between Groups of Cables and sufficient clearances for
installation, the following dimensions are proposed:
Dimension
mm
a
b
c
d
e
3000
2000
10000
3000
10000
39000
Figure 71. Conceptual installation swathe dimensions for a HTS cable trenches
Page 151 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
ESTIMATES OF RELIABILITY.
Expectations of reliability
Utilities throughout the world are now purchasing XLPE cable systems at voltages up to the
highest EHV levels, which demonstrates their confidence in the reliability of this
technology.
Quality assurance and testing, care and maintenance

The 500 kV underground cable system can be expected to give reliable service, subject to:
Successful completion of proving tests before supply.
Quality control test programs during manufacture and installation.
Protection of the cable system from third party damage throughout its service life.
The objective in the design, Proving Testing, manufacturing and installation of a 500 kV
cable system is to eliminate failures in-service.
After site assembly, a commissioning test is performed with the objective of detecting
failures due to installation damage, or incorrectly assembled components. A high AC
voltage withstand test is applied for 60 minutes; this test is specified in IEC 62067[1].
Although not yet required by IEC specifications, it has become normal practice for utilities
to specify that partial discharge measurements be performed at each joint and termination.
This is a non-destructive test to ensure that no detectable incipient electrical activity is
present. Any faults detected are repaired, or replaced, before the cable system is accepted
into service.
Statistics show that a significant proportion of cable failures are due to third party dig-ins.
Adequate protection measures must be incorporated into the design of the installation.
Adequate surveillance and maintenance must be conducted throughout the service life. The
incidence of third party damage can then be expected to be low.
Availability of transmission line

It is a requirement of the design of the 500 kV Study Project that n-1 redundancy exists,
such that either of the two circuits can carry the peak load of 3,000 MW as a contingency
operation in the event that the other circuit is unavailable. For this redundancy to be
effective, the risk of coincident failures on parallel transmission lines must be low and the
repair time short. This report gives the failure rates and repair times of the cable system,
based on published data, so that a statistical analysis may be performed in the recommended
next steps.
Page 152 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The reliability assessment for the complete transmission system must be performed to
include the other components, which include overhead lines, transition station components
and substation termination components.
5.1
Repair times for 500 kV XLPE cable
The failure rates reported by CIGRE[49] only include failures which either result in an instantaneous
failure leading to automatic disconnection or an occurrence requiring subsequent unplanned outage, it
can therefore be assumed that if any failure occurs then an unplanned outage will occur that will
require to be repaired. The average outage repair time given in CIGRE TB 379[49] for the 220 kV to
500 kV category is 25 days with a difference in repair times of up to 14 days (Page 41 therein).
However, for the climate during the winter period in the Edmonton region of Alberta, the repair times
would be extended by the need for additional measures to mitigate the effects of the cold temperatures.
This would typically be expected to extend the repair times by approximately one week during the
period from October to April. For the Edmonton region of Alberta the average outage repair time
should therefore be increased to 29 days. It is likely that faults which involve the primary insulation
will take significantly longer to repair than affect only the cable jacket or external protection of
accessories.
Further details of cable system repairs are given in Section 7.22.
5.2
Fault statistics for underground 500 kV XLPE cable
In this section and in Section 5.3 fault statistics are given separately for XLPE cable and overhead line.
A comparison has not been performed as the data upon which the cable failure statistics has been based
is too small in number, and for too short a duration, to be trustworthy. It is expected to be several more
years before sufficient failure data becomes available for reliable analysis.
5.2.1
Cable system fault statistics
The cable fault statistics are derived from those published by CIGRE in Technical Brochure number
379[49]. These are based a cumulative 220 kV to 500 kV cable circuit length of 1,388 km collected in a
limited worldwide survey. This is significantly smaller than the 54,381 km length of overhead line in
the same voltage category installed in Canada alone. The authors of CIGRE 379[49] state on page 10
That caution should be used when interpreting failure rates, particularly in the case when the size of
the data population is small.Failure rates are mean failure rates and it is not appropriate to use
them to calculate mean time between failures and availability of circuits. Further commentary on the
activities of Cigre Study Committee B1 is given in the Jicable 07 paper[78], this includes the statement
that, There is still limited service experience with EHV XLPE cable systems. The design,
Page 153 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
manufacturing methods and materials employed in joints and terminations differ significantly amongst
manufacturers. Consequently the service experience from any particular system cannot necessarily be
taken as a guide to the likely service experience of other systems. Thus whilst the number of failures
in the following Table 28, Table 29, Table 30, and Table 31 have been extrapolated from the CIGRE
379 data, they cannot be regarded as being anywhere near as accurate as the data relating to overhead
lines.
Study Committee B1 of the international organisation CIGRE collects and analyses the service
experience of cable systems and their component parts. The most recent work was prepared by working
group WG B1.10, which was published by CIGRE in April 2009 as Technical Brochure 379[49],
Update of service Experience of HV Underground and Submarine Cable Systems. A questionnaire
was prepared by the members of the working group and issued to 25 regions world wide. Seventy three
positives responses were received from 24 regions, which comprised returns from 73 utilities. The
questionnaire collected data up to the end of the year 2005. The categories of interest to the 500 kV
Study Project are a) failures in AC land cables in the voltage range of 220 kV to 500 kV of the
extruded type, these being XLPE and PE cables, b) failures in all types of land cables in the voltage
range of 220 kV to 500 kV in categories of installation type and d) repair outage times in the voltage
range of 220 kV to 500 kV for extruded cables. The trend in AC failure for XLPE systems cable
systems with age of failed components is illustrated in a bar chart in Figure 12 on page 32 therein, in
four voltage categories.
The Executive summary of the above Technical Brochure states on page 3:
That between the years 2000 and 2005, almost all installed AC cables have been of the XLPE or
SCOF cables with XLPE being the preferred type. At voltages below 220 kV, more than 90% of the
cable circuit length installed from 2001 to 2005 was of the XLPE type. For voltage levels above
220 kV SCOF (SCFF) cables still account for more than 40% of the cables installed.
The failure rates for XLPE cable system components in the voltage range of 220 kV to 500 kV are
given in Table 11 on page 30 of the CIGRE publication[49] and are summarised in Table 25 below.
Component
Cable (all failures)
Joints (all failures)
Terminations (all failures)
Failure Rates
Per year per 100cct.km1
Per year per 100 joints
Per year per 100 terminations
0.133
0.048
0.050
Table 25 CIGRE failure rates of components in 220 kV to 500 kV XLPE cable systems
The cable failure rates are given by CIGRE in units of failures per year per 100cct.km. As most of the
cable circuits analysed by CIGRE could be expected to consist of one Group of Cables, the CIGRE
findings are taken to be equivalent to failures per year per Group of Cables, i.e. three single core cables.
Page 154 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Table 26 (Table 11 in TB 379[49]) shows the distribution of faults by cause for each component of the
extruded 220 kV-500 kV AC land cable system. Approximately half the faults are ascribed to internal
causes, and half to external causes. An internal failure is attributable to the cable or component, and an
external failure is attributable to external parameters (e.g. third party interference, subsidence, etc).
Component
Cable (internal)
Cable (external)
Failure Rates
Per year per 100cct.km
0.067
0.067
0.133
50%
50%
100%
Joint (internal)
Joint (external)

0.026
0.022
0.048
54%
46%
100%
Terminations (internal)
Terminations (external)

0.032
0.018
0.050
64%
36%
100%
Table 26 Failure rates of components in 220 kV to 500 kV XLPE cable systems by cause
5.2.2
Application of fault statistics to the 500 kV Study Project scenarios
Because of the particular features of the 500 kV Study Project, the following conditioning factors could
be applied to the internal failure rates for accessories (joints and terminations) given in Table 26.
1.3 (30%) to allow for the possibility that the failure rate in the higher electrically
stressed, large conductor, 500 kV Study Project is likely to be higher than the
average in the 220 kV-500 kV category.
1.3 (30%) to allow for the possibility that the failure rate may be increased as a
result of the high operating temperature range and low winter ambient temperature
in the Edmonton region of Alberta.
When the above factors have been applied, the conditioned failure rates are as shown in Table 27.
Page 155 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Component
Failure Rates
0.133
0.066
0.072
Table 27 Conditioned failure rates of components in 220 kV to 500 kV XLPE cable systems
Both the above unconditioned and conditioned failure rates have been applied to the eight scenarios
considered for the 500 kV Study Project. The results are given in the following tables of failure rates
(Table 28, Table 29, Table 30 and Table 31).
In each of the tables of failure rates for the study scenarios, the failure rates are also given for one
Group of Cables. Each group is equal to the route length of underground cable.
Stage
Total number of
Groups of Cables
Table 28 and Table 30 are based on the unconditioned failure rates in Table 25.
Table 29 and Table 31 are based on the conditioned failure rates in Table 27.
Table 28 (unconditioned) and Table 29 (conditioned) show the number of failures
for one year in-service.
Table 30 (unconditioned) and Table 31 (unconditioned) give the total number of
failures over a 40 year service life.
One Group of
Cables
1A-10
1B-20
2A-10
2B-20
3A-10
3B-20
4A-10
4B-20
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Route length
km
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
Cable failures
0.01
0.03
0.05
0.11
0.03
0.05
0.04
0.08
0.03
0.05
Joint failures
0.03
0.05
0.10
0.21
0.05
0.11
0.08
0.16
0.05
0.11
Termination failures
0.00
0.00
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
Cable system failures
0.04
0.08
0.17
0.33
0.08
0.17
0.13
0.25
0.08
0.17
Table 28 Unconditioned cable system failure rates for the study scenarios for one year in-service
Page 156 of 310


United Kingdom
Stage
Total number of
Groups of Cables
ER 381
19th February 2010

One Group of
Cables
#
1A-10
1B-20
2A-10
2B-20
3A-10
3B-20
4A-10
4B-20
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Route length
km
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
Cable failures
0.01
0.03
0.05
0.11
0.03
0.05
0.04
0.08
0.03
0.05
Joint failures
0.04
0.07
0.14
0.29
0.07
0.15
0.11
0.22
0.07
0.15
0.00
0.00
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.05
0.10
0.21
0.42
0.11
0.21
0.16
0.31
0.11
0.21
Table 29 Conditioned cable system failure rates for the study scenarios for one year in-service
Table 28 (unconditioned) and Table 29 (conditioned) give the total number of failures for one year inservice and show that:
In one year the likelihood of failure of a single Group of Cables is low, the
unconditioned value being 0.04 per year (equivalent to one failure in a 25 year
period) for a single Group of Cables, 10 km in length. This is shown in Table 28.
In one year the likelihood of one failure in all of the parallel Groups of Cables
together is increased in proportion to the number of Groups of Cables, thus
extrapolating from the previous example, the lowest likelihood of failure for the
500 kV Study Project is 0.08 per year (equivalent to one failure in a 12.5 year
period) for the 10 km length with two Groups of Cables in parallel, again without
the conditioning factor applied. This is shown in Table 28, Scenarios 2A-10
(Stage 1) and 4A.10 (Stage 1). .
The numbers of failures also increase with the route length and if the conditioning
factor is applied. The highest is 0.42 per year (equivalent to one failure in 2.4 year
period) for four Groups of Cables, 20 km route length, with the conditioning factor
applied. This is shown in Table 29, Scenario 1B.20. .
Page 157 of 310


United Kingdom
Stage
Total number of
Groups of Cables
ER 381
19th February 2010

One Group
of Cables
#
1A-10
1B-20
2A-10
2B-20
3A-10
3B-20
4A-10
4B-20
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Route length
km
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
Cable failures
0.53
1.06
2.13
4.26
1.06
2.13
1.60
3.19
1.06
2.13
Joint failures
1.04
2.13
4.15
8.52
2.07
4.26
3.11
6.39
2.07
4.26
0.12
0.12
0.48
0.48
0.24
0.24
0.36
0.36
0.24
0.24
1.69
3.32
6.76
13.26
3.38
6.63
5.07
9.95
3.38
6.63
Table 30 Unconditioned cable system failure rates for the study scenarios for 40 years in-service
Stage
Total number of
Groups of Cables
One Group
of Cables
1
1A-10
1B-20
2A-10
2B-20
3A-10
3B-20
4A-10
4B-20
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Route length
#
k
m
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
10
20
Cable failures
0.90
1.80
2.13
4.26
1.06
2.13
1.60
3.19
1.06
2.13
Joint failures
1.75
3.60
5.70
11.71
2.85
5.86
4.27
8.78
2.85
5.86
0.20
0.20
0.69
0.69
0.35
0.35
0.52
0.52
0.35
0.35
2.85
5.60
8.52
16.66
4.26
8.33
6.39
12.49
4.26
8.33
Table 31 Conditioned cable system failure rates the study scenarios for 40 years in-service
Table 30 (unconditioned) and Table 31 (unconditioned) give the total number of failures over a 40 year
service life and show that:
Over a 40 year period the unconditioned likelihood of failure of a single Group of

Cables is 1.69 for a single Group of Cables, 10 km in length. This is shown in
Table 30.
The lowest likelihood of failure for the 500 kV Study Project is 3.38 for the 10 km
length with two Groups of Cables in parallel, again without the conditioning factor
applied. This is shown in Table 30, Scenarios 2A-10 (Stage 1) and 4A.10 (Stage
1). (As it is envisaged that the Stage 1 cable systems would be augmented by the
Stage 2 cables at some point during the 40 years, this figure would have to be
increased to represent the whole project)
The numbers of failures increase with the route length and if the conditioning
factor is applied. The highest likelihood of failure for the 500 kV Study Project is
Page 158 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
16.66 for four Groups of Cables, 20 km route length, with the conditioning factor
applied. This is shown in and Table 31, Scenario 1B.20.
5.2.3
500 kV Study Project fault rate
Based on the information in Section 5.2.2 and the published data[49] therein, the estimated numbers of
faults per year which that occur in the 500 kV Study Project are given below for different numbers of
Groups of Cables.
One Groups of Cables in operation:

Two Groups of Cables in operation:
Three Groups of Cables in operation:
Four Groups of Cables in operation:
5.2.4
10 km
0.04 to 0.05
0.08 to 0.11
0.13 to 0.16
0.17 to 0.21
20 km
0.08 to 0.10
0.17 to 0.21
0.25 to 0.31
0.33 to 0.42
faults per year

faults per year
faults per year
faults per year
Types of cable faults
Table 32 records the number of faults reported in all types of AC land cable (XLPE, SCFF and HPFF)
in the voltage range 220 kV to 500 kV. Care is required in the interpretation as the reported quantities
of cable and accessories are not given. CIGRE TB 379[49] reports in a fault analysis on page 47 therein:
That at all voltages and for all cable types, buried cable systems are about ten times more likely to be
damaged by external conditions than cable systems installed in ducts or tunnels. In practice the ratio
would be expected to be smaller at the EHV voltages as the buried cables are likely to be buried deeper
and to be protected by more robust materials. CIGRE TB 379[49], Table 10c, shows that at 220 kV to
500 kV for all types of cable and for all types of installation 57% of the faults were internal and 25%
were due to third party damage, 17% were attributable to other unspecified external causes.
Installation Type
Internal
Direct buried
Ducts
Tunnels
Troughs
Bridges
In-air
All installation types
59
5
7
2
0
1
74
Numbers of Faults
Third Party
Other
External Causes
28
17
3
2
0
2
2
2
1
0
0
0
34
23
Total
104
10
9
6
1
1
131
Table 32 Numbers of faults in all types of 220 kV-500 kV AC land circuits by installation type
Page 159 of 310


United Kingdom
5.3
ER 381
19th February 2010
Overhead line fault statistics
The Line-Related Sustained Forced Outage rate for 500 to 599 kV overhead lines is given in Appendix
Section 1 which has been abstracted by HPT from Canadian Electricity Association publication, Forced
Outage Performance of Transmission Equipment 2007 [79]. This data is based on the performance of a
cumulative length of 9,853 km of 500 to 599 kV transmission lines in Canada alone.
The overhead line rate is for sustained forced outages of duration one minute or more and excludes
automatic re-closure events. The rate is 0.2366 events per 100 km per year. For the purpose of this
report these events are referred to as failures.
The mean duration of each Line-Related Sustained Forced Outage is 4.9 hours.
The total number failures for each scenario for both one year in-service and for forty years in-service is
shown in Table 33 and Table 34 respectively.
Stage
1A-10
1B-20
2A-10
2B-20
3A-10
3B-20
4A-10
4B-20
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Number of OHL circuits
OHL Route length
km
55
45
55
45
55
45
55
45
OHL failure rate per 100km per year
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
OHL failures
0.26
0.21
0.26
0.21
0.26
0.21
0.26
0.21
Table 33 OHL failure rates for the study scenarios for one year in-service
Stage
1A-10
1B-20
2A-10
2B-20
3A-10
3B-20
4A-10
4B-20
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
Number of OHL circuits
OHL Route length
km
55
45
55
45
55
45
55
45
OHL failure rate per 100km per year
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
0.2366
OHL failures
10.41
8.52
10.41
8.52
10.41
8.52
10.41
8.52
Table 34 OHL failure rates for the study scenarios for forty years in-service
The Canadian Electricity Association publication also gives statistics for line related transient forced
outages of duration less than one minute which only covers automatic reclosure events, the rate being
0.8718 events per 100 km per year. These events have been excluded from the study because the
overhead line is still available for service.
Page 160 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
OVERVIEW OF POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS OF

UNDERGROUNDING
An environmental overview has been prepared by the HPT and is given in full in the Appendix, Section
11.
The overview outlines some of the potential effects on biophysical components related to underground
transmission lines. As is the case with any project, detailed design and the environmental context are
important for understanding and describing specific potential effects related to an underground
transmission development. Discussions must occur with appropriate regulators relative to any
underground transmission development better to identify appropriate mitigations and regulatory
expectations.
The overview also considers the environmental impact of the installation activities and of the installed
plant of a non-specific 500kV high capacity underground transmission project. The document describes
the following components of the project:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Transmission line trenching

Joint bays
Concrete encased duct banks
Transmission line Horizontal Directional Drilling
Transition stations
Ongoing operations and maintenance.
The document then continues to address the potential environmental effects and mitigation measures
under the following headings:
Terrain and Soils
Soil disturbance and contamination from leaks and spills during construction.
Vegetation and Wetlands
Destruction of native and sensitive vegetation during construction, introduction of non native species,
disturbance of wetland and riparian vegetation which might be difficult to reclaim. Potential soil
erosion when vegetation is removed. Alterations to drainage patterns and contamination from leaks and
spills during construction.
Wildlife and Wildlife Habitat
Habitat destruction during construction and maintenance, changes in direct and indirect mortality risk
due for example to the clearing of forested areas increasing the line of sight. Effect on nesting and
rearing sites due to vegetation clearance and trenching.
Page 161 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Surface Water, Fish and Fish Habitat

Introduction of sediment into watercourses. Changes to water quality arising from leaks and spills
during construction. Introduction of HDD drilling mud due to inadvertent release during drilling and
the introduction of bentonite as a result of duct failure.
Groundwater
A shallow groundwater table may result in flooded trenches. Changes to hydraulic dynamics of springs
are possible where the cable trench encounters the spring discharge area.
Under each of the above headings the potential environmental effects are given and selected proposed
mitigation measures are presented.
Page 162 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
PRELIMINARY 500 KV UNDERGROUND CABLE SCOPING STUDY
A preliminary underground cable scoping study was conducted for the 500 kV Study Project in order
to:
Provide the outline installation cross-section dimensions necessary for the HPT to
study and cost. This could then be performed concurrent with the cable
manufacturers design work.
Provide a point of reference for the manufacturers design proposals to ensure that
they had understood the requirements.
This preliminary scoping study has been based upon the same design parameters as have been provided
to prospective cable suppliers for the Heartland Project.
Installation cross sections have been prepared for the following:
Duct manhole system
Direct burial of cables
Deep tunnel
Cut and cover tunnel
7.1
Description of the cable type used for the preliminary scoping study
500 kV cables with high power transmission capability have been supplied using either extruded XLPE
insulation or fluid filled PPL insulation. For this scoping study XLPE cable has been used. The reasons
for this choice are:
It is available from many suppliers
It is perceived as the technology of choice for the future, with manufacturers phasing out their
manufacturing capability for SCFF cable thus spares and resources to repair XLPE cable are more
likely to be available for the lifetime of the circuit
The selected XLPE cable constructional details and dimensions are shown diagrammatically in Figure
72.
Page 163 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
500 kV Cable used for preliminary scoping study

2500mm Milliken stranded water-blocked copper conductor, XLPE insulation,
single-core, Smooth aluminium sheath, Polyethylene jacket
1
Diagrammatic only
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Details
Oxidised copper conductor
Conductor binder
Extruded screen
XLPE Insulation
32mm nom
Extruded screen
Water-blocking cushioning tapes
Aluminium shield (welded)
Polyethylene Jacket with semi-conductive coating
Nominal
diameter
(mm)
64.0
68.0
132.0
135.0
137.5
141.0
152.0
Approximate weight 39 kg/m

Figure 72: Construction and dimensions of Scoping Study 500 kV, 2500 mm, XLPE cable
Page 164 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The following conductor type has been used for the scoping study:
2,500 mm copper.
AC resistance typical of conductors with oxidised wires.
constructed using several stranded segments (Milliken construction).
The reasons for the use of this material, size and construction of conductor for the scoping study are:
2,500 mm represents the maximum conductor size that is available from most
manufacturers. (Some manufacturers have designs and/or manufacturing capability
for 3,000 mm or possibly 3,500 mm but little or no service experience exists.) If
aluminium conductors are selected then at least three cables per phase would be
required for each circuit of the 500 kV Study Project. This would not be
economically advantageous.
For the 500 kV Study Project the ampacity requirements are such that the use of
plain copper wire conductors is likely to result in a requirement for three cables per
phase, particularly for some of the obstruction crossings. Ampacity can be
increased by the use of coated wire. Most manufacturers are able to offer some
kind of coated wire conductor design. The designs available are oxidation and
enamelling. Conductors with enamelled wires generally have lower resistance
than those with oxidised wires but may not be offered by all manufacturers or
otherwise inappropriate for the 500 kV Study Project.
A segmental construction is offered by virtually all manufacturers for large
conductor sizes as it is significantly more efficient than non-segmental designs.
An insulation thickness calculated to give an electrical stress at the insulation shield (i.e. the outer
shield) of 7 MV/m at 525 kV between phases has been selected. This design stress has been selected
as:
It is the stress experienced by the accessories and is considered to be reasonably
safe with current technology.
It is around the average stress that most manufacturers were believed likely to
offer.
It is not so low as to make the cables unfeasibly large for transportation to site.
XLPE cables are frequently constructed using one of the following methods to prevent radial water
penetration and to enable short circuit currents to be carried:
A longitudinally welded aluminium sheath.
A corrugated seamless aluminium sheath.
A copper wire screen included under a lead sheath.
A copper wire screen included under an aluminium or copper foil laminate.
A copper wire screen included under a longitudinally welded stainless steel sheath.
Page 165 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
A copper wire screen included under a longitudinally welded aluminium sheath.
A longitudinally welded aluminium sheath without a separate copper wire screen has been used for the
scoping. This construction has been selected for the scoping study as:
This type of construction is available from several suppliers.
It gives a reasonably high degree of water penetration resistance required for
important cable circuits.
It results in a cable with a relatively small overall diameter when compared to
cables with corrugated sheaths or a combination of copper wire screen and metallic
sheath and thus is considered to be representative of a possible eventual solution.
This type of cable is offered as being suitable for all installation methods, rigidly
cleated in air, flexibly cleated in air, in unfilled ducts, and direct buried in the
ground. Separate designs are thus not needed for this scoping study.
The sheath losses from this design are relatively high compared with other types
thus not giving overly optimistic results.
The cable design used for this scoping study has a sheath thickness of 1.75mm.
This has been selected as being sufficient for the short circuit current level of 40kA
for 1 second.
The base case cable for this scoping study has an outer jacket made of extruded medium or high density
polyethylene (MDPE or HDPE). This has been selected as:
It available from all manufacturers and it has been proven in-service to give a
sufficiently high resistance to abrasion, cracking and water penetration.
(For use within tunnels, polyethylene is commonly perceived to have too great a flammability, and
hence other materials are often used).
7.2
Cable installation options

Installation configurations have been prepared for buried cables in both
A duct-manhole, system:
Installed directly in the ground:
A duct-manhole, system offers the following advantages:

This type of installation is common in North America
The cables can be installed more quickly than in a direct buried system
It offers good protection against mechanical damage from external influences as the
cables are in ducts embedded in concrete.
In the event that a cable should need to be replaced then the cable can be removed
and replaced a lot easier than if it were direct buried
Page 166 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Installing cables directly in the ground offers the following advantages:

The ampacity is generally greater than for a ducted system.
Direct burial gives more protection against the effects of thermomechanical
movements
Fault location is easier in a direct buried system as the entire jacket is in direct
contact with the backfill. Any electrical perforation of the jacket can be detected by
external, above ground, tests.
A failure of a directly buried splice is unlikely to affect the adjacent phases whereas
a failure in a manhole may damage all the cables and equipment inside.
7.3
General installation configuration

To achieve the required ampacity of 3,465 amps (3,000 MVA at 500 kV) for each circuit, two
cables per phase will be required for all the installation configurations described in this scoping
study. Each cable would then be required to carry 1,733 amps. Each circuit would be
configured as two Groups of Cables. Each Group of Cables would consist of three single core
cables and be installed in a separate trench.
This is shown schematically in Figure 73.
Figure 73 Scenario 1
In Figure 73 two circuits are depicted between Station A and Station B. Each of the black
dotted lines represents one Group of Cables underground cable
There could be one or more obstacles on the route which require the use of three cables per phase. If it
is not possible to achieve the required ampacity along the whole of the route with two cables per phase,
then three cables per phase will be required.
Page 167 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
A flat, horizontally spaced configuration has been selected for the scoping study. This has been
selected because
it offers better ampacity than trefoil or vertically spaced arrangements
it offers better access to the cables should a repair be necessary
Different types of cable formations are shown in Figure 38 and Figure 39.
Page 168 of 310


United Kingdom
7.4
ER 381
19th February 2010
Preliminary scoping study: duct-manhole system
7.4.1
Configuration of cables in ducts
Based on installation primarily in agricultural land a trench cross section typically as shown
below is proposed:
Reinstatement as required
to match original
Ground surface
Compacted excavated
material
(if thermally suitable)
including replacement of
topsoil to landowners
requirements
Warning tape
(as required)
Warning tapes placed
on top of full area of
ductbank
Thermal Backfill
6mm poly placed on
top of full area of
ductbank
Power Cable ducts
Auxiliary ducts
Concrete
Figure 74: Preliminary duct block arrangement
Page 169 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
To achieve the required ampacity, the following dimensions have been calculated:
Dimension
a
b
c
e
d
p
q
mm
250
250
200
500
250
900
1100
Dimensions for Figure 74
7.4.2
Duct for scoping study

The following outline duct dimensions and requirements were advised to HPT as the basis for
installation costing.
Power cable ducts are Nominal Size 8 (OD 219 mm/8.625 inch), Schedule 40 Polyethylene
conduits (minimum ID 199 mm/7.846 inch).
These are polyethylene conduits, with a layer of semi-conductive material internally
to facilitate fault location. At each conduit join there is a semi-conductive path to
the outer surface. This is a non standard duct construction and would require custom
manufacture.
Ducts have solid walls; ducts with corrugated walls containing an air gap should not
be used.
Any joints must be correctly aligned and free from sharp edges or burrs.
Ducts shall be substantially circular and capable of passing a mandrel of diameter
6mm less than the internal diameter.
Ducts shall be clean of soil, sand, stones or other debris, and shall be effectively
plugged and sealed.
A drawstring shall be installed in each duct.
Auxiliary ducts shall be 100 mm PVC conduit
Page 170 of 310


United Kingdom
7.4.3
ER 381
19th February 2010
Trench filling
It is vital that the thermally resistivity of the soils and other material surrounding the cables is
controlled. The details of the trench filling materials for this scoping study are as follows:
The backfill placed above the concrete ductbank shall be of the fluidised thermal backfill type
or selected sand/gravel or crushed rock and shall have a dried out thermal resistivity no greater
than 0.9 K.m/W. [For information, in the absence of specific local measurements, a value of
0.9 K.m/W has been taken for the backfill in all of the cable ampacity calculations, having been
abstracted from a) IEC 60267[80] for the typical values in Canada, there being no recognised
national values and b) the value given in the technical specification[81] for the recent 240 kV
cable installation in Edmonton for native soil resistivity for depths of less than 3.5 m.]
Where the route crosses agricultural land the top of the thermal backfill must be no
less than 900 mm below the surface to avoid disturbance by agricultural equipment
(this would require to be verified for Edmonton farming conditions).
The thermal backfill placed above the concrete ductbank forms part of the thermal
design of the circuit; the warning tapes or tiles placed above thermal backfill must
extend the whole length and width of the route.
This layer can be replaced with concrete if more economical.
Trench filling above the thermal backfill and to either side of the trench must have a thermal
resistivity of not greater than 0.9 K.m/W[80,81] and not greater than 3.0 K.m/W[82] when fully
dried out. (The latter values would need to be verified by taking measurements and samples in
situ in trial holes dug along the route when selected).
The indigenous soils must be tested for thermal resistivity and can only be used to
fill the trench if it is found to have a thermal resistivity which meets the above
requirement. If unsuitable imported material must be allowed for.
Parts of the route may have very high thermal resistivity, specifically where there is
sphagnum moss. In such cases it should be assumed that the ground approximately
three metres both side of the trench will have to be removed and replaced with
suitable imported material. Sphagnum moss is also unlikely to be mechanically
suitable for the supporting of cable trenches.
Local regulations or landowners may have specific requirements for topsoil to be stripped and
stored during the course of construction and replaced as part of the final reinstatement. There
may be requirements as to the time of year when topsoil can be stripped and the methods of
storage.
Where minor roads are to be crossed, the thermal backfill should be extended upwards to the
road reinstatement.
Page 171 of 310


United Kingdom
7.5
ER 381
19th February 2010
Preliminary scoping study: Cable installation direct in the ground

Based on installation primarily in agricultural land a trench cross section typically as shown in
Figure 75 is proposed.
Reinstatement as required
to match original
Ground surface
Compacted
excavated material
(if thermally
suitable) including
replacement of
topsoil to
landowners
requirements
Warning tape
(as required)
Warning tiles placed

on top of full area of
backfill
Thermal Backfill
Position of DTS fibres
(if not included within
cable construction)
Power Cables
Auxiliary ducts
Figure 75: Preliminary direct burial arrangement
Page 172 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
To achieve the required ampacity, the following dimensions have been calculated:
Dimension
mm
a
450
b
175
c
100
d
1300
e
100
f
450 *
g
1000
* Dimension f is based on a nominal cable diameter of 150mm
Dimensions for Figure 75
For the purpose of initial cost estimates:
Auxiliary ducts shall be 100 mm PVC conduit
(Any optical fibre cable must be suitable for operation at 50 70C when installed in close
proximity to power cables)
The trench may be of rectangular cross section as shown in which case shoring (usually timber)
is generally required or may be battered (sloped) to avoid the need for support. An example of
a trench with sloped sides is shown in Figure 76. With this type of arrangement it can be more
difficult to keep the bottom of the trench clear of falling debris.
Page 173 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 76: Trench with sloped sides

During cable installation cable rollers are required at close spacing. Pre-formed skid plates
must be used at bends. The trench must be kept clean.
The thermal backfill placed as a bedding under, over and around the cables shall be of the
cement bound sand or fluidised thermal backfill type and shall have a dried out thermal
resistivity no greater than 0.9 K.m/W[80,81]. Cement bound sand shall be installed dry and then
compacted. It shall be free of sharp stones or flints which could damage the cables.
Where the route crosses agricultural land the top of the warning tiles placed above
the thermal backfill must be no less than 900 mm below the surface. (this would
require to be verified for Edmonton farming conditions).
The backfill placed above the cable forms part of the thermal design of the circuit;
the warning tiles placed above thermal backfill must extend the whole length and
width of the route.
Trench filling above the thermal backfill and to either side of the trench must have suitable
thermal characteristics. For this scoping study the limits are that the normal thermal resistivity
should not exceed 0.9 K.m/W[80,81], and also that it should not exceed 3.0 K.m/W[82] when fully
dried out. (The latter values would need to be verified by taking measurements and samples in
situ in trial holes dug along the route when selected).
:
The indigenous soils must be tested for thermal resistivity and can only be used to
fill the trench they are found to have a thermal resistivity which meets the above
requirement. If unsuitable, imported material must be allowed for.
Parts of the route may have very high thermal resistivity, specifically where there is
sphagnum moss. In such cases it should be assumed that the ground approximately
Page 174 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
three metres both side of the trench will have to be removed and replaced with
suitable imported material. The trench fill must be carefully compacted.
Local regulations or landowners may have specific requirements for topsoil to be stripped and
stored during the course of construction and replaced as part of the final reinstatement. There
may be requirements as to the time of year when topsoil can be stripped and the methods of
storage.
Where minor roads are to be crossed, a ducted arrangement will be required. For the purposes
of this installation study this may be considered identical to the duct block proposed for the
duct-manhole system except that the ducts must generally be filled with bentonite for
thermomechanical compatibility.
7.6
Minimum spacing between groups of cables of each circuit

Each group of three single phase cables is installed in a separate trench as shown in Figure 77.
This has been selected as:
Separate trenches give greater ampacity than multiple Groups of Cables within a
single trench.
Separate trenches offer greater circuit security by having better survivability to third
party damage
Separate trenches offer greater circuit security as adjacent Groups of Cables are less
likely to be affected in the event of a repair.
To achieve sufficient thermal independence the above trenches are spaced at no less than
7 metres between centres.
Page 175 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 77: Spacing between Groups of Cables

Both two and three Groups of Cables are shown in Figure 77. Calculations for this scoping
study indicate that to achieve the required ampacity, three cables per phase could be required if
either (a) the cables are to be installed deeper or (b) the combined ampacity of two cables per
phase is insufficient at one or more of the obstruction crossings.
7.7
Installation Swathe and spacing between circuits,

In the selection of a preliminary installation configuration for the scoping study, the spacing
between circuits considered the following benefits of physical separation:
Greater circuit security by having better survivability against third party damage
Reduce the induced voltage effects of one circuit on another, to facilitate the
continued operation of one circuit whilst repairs are being conducted on the other.
Greater circuit security as adjacent Groups of Cables are less likely to be damaged
by excavation in the event of a repair.
Minimise risk of damage to existing cables in a staged installation, when installing
the Stage two Groups of Cables.
The spacing between Groups of Cables was initially selected as 7 metres, thus the spacing
between circuits would be at least 7 metres to give the same amount of physical protection.
This spacing between circuits was increased by a further 3 metres to 10 metres to allow for the
construction of a temporary haulage road with room for passing places. This arrangement has
been used previously for the construction of cable routes with two circuits comprising four
Page 176 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
separate trenches. A consequence of this is that 10 metres gives thermal independence between
the circuits. In normal operation the circuits are required to carry 1,500 MVA simultaneously.
For contingency operation each circuit alone is required to carry 3,000 MVA. The thermal
independence between the circuits would prospectively increase the maximum simultaneous
loading of both circuits to 3,000 MVA, although this has no benefit for this feasibility study.
Typical installation Swathes (right of way) are shown in Figure 78 and Figure 79.
For the purposes of this scoping study, the following dimensions have been assumed:
Dimension
a
b
c
e
d
mm
1,500
5,500
10,000
10,000
3,000
f (total)
40,000
Figure 78: Arrangement of circuits and construction Swathe
Page 177 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
40 m wide swathe
Positions of
trenches
Haul road
Top soil storage
Figure 79: Photograph of construction swathe for four trenches

Installers may have different proposals as to how to arrange their operation within the work area; the
total width, however, is typical for this type of installation.
7.8
Sample ampacity calculation (XLPE cable)

The results of a typical ampacity calculation for the scoping study, based on the methods
contained in the IEC 60287 standard[83], are shown below:
Page 178 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
500 kV 2500 sq mm single-core XLPE cable

Cu Milliken conductor
Smooth Al sheath
Pe serving
Flat horizontal spaced, XB/SPB bonding
Duct rating of two circuits (reversed sequence)
Max DC resistance at 20C
7.20
/m
Conductor outside diameter
64.0
mm
Conductor screen diameter
68.0
mm
Insulation outside diameter
132.0
mm
Insulation screen outside diameter
135.0
mm
Core binder outside diameter
137.5
mm
Sheath inside diameter
137.5
mm
Sheath outside diameter
141.0
mm
Serving outside diameter
152.0
mm
Insulation TR
3.5
K.m/W
Relative permittivity
2.5
Tan delta
0.001
Serving TR
3.5
K.m/W
Frequency
60
Hz
Depth to top of centre duct or pipe
1240
mm
Duct liner inner/outer diameters
199.0
219.0 mm
Duct liner TR
3.5
K.m/W
Fill constants U, V, Y
1.87
0.312
0.0037
Duct block dimensions
700
1500
mm
Duct block TR
0.9
K.m/W
Depth to duct block centre
1450
mm
Phase spacing (flat formation)
500.0
mm
Circuit spacing (centre-to-centre)
7000
mm
Ground thermal resistivity
0.900
K.m/W
Additional sheath loss factor
0.0162
Ground temperature
20.0
C
Maximum conductor temperature
90.0
C
DC resistance at rating
9.181 /m
Skin effect ks, ys
0.3500 0.1513
Proximity effect kp, yp
0.2000 0.0032
AC resistance at rating
10.599 /m
Nominal capacitance
209.39
pF/m
Dielectric loss per circuit
19.73
W/m
Thermal resistance T1
0.4260 K.m/W
Thermal resistance T3
0.0418 K.m/W
Values for each phase when it is the reference cable:
Leading Centre Lagging Lagging Centre Leading
Loss factor 0.0681 0.2217 0.0681
0.0681 0.2217 0.0681
T4 total
0.8805 0.9767 0.8887
0.8887 0.9767 0.8805 K.m/W
Adjusted T4 0.9169 0.9128 0.9254
0.9254 0.9128 0.9169 K.m/W
Rating
1829.3 1732.1 1823.8
1823.8 1732.1 1829.3 A
Sheath/non-magnetic layers resistance
45.33
/m
Duct/pipe fill thermal resistance T4'
0.1946 K.m/W
Duct liner thermal resistance T4''
0.0533 K.m/W
Duct block correction factor T4'''
0.0
K.m/W
Sheath temperature
75.1
C
Cable surface temperature
73.2
C
Duct or pipe fill temperature
68.7
C
Conductor loss per circuit
95.40
W/m
'Sheath' loss per circuit
11.38
W/m
Total losses per circuit
126.5
W/m
Rated current (centre phase)
1732
A
Figure 80: Sample ampacity calculation
Page 179 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The above ampacity calculation relates to XLPE cables installed in ducts, with two cables per
phase, i.e. a total of six cables. The result is shown for the cable with the lowest ampacity.
The above calculation gives a maximum ampacity of 1,732 amps; for a three phase group this is
equivalent to 1,500 MVA at 500 kV. For six cables, i.e. two cables per phase, this is equivalent
to a total carrying capacity of 3,000 MVA.
The above calculation includes an allowance for the effect of mutual heating between two
Groups of Cables. However, a centre to centre spacing of 7,000 mm between Groups of Cables
has been selected for the scoping study. This gives nearly complete thermal independence and
thus mutual heating is of very little significance and the ampacity with only one cable group
carrying load will only be marginally greater than with both groups loaded. When installed as
described for Stage 1, i.e. with one cable per phase, the transmission capacity can be taken as
1,500 MVA.
No allowance is included for the effects of any mutual heating from the adjacent 500 kV circuit
as 3,000 MVA is only required in a contingency situation for each circuit, i.e. the adjacent
500 kV circuit would not be carrying any load.
7.9
Stabilised backfill
At the maximum cable operating temperature the ground surrounding buried cables exceeds 50C
at all practical depths. At this temperature moisture migration occurs with a consequent rise in
the soil thermal resistivity, the thermal resistivity of most soils and backfill materials being
highly dependant on the moisture content. To avoid a reduction in ampacity the following
methods can be used:
The effect of the higher thermal resistivity of dried out soils is included in the
ampacity calculation and the installation designed accordingly. Whilst this method
is commonly applied to lower power cable systems, the high power transmission
requirement of this project is such that little use can be made of this method of
calculation.
The cables are surrounded with suitable material which has a stable value of
thermal resistance over a long period of time even when subjected to constant
heating. This is known as stabilised backfill. The stabilised backfill must fill an
area equivalent to the 50C isotherm surrounding the cables.
The preliminary dimensions of the trenches shown in Figure 74 and Figure 75 include sufficient
concrete or stabilised backfill to encompass the 50C isotherm so that the value of thermal
resistivity of 0.9 K.m/W can be taken for all the surrounding materials. Careful selection of
concrete or backfill materials may allow a lower thermal resistivity to be used.
Page 180 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.10 Effect of obstructions on the route

If the installation conditions at any point along the route are in any way less favourable than
those upon which this calculation is based then the carrying capacity will be less than
3,000 MVA. These less favourable conditions typically include:
An increase in the depth at which the cables are laid.
An increase in the ground thermal resistivity.
A reduction in the spacing between cables.
An increase in the ground temperature as a result of other buried sources of heat.
To avoid a reduction in the ampacity then the installation design must be modified at each
location.
7.10.1 Methods of maintaining the ampacity where the cable depth must be increased.
The most common type of obstruction which is likely to be encountered is where the cables must
be installed at an increased depth to pass under an obstruction. For the purposes of this scoping
study, the ampacity at increased depth the cables can be maintained either by installing the
cables:
At increased phase spacing
In tunnels
7.10.2 Installation at increased phase spacing.

To install the cables at increased phase spacing the cables can be installed either by:
Construction of a trench of increased width and depth
Trenchless methods, such as directional drilling
For cables installed in the ground, the minimum phase spacing at which the ampacity can still be
achieved at increased depth, whilst maintaining a centre to centre distance of 7 metres, is shown
in Figure 81:
Page 181 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010

Phase spacing (mm)
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
500
Depth to top of cable (mm)
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
Figure 81: Required phase spacing at increased laying depth

The installation design at increased depth and increased phase spacing will require detailed thermal
consideration for each location. As described in Section 7.9 above, the material within the 50C
isotherm surrounding the cable must be strictly controlled. Unless it can be proven that the thermal
resistivity of surrounding indigenous soils will not exceed the design maximum, even when subjected
to high temperatures for long periods of time, this requirement will mean:
For cables installed in a trench:

The width and depth may have to be significantly greater than that needed merely to
accommodate, and provide protection for, the cables.
For cables installed using trenchless methods:

The size of the drill and duct must be sufficient to accommodate the required stabilised
backfill surrounding the cables, i.e. it must encompass the 50C isotherm. This is shown
diagrammatically in Figure 82. At a depth of 4 metres, the isotherm around each cable has a
diameter of approximately 550 mm. For ducted sections of direct buried systems, it is normal
to fill the duct with a thermally stabilised grout, bentonite being the normal choice. The
requirement to completely fill the pipe and/or duct, without any risk of voids, restricts the
maximum length of a trenchless system to that which can be completely grouted.
Page 182 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 82: Requirement for cable installed by trenchless method

For a ground temperature of 20C and a thermal resistivity of 0.9 K.m/W, and cables
sufficiently widely spaced that they are each effectively thermally independent, the theoretical
maximum depth at which they can achieve the required ampacity is 10 metres. For all twelve
cables, this will require the width of the Swathe (right of way) to be increased from 40 metres
to some 100 metres, this being impractical in most situations. The maximum depth at which
cables can be installed without significantly exceeding the width of the Swathe of 40 metres is
4 metres. With this arrangement the segregation between cable groups will be reduced.
A plan of a typical directionally drilled arrangement for twelve cables to pass under an obstruction is
shown in Figure 83.
Figure 83: Typical directional drill arrangement, plan view
Page 183 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Local increases in phase spacing increase the induced sheath voltage in the particular cable section. To
eliminate sheath circulating currents, the difference between the induced sheath voltages in each of the
minor sections of the cross bonding arrangement must not exceed the design tolerance. This can be
accomplished by reducing the length of the section containing the wider phase spacing, or, less
commonly, increasing of the phase spacing in other sections. The requirement to balance the cross
bonding arrangement also restricts the maximum length of a trenchless installation.
7.10.3 Installation in tunnels.

For cables which cannot be installed in either a conventional trench or using a trenchless method as
described above, an alternative local construction will be required. For the purposes of the feasibility
study this will consist of two short ventilated tunnels, one tunnel being used for each circuit. These
tunnels will require thermal analysis to establish if natural ventilation will be sufficient, or if forced
ventilation will be required. The tunnels will also have to be designed to withstand any
thermomechanical forces which may be transferred to the structure of the tunnels from the cables. The
tunnel and shafts must be designed to allow the cables to be installed without infringing the minimum
bending radius. This will be advised by the manufacturer but for XLPE cable the minimum
permissible bending radius would typically be some thirty times the overall diameter of the cable, or
four to five metres fore a 500 kV, 2,500 mm, cable. A typical tunnel arrangement is shown in Figure
84.
Headhouse
Ground surface
Cables in
trench
Obstruction
Shaft
Cables in Tunnel
Figure 84: Typical naturally ventilated tunnel

A typical headhouse arrangement for a naturally ventilated tunnel is shown in Figure 85. The
headhouse arrangement for a tunnel with forced ventilation would be considerably larger, requiring
space for fans, control equipment and noise suppression.
Page 184 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 85: Compound containing two headhouses for naturally ventilated tunnels
7.10.4 Further methods of obstruction crossing.

If the ampacity cannot be maintained by either increased phase spacing and the construction of a
tunnel is not viable, then further developments may be possible. These have not been included in
this Scoping Study. Such developments could include the use of:
A cable bridge, whereby a structure is built to carry the cables over, rather than under the
obstruction. This would generally expose the cables a greater risk of third part damage, and
would also increase the temperature range to which they would be exposed.
A forced cooling system. This would require significant maintenance commitments to
ensure reliability
The development of a different design of cable for particularly severe obstruction crossings.
This would require additional product development and testing, including the development
of transition joints for where the cable is spliced to the normal cable
The use of an additional cable per phase, i.e. an additional Group of Cables per circuit. As
no joint arrangement exists for splicing three cables together, the additional Groups of
Cables would have to be installed throughout the entire cable route.
Page 185 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.11 Cable lengths between joint bays

To limit the induced voltage to less than 250 V and to provide a manageable length which can
be delivered and installed a maximum reel length of 700 metres has been selected for this
scoping study.
.
7.11.1 Outline reel dimensions
Calculations show that this length of cable can be transported on a reel with an overall diameter
of 4.3 metres and an overall width of 4.3 metres. The weight of cable would be some
28 Tonnes; if the reel is assumed to have a weight of 5 to 7 Tonnes then the gross weight is
35 Tonnes. This is shown in Figure 86.
Dimension
Overall reel width
Overall reel diameter
Gross weight
mm
4,300
4,300
35,000kg
Figure 86: Typical reel dimensions and weight

This weight relates to the design of cable used for the Scoping Study which has an Aluminium sheath.
Other cable designs which incorporate a lead sheath would be heavier.
Page 186 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 87: Conventional delivery

Delivery of cables from the factory to site almost invariably involves road transportation. The
conventional method of loading a cable reel onto a lowboy (low loader) is shown in Figure 87. This
arrangement, however, is only suitable for overall reel widths which are not significantly greater than
the width of the vehicle.
However, for the size and weight of the cable and reel selected for the preliminary design study, it the
reels would probably be delivered in an arrangement similar to that shown in Figure 88. This may size
of load may require special permission from local authorities, police escorts, or removal of street
furniture2 on some parts of the route from the manufacturer.
Figure 88: Longitudinal reel on lowboy
Street furniture is objects and pieces of equipment installed on roads, including traffic barriers,
streetlights, traffic lights, traffic signs, bus stops and waste bins. Larger structures such as pedestrial
bridges may also be removed.
Page 187 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.11.2 Cable reel transportation study

Based on the dimensions and weights of the reel calculated in the previous section the Heartland
Project Team performed a study of a) the available road and rail routes from possible ports of entry to
Edmonton and b) the transportation costs. The study is recorded in Appendix, Section 12. The HPT
study showed that transportation of reels carrying 700 m cable lengths from both east and west coast
ports is feasible.
7.12 Manholes and joint bays

Jointing vaults or joint bays would be constructed at the positions between each individual cable reel
length.
For the 2,500 mm conductor envisaged for the 500 kV Study Project underground cable, initial
calculations indicate that the jointing vaults should have an internal length of 14.25 metres, and an
internal width of 2.20 metres. Ideally jointing vaults would be prefabricated and delivered by road
transport but could also be fabricated in situ.
Typical joint bay dimensions are depicted in Figure 89, Figure 90 and Figure 91.
Figure 89: Plan of typical joint bay
Page 188 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 90: Longitudinal elevation of typical joint bay
Figure 91: Elevation cross section across typical joint bay

The joint bays would be fully filled with thermal backfill before putting into service.
Drawing of joint bays upon which cost estimates have been based are included in Appendix,
Section 26.
Page 189 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.13 Tunnels
As an alternative to the surface route 500 kV XLPE cables may be installed within a tunnel. The two
tunnel designs envisaged are as follows and as depicted in Table 35 below:
Depth to top of tunnel
Internal dimensions
Cut and Cover

Round (deep bored)
1.5 metres minimum
40 metres (typical)
(depth may have to increase locally to
cross obstructions and undulating
land)
2 tunnels, each 3 metres x 3 metres
2 tunnels each 3 metres diameter
Table 35 Tunnel dimensions for scoping study
Shafts of approximately 15 metres diameter are required at 5 km intervals:

The shafts would not have permanent powered elevators.
A segregated staircase will be installed in each shaft.
Air inlet temperatures for tunnel civil engineering design:
Maximum 50C
Minimum -20C
The ventilation system would allow personnel to safely enter the tunnel.
7.13.1 Tunnel ampacity

Enough heat cannot dissipate from long tunnels to prevent eventual overheating of the cables. Forced
ventilation is therefore required. The cable ampacity within a tunnel has been assessed based on a
summer air inlet temperature of 17.5C monthly average and minimum winter air inlet temperature of 11.7C. However, to ventilate tunnels with very cold ambient air would cause the temperature of the
joints to fall below their anticipated minimum design temperature. To restrict the minimum cable and
joint temperature to no less than 0C, studies have been conducted to simulate the effect of restricting
the airflow rate during winter. (If this is inadequate it may be necessary to heat the inlet air to 0C.)
The calculated air and cable temperatures at both the inlet and outlet ends of the tunnel are shown in
Figure 92. This simulation was performed to demonstrate that both the maximum and minimum cable
and joint temperatures can be limited by carefully designed control of the air flow rate. Figure 92
shows temperature variations over a 10 year period. Extending the period has little effect on the final
temperatures.
Page 190 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 92:Tunnel temperatures over a 10 year period

The tunnels shall provided be with a ventilation system capable of supplying an air flow rate of
5 metres per second. Intermediate shafts will need to be segregated vertically to separate the air flow
system between adjacent tunnel sections and for fire separation. Noise silencer buildings will be
required around all fans.
7.13.2 Cable installation in tunnels

Cable installation into tunnels is highly specialised. For all tunnel applications, cable installation
systems are specially designed. On occasion this has included the design and procurement of
specialised cable handling vehicles for the tunnel to reduce the potentially hazardous cable handling.
The following method is based on the method which is being developed for 400 kV cable tunnels
The cable drums will be mounted above ground on powered stands with a braking
system. The cables will be lowered vertically down the shaft through a temporary
guide system and then around a preformed bend at the base of the shaft. In the
tunnel design shown we have allowed for an I-beam transportation system in
which the cable is supported on hangers and nose pulled by a specially designed
vehicle.
Page 191 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The cable will be supported on steel supports within the shaft such that it is vertically waved and held
rigid at nodes by high strength clamps, this being a semi-flexible system. The cable in the tunnel will
be set into a vertically sagged system with saddle cleats affixed to supporting steelwork at 7 metre
intervals. The sag is designed to accommodate the expansion and contraction of the cable, such that
longitudinal forces do not occur.
Figure 93: Typical tunnel cable clamp (cleat) for a sagged system
A typical saddle cable clamp is shown in Figure 93; it is curved lengthwise to allow the cable to
expand and contract.
The three phase cables will be restrained at mid span by a short circuit strap arrangement comprising of
three simple single phase clamps joined by two vertical straps.
7.13.3 Tunnel cross sections

Two types of cable tunnel are available, a deep bored, tunnel, of circular cross section (Figure 94), and
a shallow, rectangular section tunnel that can be constructed by cut and cover type methods (Figure
95).
Page 192 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 94:Tunnel cross section: deep tunnel
Figure 95:Tunnel cross section: cut and cover
Page 193 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.14 Staging of the cable installation

Cross sections have been prepared to show how the installation could be staged if all cables were not to
be installed initially. This is represented by Scenario 2 and shown diagrammatically in Figure 96.
Scenario 4 is also a staged installation, but has not been described in such detail.
Figure 96 Scenario 2, one group per circuit installed initially (black), the second later
In Figure 96 the block dotted lines represent underground cable which would be installed in Stage 1,
and the red dotted lines represent underground cable which would be installed in Stage 1
The objective of this section of the document is to give
a) The installation layout for the costing of the staging option and
b) The reasons for the proposed layouts.
Stage 1 is circuit A and circuit B each having a maximum capability of 1,500 MVA
Stage 2 is circuit A and circuit B each having a maximum capability of 3,000 MVA
The installation cross sections are shown and described for stage 1 (1,500 MVA) and Stage 2
(3,000 MVA) for direct buried, duct-manhole, deep tunnel and cut and cover tunnel installation
options. The reasons for the proposals are given.
For un-staged installation in tunnels, permanent lighting equipment is not necessarily recommended,
with the consideration of reducing the maintenance requirement. For the staged work, however,
permanent lighting should be installed to assist the timely installation of the Stage 2 cable and joints.
The advantages of staging are:
That investment can be staged, allowing expenditure to be deferred (The financial effects of
staging are analysed in Appendix, Section 3).
Page 194 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The cable installation time is halved and will help achieve the objective of installing all of the
cable in one summer season in which the air temperature is above the minimum of 0C required
for a PE jacket
A wider range of service proven, designs of straight splice will be available for selection for the
final circuit upgrading in say, 20 years time. Full advantages of improvements in the cable
design cannot necessarily be taken, for the reasons given below.
For arrangements with two Groups of Cables per circuit, i.e. Scenarios 1A.10 and 1B.20, it may be
possible to arrange the electrical connections at the Transition Stations in such a way that one of the
two Groups of Cables that comprise the cable Circuit could remain in-service whilst the other Group of
Cables is taken out of service for maintenance or repair. This advantage is lost in the case of Stage one
of Scenarios, 2A.10 and 2B.20, where each circuit would consist of one Group of Cables only. In this
case each circuit would not be capable of transmitting any power whilst its only Group of Cables was
out of service. This would give the transmission system operator less flexibility in how he would be
able to operate the system. In the event that both Groups of Cables had to be taken out of service for
repair concurrently then no power could be transmitted.
The key parameters of staged installation are summarised below:
Installation type
Phase
spacing
Duct-manhole system
Number of cables per

phase
500 mm
Stage 1 (1,500 MVA)
One
Stage 2 (3,000 MVA)
Two
Direct buried
450 mm
Stage 1 (1,500 MVA)
One
Stage 2 (3,000 MVA)
Two
Cables in tunnels
500 mm
Stage 1 (1,500 MVA)
One
Stage 2 (3,000 MVA)
Two
Figure 97: Staging summary
Page 195 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.15 Staged duct manhole cable installation

Cross sections of staged installation for a duct-manhole system are shown in Figure 98
Figure 98: Scenario 2, staging for the duct-manhole system
7.15.1 Installation layout

Stage 1: 1,500 MVA total per circuit
All four duct banks (Circuit A, Groups 1, and 2 and Circuit B, Groups 1, and 2) and manholes
are installed together.
The cables are installed in the Circuit A, Group 1 and Circuit B, Group 1, ducts and the splices
are assembled
The ducts in Circuit A, Group 2, and Circuit B, Group 2, are proven by pulling through a
mandrel, are sealed and a low positive gas pressure applied (equivalent to 5 psi at -10C).
Maintenance checks will be required to ensure that the ducts and manholes remain in sound
condition.
The haul road in the centre (if used) has to be removed to allow the land to be returned to its
former use.
Page 196 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The haul road is rebuilt to allow delivery of reels and accessories etc. to each manhole. If
possible the haul road may be reduced in width to single track to take advantage of reduced
construction traffic.
The Circuit A, Group 2, and Circuit B, Group 2, ducts are unsealed, are visually inspected by
CCTV camera, are proven by mandrel and are cleaned.
The Circuit A, Group 2, and Circuit B, Group 2, cables are installed.
The new cables are required to have a) closely similar dimensions to the original cables to
achieve the same impedances and to ensure that the load is shared 50/50, b) closely similar
diameters to ensure the same thermomechanical performance. Full advantage cannot
necessarily be taken of possible improvements to cable technology at the date at which the
circuit is required to be upgraded.
7.15.2 Reasons for proposal
The two circuits, A and B, are widely spaced by the width of the haul road (approximately
10 meters) to minimise the risk of third party damage to both circuits and common mode
failure.
The layout permits Circuit A and Circuit B to diverge and take different routes at certain
positions
Installation of all the ductbanks at Stage 1
Reduces the risk of damage during installation of the existing Circuit A Group1
and Circuit B Group 1 cables
Reduces the investment cost of Stage 2
Achieves economies of scale in reducing the unit costs of installing all the duct
banks together.
Reduces the installation time of Stage 2
Page 197 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.16 Staged cable installation direct in the ground

Cross sections of staged installation for a direct burial system are shown in Figure 99.
Figure 99:Scenario 2, staging for cables direct buried in the ground

The two trenches closest together (Circuit A Group 1 and Circuit B Group 1) are installed first
Space is reserved to excavate the two adjacent trenches later.
The haul road in the centre (if used) has to be removed to allow the land to be returned to its
former use.
The haul road is rebuilt in the centre of the reservation.

The two outer trenches (Circuit A, Group 2, and Circuit B, Group 2) are cut and the cables are
installed.
Care is taken not to drive heavy plant over the original trenches.
Page 198 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The new cables are required to have closely similar dimensions to the original cables and
spacing to achieve the same impedances and to ensure that the load is shared 50/50. Full
advantage cannot necessarily be taken of possible improvements to cable technology at the date
at which the circuit is required to be upgraded.
The two circuits, A and B, are widely spaced by the width of the haul road (approximately
10 meters) to minimise the risk of third party damage to both circuits and common mode
failure.
The layout permits Circuit A and Circuit B to diverge and take different routes at certain
positions
This arrangement has been satisfactorily used in the UK to increase the capacity of a buried
cable circuit.
7.17 Staged cable installation in deep tunnel

Cross sections of staged installation for a deep tunnel system are shown in Figure 100.
Figure 100: Scenario 2, staging for cables installed in deep tunnels
Page 199 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010

The two tunnels are constructed together with the supporting metalwork for all four groups of
cables.
The full air cooling equipment is designed and installed for each tunnel. Note, if required
approximately half of the cooling equipment may be omitted and installed at the time of the
installation of the Stage 2 cables.
One circuit is installed in each tunnel (Circuit A Group 1 and Circuit B Group 1)
Circuit A, Group 2, and Circuit B, Group 2, cables are installed; noting that an outage will be
required on Circuit A and Circuit B in turn to permit cable installation and jointing to be
performed.
The installation method and associated tunnel furniture (for example the I beam transport
system) will require to be maintained and reused.
The performance and condition of the ventilation system shall be reviewed and up-rated as
necessary.
The two circuits, A and B, are installed in separate tunnels to minimise the risk of common
mode failure.
The layout permits Circuit A tunnel and Circuit B tunnel to diverge and take different routes.
7.18 Staged cable installation in cut and cover tunnel

Cross sections of staged installation for a deep tunnel system are shown in Figure 101.
Page 200 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Stage 1 1500MVA per circuit

Ground surface
Circuit A
Group 2
(Steelwork installed)
Circuit A
Group 1
Circuit B
Group 1
Circuit B
Group 2
(Steelwork installed)
Stage 2 3000MVA per circuit

Ground surface
Circuit A
Group 2
Circuit A
Group 1
Circuit B
Group 1
Circuit B
Group 2
Figure 101: Scenario 2, staging for cables installed in cut and cover tunnels

Stage 1: 1,500 MVA
The two tunnels are constructed together with the supporting metalwork for all four groups of
cables.
The full air cooling equipment is designed and installed for each tunnel. Note, if required
approximately half of the cooling equipment may be omitted and installed at the time of the
installation of the Stage 2 cables.
One circuit is installed in each tunnel (Circuit A Group 1 and Circuit B Group 1)
Page 201 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Stage 2: 3,000 MVA
Circuit A, Group 2, and Circuit B, Group 2, cables are installed, note an outage will be required
on Circuit A and Circuit B in turn to permit cable installation and jointing to be performed.
The installation method and associated tunnel furniture (for example the I beam transport
system) will require to be maintained and reused.
The performance and condition of the ventilation system shall be reviewed and up-rated as
necessary.
7.18.2 Reasons
The two circuits, A and B, are installed in separate tunnels to minimise the risk of common
mode failure.
The layout permits Circuit A tunnel and Circuit B tunnel to diverge and take different routes.
7.19 Alternative staging arrangements

Scenario 3 (un-staged) and scenario 4 (staged) utilise three groups of cables rather than four. These are
described in Section 2.2. For the staged installation of Scenario 4:
The installation of the cable for stage 1 of Scenario 4 would be similar to the installation of the
cable for stage 1 of Scenario 2. The GIS substation would be constructed during stage 1.
The installation of stage 2 of Scenario 4 would be similar to the installation of stage 1 of
Scenario 2 with the exception that only one additional Group of Cables would be installed.
The above Scenarios 1, 2, 3 and 4 are all based on the presumption that each Group of Cables can
transmit 1,500 MW and hence no more than two cables per phase (i.e. two Groups of Cables) will be
required to transmit 3,000 MVA.
If three Groups of Cables (i.e. three cables per phase) per circuit are required for the transmission of
3,000 MW, the cable layouts, including staged scenarios, would require further consideration.
Situations where three Groups of Cables per circuit may be required are:
If the cables and joints have to be buried deeper to provide protection against low winter
temperatures, with a consequent reduction in ampacity.
At one or more of the obstruction crossings, if the maximum ampacity of each Group of
Cables becomes less than 1,500 MW.
Page 202 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.20 Alternative SCFF cable type for scoping study

For this scoping study two types of 500 kV SCFF (Self Contained Fluid Filled) cables have been
considered, LPP (Laminated Polypropylene Paper) insulated and paper insulated. SCFF cables are
included in the feasibility study because the associated splices have proven low temperature
performance.
LPP is the most likely type of insulation to be offered for a SCFF solution as it is an efficient, low loss
material. Cables with paper insulation have not been considered in detail for this design study as they
have higher losses and hence lower ampacity than LPP insulated cables.
The thickness of the dielectric of fluid filled cables is generally designed based on the maximum
permissible stress at the conductor screen at the maximum impulse voltage. For the feasibility study a
maximum permissible (impulse) stress of 82 MV/m at 1,550 kVp has been used for both LPP and paper
types. This results in a maximum stress at the conductor screen of 16 MV/m at a working voltage of
525 kV. This results in a thinner insulation and smaller cable than the generic XLPE design.
Fluid filled cables are generally constructed with either a corrugated seamless aluminium sheath or a
reinforced lead sheath. For the feasibility study the cable design has a corrugated seamless aluminium
sheath. This type of design has been favoured by many users at it gives better resistance to third party
damage and vibration and hence has better hydraulic integrity.
The selected SCFF cable constructional details and dimensions are shown diagrammatically in Figure
114.
No civil installation cost estimates have been prepared by the HPT specifically for SCFF cable. The
installation design could be expected to be fairly similar for both SCFF cable systems and XLPE cable
systems, but provision must be made for the additional hydraulic equipment (fluid tanks and pressure
monitoring equipment) required for an SCFF system.
Page 203 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Alternative SCFF 500 kV Cable For Scoping Study

3,000mm Milliken stranded copper conductor, LPP or paper insulation,
single-core, Corrugated aluminium sheath, Polyethylene jacket
1
Diagrammatic only
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Details
Central fluid duct
Copper conductor
Conductor binder and screen
LPP or paper insulation
25.5mm min
Insulation screen and binder
Radial clearance
Corrugated Aluminium Sheath
Approximate weight 46 kg/m

Figure 102: Alternative SCFF 500 kV cable
Page 204 of 310
Nominal
diameter
(mm)
16.4/18
72.5
73.8
124.4
125.6
142.2
150.2


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.20.1 SCFF cable power losses

Coated conductors have not been developed commercially for SCFF cables. The AC conductor
resistance thus tends to be higher than the equivalent sized XLPE cable conductor with coated
wires. The conductor losses are thus higher in a SCFF cable than for an XLPE cable.
When energized, dielectric losses occur within the insulation of cables. These occur whenever
the cables are energized, even if no useful load is being transmitted. The dielectric losses are a
function of:
working voltage and frequency
dimensions of the insulation
relative permittivity () of the insulation
Dissipation factor (tan ) of the insulation
At a working voltage of 500 kV and a frequency of 60 Hz the dielectric losses form a substantial
proportion of the total power losses from the cable. As described above, the higher design
stresses that can be used for SCFF cables allow a reduced thickness of insulation to be used
compared with that of an XLPE insulated cable. The relative permittivity and loss factor are both
higher for LPP than for XLPE, and the values for paper insulation are higher still. (Values for
relative permittivity, , and loss factor are given in IEC 60287-1-1[83] for XLPE, LPP and paper.)
This results in the dielectric losses of LPP or paper insulated cables being significantly higher
than those of XLPE cables. For the cables in this scoping study the dielectric losses per metre of
core are as follows:
XLPE:
6.6 W/m
LPP
13.1 W/m
Paper
28.1 W/m
These would be some 11% higher at 525 kV.
The relatively high losses of the paper insulated type make it an unattractive option and thus it
has not been considered in detail.
Both the generic XLPE cable and the SCFF have aluminium sheaths and the losses in the sheath
are similar.
7.20.2 SCFF LPP cable installation configuration
7.20.2.1 SCFF cables in Duct Manhole system

For installation in a duct manhole system with three cables per phase (three Groups of Cables) would
be required. Whilst SCFF LPP cables could achieve the required 3,000 MVA capacity with two
Page 205 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
3,000 mm cables per phase at a phase spacing of approximately 1 metre, this phase spacing is too wide
to be used practically for long routes as:
To cross obstructions the cable depth must be increased. With two cables per phase the
maximum depth at which the required ampacity can be maintained would not be sufficient
to cross some obstructions. (Ampacity can normally be maintained at increased depths by
local increase of the phase spacing; if the phase spacing is already very wide then further
increases offer little increase in ampacity)
The induced sheath voltage is greater at wider phase spacing. The voltage induced on the
sheath at a phase spacing of 1 metre will be significantly greater than at the 450 mm to 550
mm considered for other arrangements. In consequence the maximum length of section that
can be used without exceeding the maximum permissible sheath voltage will be lower at
wider phase spacing and an increased number of splices will be required.
It is often difficult to find a route sufficiently wide to accommodate this spacing for the
entire length of the route.
A system using two SCFF LPP cables in ducts has therefore not been considered further at this stage,
but if XLPE cables prove unsuitable then the feasibility of using SCFF cables with a conductor size
larger than 3,000 mm could be considered.
A system with three Groups of Cables installed in ducts has not been considered in detail as this is
likely to be a very expensive system. If it is to be considered further then the following could be
considered:
Reduced conductor size and/or reduced phase spacing
Installation of the cables in three stages rather than two, with the first stage consisting of
one Group of Cables only per circuit, but having an ampacity of less than 1,500 MVA per
circuit.
A cable system design using paper insulation instead of LPP may be possible but is unlikely to offer
any advantages because of its higher dielectric loss.
7.20.2.2 SCFF cables in Direct Burial system

To counteract the effect of the additional cable losses described above the conductor size of the
SCFF LPP cables has been increased to 3,000 mm for this scoping study. This permits the
3,000 MVA to be carried with two cables per phase for direct buried systems, albeit at an
increased phase spacing of 550 mm. This would require a redesign of the cable trench.
7.20.2.3 SCFF cables in long tunnels

SCFF cables have not been considered for installation in long tunnels because of the damage that
could occur in the event of a fire.
Page 206 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.21 Cable system routine maintenance

The following recommendations for maintenance are required in order to estimate the cost of operating
the cable system.
7.21.1 Maintenance for 500 kV XLPE cable systems

The following represents an example of good practice. Rigorous maintenance schedules represent an
onerous requirement for the transmission system operator who may be prepared to accept the additional
risk of a reduced frequency of some of the maintenance. The maintenance costs which have been
prepared for the 500kV Study Project are based on the maintenance information given in Appendix,
Section 25.
7.21.1.1 Cable route

The cable route should be visually inspected to confirm:
No unauthorised excavations have occurred in the vicinity of the cables
All route markers are present and in good condition
Any discrepancies should be made good.
Inspection frequency: weekly
7.21.1.2 Sheath bonding system

It is necessary to prove the integrity of the oversheath (jacket) periodically by applying a test voltage
between the sheath and ground.
The normal maintenance test voltage is 5 kV DC for a duration of one minute.
Even whilst out of service cable sheaths can be subject to high induced voltages under through fault
conditions on adjacent circuits, so before testing it is necessary to establish whether "induced voltage
conditions" apply to the cable in question.
The test voltage should be applied to each individual sheath section in turn with adjacent sections
grounded. A test is made in each direction from each alternate link box position. This ensures that the
full test voltage is applied across any sheath sectionalising barriers, thus proving their integrity.
Page 207 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
During the course of the test links in link boxes are removed or rearranged so as to sectionalise the
sheath and temporarily ground sections adjacent to the one under test.
Most modern designs of SVL should not have to be disconnected for these tests but this must be
checked before commencing testing.
The 5 kV DC source should be designed to limit the current in the event of a breakdown. A small
portable generator may be needed to power the test set.
Any excessive leakage current will required to be investigated and repairs conducted as necessary.
At the same time the SVLs should be checked and the electrical resistance characteristic measured; the
SVLs and leads should be visually inspected for signs of degradation, e.g. corrosion, moisture ingress,
etc.
Frequency of routine tests on sheath bonding equipment:
The oversheath (jacket) and SVL tests should be repeated annually
If an internal or through fault occurs on a cable circuit then the oversheath (jacket)
and SVL tests shall be conducted. In addition the cable sheath to ground metallic
path should be checked.
It is also prudent to check the integrity of the oversheath (jacket) prior to the
commencement of any major works which are to be conducted in the vicinity of
the cable circuit.
Whenever links are removed and replaced then the contact resistances must be
checked.
7.21.1.3 Manholes, Link boxes and Link pillars

Manholes, link pits, road covers, link boxes and above ground pillars should be maintained in good
condition.
The internal rim of the cover frame of any pits housing link boxes or manholes should be regularly
cleaned and greased. The condition of any anti-corrosion paint should be checked and renewed as
required. The condition and legibility of warning messages and labelling should be checked and
renewed as necessary.
Any manholes found to be flooded should be drained and measures taken avoid recurrence.
Page 208 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Where manholes include cable splices, any cable clamps installed to support or restrain the cables
should be inspected for mechanical integrity and to ensure that expansion forces from the cables have
not compromised their installation. The condition of any cable splices in the manholes shall be
inspected to ensure that cable expansion is not changing the geometry of the splice or moving the
splice.
Inspection frequency: annual.
7.21.1.4 Sealing Ends (Terminations)

Terminations should be visually inspected for signs of degradation, noting in particular the condition
of:
main insulators
support insulators
cable sheath closures
corona shields
Comparative infra red/thermal imaging inspections of the terminations should be conducted.
Inspection frequency: annual
The terminations should be visually inspected for signs of oil leakage. If the Sealing Ends are of the
pressurised type, with electric contact pressure gauges or transducers, then the insulation resistance of
connecting leads and the correct operation of pressure switches should be checked. If the terminations
include any facility to allow the oil condition to be sampled and/or checked then this should be
conducted in accordance with the suppliers recommendations.
Inspection frequency: annual
To avoid the possibility of unacceptably high cantilever forces being applied to the top connectors of
air insulated Sealing Ends, busbar connections should be checked to ensure that any sliding
connections are free and that drain holes are not blocked.
7.21.1.5 Condition monitoring systems

The correct operation of the DTS system should be checked in accordance with the suppliers
recommendations.
Page 209 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
After several years operation at high temperature DTS fibres may deteriorate. Depending upon how
these are installed it may be possible to blow in replacement fibres.
If fitted, the correct operation of any in-service PD detection systems should be checked in
accordance with the suppliers recommendations.
If fitted, the correct operation of any SVL monitoring systems should be checked in accordance with
the suppliers recommendations.
If conducted as part of the commissioning tests, the cable systems have been fingerprinted by TDR
measurements, then repeat TDR measurements should be made if and when possible.
7.21.1.6 Recommended routine maintenance on 500 kV XLPE cable systems in tunnels

The maintenance regime for cables in installed in tunnels is generally less than that for cables buried in
the ground. Tunnel systems are commonly designed so that personnel do not regularly have to enter
the tunnel to conduct inspections.
Routine inspection of cable supporting structures and cleats should be performed annually but may be
conducted by remotely operated equipment. The cable should be inspected at the same time.
Routine electrical tests on the integrity of the cable oversheath (jacket) are not required.
Routine inspections of link box pits and manholes are not applicable.
The condition of the tunnel should be checked in accordance with the structural engineers
recommendations.
The correct operation of the tunnel system should be checked in accordance with the suppliers
recommendations. These systems could include ventilation, water drainage pumping, emergency
lighting, fire detection and suppression, communication, auxiliary power supplies.
7.21.2 Recommended routine maintenance on 500 kV SCFF cable systems

Significant additional maintenance is required for SCFF systems. Suitably trained personnel and
specialist equipment would be required for the maintenance of an SCFF cable system. SCFF cables are
not recommended for the 500 kV Study Project and a description of the additional maintenance
requirements has thus not been included in this report.
Page 210 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
7.22 500 kV cable system spares and repairs.

Normally spares would be expected to be held in stock. As a minimum these would include one reel of
each type of cable, two joints and one termination for each design of cable. These would be packed for
long term storage but would exclude components with limited shelf life. As a minimum, the lengths
of spare cable must be long enough to be installed in the longest span used on the system. If the
installation design uses prefabricated joint bays to house joints (splices) then spare joint bays should
also be held as part of the emergency spares. To ensure tooling availability and to save time in the
event of a repair, a set of any specialist tooling should also be held in store.
In the event of a fault the items in stock would have to be inspected for completeness and degradation.
Any missing or unusable items, plus the items with limited shelf life, would then have to be procured
urgently from the manufacturer, and despatched to site by airfreight. Some suppliers may suggest it
prudent that, after a certain length of time in storage, one piece joint mouldings or stress cones should
be returned to the factory for re-inspection and test. Replacement spares, again packed for long term
storage would then be ordered to replace those taken from the users stores.
Most EHV cable system faults which involve a failure of the primary insulation (i.e. not just damage to
the cable jacket) cannot be repaired by a single joint or termination.
For direct buried systems, a repair to the primary insulation would require the insertion of a short
length of cable and either two joints or one joint and one termination. If the fault is at or near a
termination then one joint and one termination would be used, otherwise two joints would be used.
The length of cable would normally be less than 20 metres but depends upon the extent of the damage
and the availability of a suitable position to install a new joint bay. For example, in the case of a digin at a road crossing, it may be impossible to build a repair joint bay at the position of the fault,
separate joint bays would therefore be required for repair joints on either side of the fault position.
These may be on opposite sides of the road. The replacement cable would be cut from the reel held in
store. New pulling eyes or despatch caps would have to be fitted to the cut cable ends. A new joint
bay (or two bays if sufficient room cannot be found for a repair bay at the site of the fault) would be
designed and constructed; these would have to be thermally and thermo-mechanically checked to
ensure that the cable and joints would not be subjected to undue temperatures or mechanical forces.
For duct manhole systems, if it can be confirmed that the duct has not been damaged or can be
completely repaired, then it may be preferable to replace the whole span length. In this case two joints
and one span length of cable would be required. The replacement joints may have to be displaced
slightly if it cannot be guaranteed that the existing joints can be removed without damaging the cable.
In such cases, the design of jointing vault would have to be revised. The thermo-mechanical design of
the revised jointing vault would have to be checked. If the whole span is not to be replaced, then a
short replacement length would be inserted, in a similar arrangement as described for a direct buried
system. For a duct manhole system, where complete span lengths may be replaced, it may be prudent to
hold more spare cable than would be required for direct buried systems.
Page 211 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
For 500 kV cables systems installed in tunnels, the tunnel should be designed initially to ensure that
repair joint positions can be constructed at any appropriate positions within the tunnel. Again the
normal arrangement would be a short length of cable and two joints, or one joint and one termination.
Cables in tunnels are virtually immune from third party damage so a failure in a tunnel is therefore
more likely to involve a joint.
In the event of a joint being replaced, it will be necessary to ensure that the sheath bonding cable
lengths are not excessive. These are normally limited to a maximum of 10 metres, but detailed
calculations would be necessary to establish the maximum permissible length in each case. In an
extreme case so much cable could have been damaged that it is not possible to locate either of the
repair joints close enough to the original joint position that the bonding cable limit is not exceeded. In
such cases three repair joints may be required, one joint with sheath sectionalising insulation at the
same position as the original joint, and two joints without sheath sectionalising insulation, positioned
either side of the original joint position. This situation could occur in the event of a fire in either a
tunnel or a jointing vault. In such cases it is also possible that the adjacent phases could have suffered
damage, and up to nine repair joints would be required.
In the event of a cable system fault, tests should be done prior to re-commissioning of the circuit.
Ideally these tests would include an HV AC test similar to the commissioning test, but at a reduced
voltage depending upon the age of the circuit, accompanied by PD monitoring of accessories. This
would be particularly important in the case of a repair following an electrical failure of a joint, when it
would be advisable to check the condition of all other joints as well as the newly installed repair joints.
It may not be possible to obtain suitable AC test equipment before the time that the user wishes to reenergize the cables. In such cases it may be appropriate to conduct a soak test, whereby the cables
are connected to the system for test purposes only.
Prior to re-commissioning the sheath voltage limiters in the link boxes should also be checked. It
would therefore be prudent to keep a supply of SVLs in storage; so that they are available should
replacements be necessary.
The cost of spares which have been prepared for the 500kV Study Project are based on the maintenance
information given in Appendix, Section 25.
Page 212 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELD PROFILE
The electromagnetic field (EMF) is comprised of two components, a magnetic field which is produced
by the flow of current in the conductor, and an electrostatic field produced by the voltage at the
conductor. Both components exist in the proximity of an overhead line. In an underground cable,
(a) the electrostatic field is completely contained within the cable by the insulation screen and does not
exist outside the cable and (b) the magnetic field exists in the proximity of the cable.
The magnetic field profile, transverse to the route, has been calculated by HPT and is given in
Appendix, Section 13. Magnetic field magnitude is expressed in North America, in units of magnetic
flux density, milligauss (mG). This has been calculated for both underground cable and overhead lines
at 1 metre above ground carrying the same power. For convenience some of the values from Section 2,
Summary of Findings, of the HPT report are copied below in Table 36.
The majority of potential suppliers proposed cables laid in flat, horizontally spaced, formation at a
depth of 1.3 metres. Horizontal spacing is the most efficient and economical solution for a direct
buried system. Whilst cables can be installed in other formations such as open trefoil, these formations
have disadvantages of thermal inefficiency in dissipating heat, complexity of installation to lay cables
at different levels and difficulty of access for repair.
Magnetic field flux densities calculated for the laid flat spaced arrangement, with four trenches
(Scenarios 1A.10 and 1B.20), are shown in Table 36 to be 81 mG when both circuits carry 500 MW.
The equivalent magnetic field at 1,500 MW per circuit would be 243 mG. The equivalent magnetic
field for contingency operation in which one circuit carries 3,000 MW would be approximately
486 mG. Each of these levels is below the exposure guidelines established by the International
Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) [84] for public exposure (833 mG).
Location
Directly over/below the cable/line
25m from the center of the ROW
Cable
Overhead line
Magnetic Field (mG) Magnetic Field (mG)
81.0
55.0
3.7
39.1
0.3
11.0
0.1
5.0
0.0
3.0
0.0
1.0
0.0
0.4
0.0
0.1
0.0
0.0
Table 36. Magnetic field from EMF report (Appendix, Section 13)
Page 213 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Table 36 shows that (a) the maximum magnetic field directly over the buried cable is 47% higher than
immediately under the overhead line and (b) 50 metres away from the centre of the right of way the
magnetic field of the buried cable has fallen 97% of that of the overhead line.
The maximum magnetic field above the cable can prospectively be reduced to equal that of the
overhead line by burying it at a greater depth, whilst keeping the spacing between cables constant. The
disadvantage is that the dissipation of heat is less effective at greater depth and either the cables would
have to be de-rated, or more cables installed. It has been recommended in Section 1.8.3.1 that in the
Next Steps an ampacity study be performed to asses whether it would be possible to install the cables at
a greater depth than 1.3 metres, by taking into account such parameters as the cyclic nature of the
loading and the reduction in ground temperature at greater depth.
Page 214 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
DESIGNS PROPOSALS FROM PROSPECTIVE SUPPLIERS: SYSTEM DESIGN
CCI requested 15 prospective suppliers of cable systems (conventional cable and GIL) to submit
technical designs and budgetary prices for the underground transmission system.
They were sent the following documents:
A Letter of Introduction from the AESO (see Appendix, Section 14)

An inquiry document (see Appendix, Section 15)
A questionnaire (see Appendix, Section 16.)
Manufacturers were initially requested to supply information by Sept 4th 2009. An extension was
subsequently given until Sept 4th 2009. Because of the scope of the information requested, some
suppliers did not provide information until Oct 13th. Further clarification questions were raised by
CCI.
The majority of manufacturers expressed interest and responded positively providing useful
information. This included the provision of some of the photographs included within this document.
9.1
Inquiry and questionnaire documents
9.1.1
Inquiry document
The inquiry document comprised two parts:

Part 1: Information to be provided
Experience with EHV cable systems
Proposed design of cable systems
Estimated costs
Repair period
Delivery period
Part 2: Functional requirements
Timescale
Electrical System Design[1]
Load requirements
Route length
Nominal seasonal temperatures
Nominal ground thermal resistivities
Seasonal periods
Page 215 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Maximum cable design temperatures

Installation design
Description of the route
Sheath bonding arrangement
Depth of burial for conventional trench
EMF limits for conventional trench
Phase configuration for conventional trench
Tunnel
Reel length
Tests
500 kV cable requirements
500 kV accessory requirements
Other cables
Major spares
[1] Notes:
Suppliers were requested to base their proposals on both circuits being required to carry a continuous
load of 3,000 MVA at 500 kV with both circuits loaded.
It was later advised that the requirement was for 3,000 MVA with one circuit loaded only.
The request to manufacturers was reviewed and it was determined that a reissue of the enquiry
document would not be necessary as:
9.2
The size of the cable and the number of cables per phase could not have been reduced as these
are determined by the need for each circuit alone to carry 3,000 MVA.
In principle the spacing between circuits used for the scoping study could have been reduced
without reducing the ampacity at 1,500 MVA to less than 7 metres, this being the spacing
between the Groups of Cable within each circuit. The spacing between groups of cables is
determined by both thermal and circuit security considerations, as described in section 7.6 and
section 7.7. Thus the minimum spacing between circuits could not be reduced to less than
7 metres.
Requests for technical information from prospective suppliers of 500 kV cable systems
CCI requested several prospective suppliers of 500 kV cable systems to provide technical
recommendations for two parallel 500 kV cable circuits, each of a generic route length of 10 km. At
the date of issue of the enquiry document the scenarios of 20 km, 65 km and those utilising GIS
switching substations at the cable transitions had not been developed.
Page 216 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
They were told that a service life of 40 years would be required, and also that the cable should be
suitable for continuous operation at approximately 525 kV as previous system studies had indicated
that the voltage in areas where cable might be used were likely to be around this value.
Whilst it was envisaged that each circuit would require multiple cables per phase, they were not given
any instructions as to how many underground cables they should propose.
In order for them to be able to prepare designs, they were given the following parameters:
Nominal depth, seasonal temperatures and ground thermal resistivity
Maximum ground temperatures:

Summer 20C Winter 0C
Ground thermal resistivity (when fully dried out)
3.0 K.m/W
Backfill and normal ground thermal resistivity
0.9 K.m/W
Depth to top of cable (for both cables in ducts or direct burial)
1.3 metres
The above depth, temperatures and ground thermal resistivities were based on those used in the
design of the cable system for the recently installed Downtown Edmonton Supply and Substation
240 kV cable system.
To give prospective suppliers an indication of the climatic conditions for which the cable systems
must be designed, they were asked to base their recommendations on the following minimum
temperatures:
Ground at 1.3m depth for direct buried cable and joint design
-10C
-15C
Air for duct- manhole system design: cable and joint
-20C
-20C
Air within deep tunnels for cable and joint design
-10C
-10C
Air within cut and cover tunnels for cable and joint design
-20C
-20C
Outdoor air for cable and termination design
-50C
-50C
Indoor air for cable and termination design
-10C
-10C
(Note: the temperatures in italics are those that were recommended at the end of the feasibility study)
Installation design
Designs based on three types of installation were requested:
Cables installed in duct-manhole system

Cables direct buried in the ground
Cables installed in tunnels
Prospective suppliers were not asked to propose designs of SCFF cable types for use in tunnels as
these perceived to present too great a fire hazard. Prospective suppliers were not required to
Page 217 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
perform detailed ampacity calculations for their tunnel proposals, as, at this feasibility study
stage, it was not considered necessary or appropriate to request multiple suppliers to perform the
complex calculations necessary to prepare proposals for tunnel ventilation arrangements.
Description of the route

Prospective suppliers were advised that the cable route was anticipated to be in rural areas and
were only asked to consider installation designs for cables installed at normal depths. At the time
that the enquiries were sent to prospective suppliers there was insufficient information available
about the types of obstructions that would have to be crossed for the prospective suppliers to be
given clear guidance as to the types of obstructions that would have to be crossed.
They were asked to provide proposals based on the cable route terminating into one or more of
the following arrangements:
Outdoor, air insulated terminations

Indoor, air insulated terminations
Outdoor SF6 terminations
Indoor SF6 terminations
Sheath bonding arrangement

Prospective suppliers were asked to prepare designs in which the sheath voltage, at maximum
load, would not exceed 250 Volts.
Phase configuration for conventional trench

For both cables installed in ductbanks or direct in the ground, prospective suppliers were asked to
advise their dimensional recommendations for:
a horizontally flat spaced formation
any optional alternative configurations.
Reel lengths
Prospective suppliers were advised that the maximum sizes of cable reels which can be delivered
to site should be taken as:
Reel overall diameter

Reel gross weight
No greater than 4.3 metres

No greater than 35 Tonnes
Page 218 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
At the time that the enquiries were sent to prospective suppliers the transportation survey had not
been completed. The above limits are typical for road transportation in many countries.
Tests
Prospective suppliers were advised that the test requirements for XLPE cable systems would be
generally in accordance with the requirements of IEC 62067[1] but that tests additional to those
in IEC 62067[1], in particular to demonstrate the performance of the cable system at the minimum
temperatures which could be encountered in cables and accessories for the Edmonton region of
Alberta.
500 kV cable requirements

Prospective suppliers were advised that XLPE cables must have a longitudinally water blocked
conductor and be longitudinally water blocked under the metallic radial water barrier. XLPE
cables for the following installation types must have:
a continuously extruded metallic sheath or a welded metallic sheath for cables
direct buried in the ground or in duct-manhole systems:
a continuously extruded metallic sheath, a welded metallic sheath or a laminated
metallic foil radial water barrier for tunnel systems
DTS fibres
Prospective suppliers were advised that DTS (Distributed Temperature Sensing) fibres would be
laid with the cables and that to give a useful indication of cable temperatures when installed in
ducts, it is preferred that:
for XLPE cable the fibres would be included within the cable construction
proposals for DTS fibres external to the 500 kV cables and ducts would also be
considered for XLPE and SCFF cables
9.3
System designs proposed by prospective suppliers
Most suppliers offered systems utilising two cables per phase with two Groups of Cables per circuit, in
separated trenches fairly widely spaced apart as depicted in Figure 103. All suppliers offered naturally
cooled systems. No supplier offered a system requiring only one group of cables per circuit, either
with or without forced cooling.
Page 219 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 103. Underground cable: design requirement

The circuits are designed to meet the contingency operation, shown in Figure 103. Either circuit must
be able to carry a peak load of 3,000 MW when the other circuit is unavailable. The requirement is
described in Section 2.1.1, Functional Requirement: Power Transmission.
Each circuit comprises two groups of cable. Thus each group of underground cables must be designed
to carry a peak load of 1,500 MW.
Page 220 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Cables in Ducts
Ground surface
Duct
Cable
Duct block
Phase
spacing
Phase
spacing
Group spacing
Phase
spacing
Phase
spacing
Cables direct buried in the ground

Ground surface
Cable
Backfill
Phase
spacing
Phase
spacing
Group spacing
Phase
spacing
Phase
spacing
Figure 104 Cable spacing

To achieve the ampacity some suppliers proposed one or more of the following deviations from the
design parameters:
a reduction in the depth
a reduction in the thermal resistivity of the ground, backfill or duct surround.
Page 221 of 310


United Kingdom
9.3.1
ER 381
19th February 2010
Duct-Manhole systems
The phase spacing ranged from 450 mm to 1,300 mm, and the group spacing ranged from 2,500 mm to
7,000 mm. In general proposals with wider group spacing had narrower phase spacing.
Proposals were also received for very closely grouped cables with all the cables required for one circuit
being installed in a single duct block. This arrangement required three cables per phase using
3000 mm conductors.
Bentonite filling of the ducts was also proposed by some suppliers to achieve the required ampacity.
9.3.2
Direct buried systems
The phase spacing ranged from 350 mm to 1,000 mm, and the group spacing ranged from 2,500 mm to
6,000 mm. In general proposals with wider group spacing had narrower phase spacing.
Proposals were also received for very closely grouped cables with all the cables required for one circuit
being installed in a single trench. This arrangement required three cables per phase using 3,000 mm
conductors. Each circuit would consist of nine cables installed in a trench 3,500 mm wide.
9.3.3
Tunnel systems
For installation in tunnels, some suppliers proposed a reduced number of joints for cables installed in
tunnels. Up to 30% fewer joints were proposed for cables installed in tunnels. Depending on the phase
spacing, longer section lengths could result in higher sheath voltages. Higher sheath voltages could be
considered for tunnel installations than for buried systems.
9.3.4
Sheath bonding systems
All XLPE and SCFF cable suppliers based their proposals on cross bonded cable sheath systems. A
typical cross bonding arrangement is shown in Figure 105 and Figure 106.
Page 222 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 105. Cross bonding schematic
Figure 106. Detail of cross bonding components

The number of joints to be supplied, and hence the length of cable on each reel, varied from supplier to
supplier. The number of joints ranged from approximately 150 to over 300.
9.4
Designs proposals from prospective suppliers: cable

Different cable types have been proposed by prospective suppliers. Most suppliers offered XLPE
insulated cable designs, but some also offered SCFF cable types as an alternative. GIL (gas
Page 223 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
insulated line) was also offered. The supplier of HPFF (High pressure fluid filled) cable
responded that they had no suitable product to offer for the 500 kV Heartland Project.
9.4.1
XLPE cable designs: general

Cable designs have been provided by several manufacturers. The most commonly proposed
arrangements were systems that would utilise two cables per phase to carry 3,000 MVA. These
would be arranged as two groups of three single core cables, fairly widely spaced so as to reduce
mutual heating effects. The features of the XLPE cables proposed for such a system are
described below.
9.4.2
Conductors for XLPE cable designs

All manufacturers have proposed cables with conductor designs of 2,500 mm, although a few
manufacturers are able to offer larger conductors should they be needed. Most manufacturers
proposed some kind of insulated wires in their conductor designs to reduce the AC resistance,
increase transmission efficiency and thus reduce the power losses when carrying a given current.
9.4.3
Core design for XLPE cable designs

Most manufacturers have offered an insulation thickness of around 30 mm.
Cables with thinner insulation thickness have higher electrical field strength (stress) at the
interface between the cable and the accessories. For EHV cables with large conductors it is
generally the maximum permissible stress at this interface that limits the minimum thickness of
insulation.
Some manufacturers claimed lower dielectric losses than would have been calculated if the
material properties listed in the recommended standard IEC 60287[83] had been used.
9.4.4
Sheath design for XLPE cable designs

Manufacturers have offered a range of different types and these are shown diagrammatically in
Figure 107, Figure 108, Figure 109, Figure 110, Figure 111, Figure 112 and Figure 113.
In general it can be seen that cable designs incorporating lead sheaths (Figure 107 and Figure
111) are significantly heavier than other designs; cable designs with corrugated sheaths generally
have larger overall diameters.
Page 224 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The metallic shield or sheath over the insulated core has to provide:
a low impedance path for fault currents
a watertight radial barrier to prevent moisture reaching the insulation.
The metallic shield can either be a single metallic layer which fulfils both these functions, or it
can comprise two separate components, a layer of wires to carry the fault current, and a separate
metallic layer to provide the water barrier.
Both weight and diameter can limit the maximum length of cable that can be delivered to site as
they will govern the overall weight and dimensions of the reels upon which the cables travel from
the factory to the installation site.
The weight of the cable can limit the maximum length that can be pulled in to a duct block.
Heavier cables cannot be pulled in such long lengths as lighter cables.
Manufactures also advised the sheath losses for their designs, i.e. the sheath losses are
dependent upon the design of the sheath (and also upon the phase spacing at which the cables are
installed)
According to the method for calculating ampacity described in IEC 60287[83], any losses in wire
screens can be considered negligible. The losses in annular metallic sheaths tend to be higher in
cables with lower sheath resistance. Thus cables with annular sheaths of low resistance
aluminium have higher losses than those with higher resistance annular sheaths, although this is
not so significant at wider phase spacing. The lowest loss type is that utilising a stainless steel
sheath. Cables with lower losses can be laid in more compact formation, with lower external
magnetic fields and lower induced sheath voltage.
For cables to be installed in tunnels, where the cables will not be immersed in water, some
manufacturers have offered cable designs with an overlapped or welded aluminium foil that is
substantially thinner than the annular sheaths proposed for installation in duct-manhole or direct
burial arrangements. These offer lower losses, lower weight and possibly reduced cost.
9.4.5
Distributed Temperature Sensing

Cable designs incorporating a layer of wires can be modified to include optical fibres for DTS
(Distributed Temperature Sensing) and several manufacturers have proposed cables of this type.
Optical fibres can also be located in cable designs with metallic sheaths in between layers of
cushioning/water blocking tapes, although no suppliers offered this. This is advantageous for
cables installed in a duct manhole system, but not so significant for cables installed direct in the
ground or in tunnels.
Page 225 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
DTS is described in Section 3 Basic Description.
9.4.6
Jacket design for XLPE cable designs

All manufacturers have offered Polyethylene jackets for duct-manhole or direct burial
arrangements. Jackets with superior fire performance have been offered for installation in
tunnels.
9.4.7
SCFF cable designs

A minority of manufacturers offered SCFF (Self contained fluid filled designs).
Manufacturers have proposed cables with conductor designs of 2,500 mm or 3,000 mm.
Conductors with insulated wires have not been offered.
All proposed designs of SCFF cable use LPP (Laminated Polypropylene Paper) and have an
insulation thickness several mm less than that of XLPE. The overall diameter is thus less than
that of the equivalently sized XLPE design.
All proposed designs include corrugated aluminium sheaths and polyethylene jackets.
designs of SCFF cables that incorporate lead sheaths have been proposed.
No
All manufacturers have offered Polyethylene jackets for duct-manhole or direct burial
arrangements. SCFF cables are not generally considered suitable for installation in tunnels.
9.4.8
GIL design
In addition to conventional, flexible, cable systems GIL has also been proposed. The state of the
art together with significant applications of GIL is described in Section 4.10.
GIL was offered for installation in a tunnel and budgetary prices were provided. GIL was not
offered for direct burial in the ground.
The GIL system design proposed by prospective suppliers for the 500 kV Study Project is
substantially different to that of conventional, flexible, cable in the following ways:
GIL design, Figure 115, is significantly larger in diameter than XLPE or SCFF
cable types and thus it has been proposed that it would be delivered in straight
Page 226 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
sections and assembled together on site. The maximum length of each section
would be approximately 10 metres.
Each GIL tube is rated at 4,000 amps assuming that means exist to dissipate the
heat into the ambient air. This is equivalent at 500 kV to 3,464 MVA, or
3,000 MW at a 0.865 power factor). Thus only one set of three phase tubes would
be required per circuit. For two circuits six phases was offered.
Previous GIL installations have not generally been buried in the ground; they have
either been supported on structures above ground, or in underground tunnels.
The minimum phase spacing between phases would be 900mm.
9.4.9
Cable design types proposed

The construction and approximate dimensions of the XLPE and SCFF cables proposed by
prospective suppliers are shown diagrammatically in the following figures:
Figure 107: Proposed 500 kV design: extruded lead sheath.

Figure 108: Proposed 500 kV design: welded aluminium sheath.
Figure 109: Proposed 500 kV design: corrugated aluminium sheath.
Figure 110: Proposed 500 kV design: copper wire screen and corrugated stainless
steel sheath.
Figure 111: Proposed 500 kV design: copper wire screen and lead sheath.
Figure 112: Proposed 500 kV design: wire screen and smooth aluminium sheath.
Figure 113: Proposed 500 kV design: copper wire screen and aluminium laminate.
Figure 114: Proposed 500 kV design: self contained fluid filled.
Figure 115: Proposed 500 kV design: GIL
Page 227 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
500 kV Proposed Design

single-core, lead sheath, Polyethylene jacket
1
Diagrammatic only
Item
Details
1
Copper conductor
2
Conductor binder
3
Extruded screen
4
XLPE Insulation
27-32 mm
5
Extruded screen
6
7
Extruded lead sheath
4-5 mm
8
Approximate weight 55-60 kg/m
Approximate diameter 150-160 mm
Figure 107: Proposed 500 kV design: extruded lead sheath
Page 228 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010

single-core, smooth aluminium sheath, Polyethylene jacket
1
Diagrammatic only
Item
Details
1
Copper conductor
2
Conductor binder
3
Extruded screen
4
XLPE Insulation
27-32 mm
5
Extruded screen
6
7
Smooth (welded) aluminium sheath
0.75-1.5 mm
8
Figure 108: Proposed 500 kV design: welded aluminium sheath
Page 229 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010

single-core, corrugated aluminium sheath, Polyethylene jacket
1
Diagrammatic only
Details
Copper conductor
Conductor binder
Extruded screen
XLPE Insulation
27-32 mm
Extruded screen
Corrugated aluminium sheath
7
1.5-3.5 mm
(extruded or welded)
8
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 109: Proposed 500 kV design: corrugated aluminium sheath
Page 230 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010

single-core, copper wire screen, corrugated stainless steel sheath, Polyethylene jacket
1
10
Diagrammatic only
Item
Details
1
Copper conductor
2
Conductor binder
3
Extruded screen
4
XLPE Insulation
27-32 mm
5
Extruded screen
6
7
Distributed temperature sensing fibre
8
Copper wire screen
9
Corrugated stainless steel sheath
0.75-1.0 mm
10
Figure 110: Proposed 500 kV design: copper wire screen and corrugated stainless steel
sheath
Page 231 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010

single-core, copper wire screen, lead sheath, Polyethylene jacket
1
10
Diagrammatic only
Item
Details
1
Copper conductor
2
Conductor binder
3
Extruded screen
4
XLPE Insulation
27-32 mm
5
Extruded screen
6
7
8
Copper wire screen
9
Extruded lead sheath
2-3 mm
10
Figure 111: Proposed 500 kV design: copper wire screen and lead sheath
Page 232 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010

single-core, copper or aluminium wire screen, aluminium sheath, Polyethylene jacket
1
10
Diagrammatic only
Item
Details
1
Copper conductor
2
Conductor binder
3
Extruded screen
4
XLPE Insulation
27-32 mm
5
Extruded screen
6
7
8
Copper or aluminium wire screen
9
Smooth (welded) aluminium sheath
0.5-1.0 mm
10
Figure 112: Proposed 500 kV design: wire screen and smooth aluminium sheath
Page 233 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
500 kV Proposed Design (for tunnel use only)

single-core, copper wire screen, laminated aluminium sheath, Polymeric jacket
1
10
Diagrammatic only
Item
Details
1
Copper conductor
2
Conductor binder
3
Extruded screen
4
XLPE Insulation
27-32 mm
5
Extruded screen
6
7
8
Copper wire screen
9
Overlapped aluminium laminate
0.2-0.4 mm
10
Polymeric Jacket
Figure 113: Proposed 500 kV design: copper wire screen and aluminium laminate
Page 234 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
500 kV Proposed Design (SCFF)

2,500 or 3,000 mm Milliken stranded copper conductor, LPP insulation,
single-core, corrugated aluminium sheath, Polyethylene jacket
1
Diagrammatic only
Item
Details
1
Central fluid duct
2
Copper conductor
3
Conductor binder and screen
4
Impregnated LPP insulation
25-26 mm
5
Insulation screen and binder
6
Radial clearance
7
Corrugated Aluminium Sheath
3-4 mm
8
Approximate weight 41 kg/m (2,500 mm) to 48 kg/m (3,000 mm)
Approximate diameter 145 mm (2,500 mm) -155 mm (3,000 mm)
Figure 114: Proposed 500 kV design: self contained fluid filled
Page 235 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
500 kV Proposed Design (GIL)

Aluminium alloy conductor, SF6 insulation, Aluminium alloy enclosure
Cross section
Longitudinal section
Diagrammatic only
Item
Details
1
Aluminium alloy conductor
2
Pressurised SF6 gas
3
Aluminium alloy enclosure
4
Support insulator
Approximate weight 45 kg/m (average, includes insulators)
Approximate diameter 550 mm
Figure 115: Proposed 500 kV design: GIL
Page 236 of 310


United Kingdom
9.5
ER 381
19th February 2010
Cable electrical values provided by suppliers
Prospective suppliers of cable systems were asked to provide values of resistance, conductor and sheath
losses, capacitance and dielectric losses. The averages of the appropriate values provided by the
prospective suppliers were calculated and tabulated below. These were passed to AESO for use in the
power flow studies and calculations of power loss performed by Teshmont. The results of their
calculations are given in Appendix, Section 5.
Table 37 shows the average cable capacitance and charging current provided for XLPE cable
Capacitance per cable
Charging current per cable at 500 kV
Dielectric loss per cable at 500 kV (estimated)
Dielectric loss per group of three single phase cables at 500 kV (estimated)
pF/m
mA/m
W/m
W/m
213
23.1
5.2
15.6
Table 37 Supplier responses: Average capacitance and dielectric losses for XLPE cable
Table 38 shows the average cable capacitance and charging current provided for SCFF cable
Dielectric loss per cable at 500 kV (estimated)
Dielectric loss per group of three single phase cables at 500 kV (estimated)
pF/m
mA/m
W/m
W/m
290
24.5
12.7
38.1
Table 38 Supplier responses: Average capacitance and dielectric losses for SCFF cable
Table 39 shows the average capacitance and charging current provided for GIL
pF/m
mA/m
53
5.8
Table 39 Supplier responses: Average capacitance for GIL

Table 40 shows the average and maximum combined conductor and sheath losses provided for XLPE
cable.
Page 237 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010

average
Conductor and Sheath losses at 1,500 MVA per group of cables at 500 kV
Equivalent resistance per cable
W/m
/m
103.6
11.5
Table 40 Combined conductor and sheath losses: XLPE cable mean and maximum
No complete system design utilising two SCFF cables per phase, and suitable for the transmission of
3,000 MVA per circuit, has been proposed. The power losses for a SCFF cable system have therefore
not been analysed. Because an SCFF cable has higher dielectric losses than the equivalent XLPE
insulated cable, the power losses at low transmitted loads would be higher for an SCFF cable than for
an XLPE cable.
Table 41 shows the combined conductor and enclosure losses provided for GIL.
Conductor and enclosure losses at 3,000 MVA per 3-phase group of GIL
Equivalent resistance per single phase GIL
W/m
/m
105.8
11.8
Table 41 Conductor and enclosure losses of GIL
9.6
Splice designs proposed by prospective suppliers
Three different types of splice designs were offered for XLPE cables:
One piece silicone rubber prefabricated.
One piece EPR rubber prefabricated.
Prefabricated composite with EPR rubber stress cones
The major electrical components of the proposed one piece joint (Silicone rubber or EPR rubber) and
prefabricated composite joint offered are shown schematically in Figure 116 and in Figure 117
Page 238 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 116 One piece prefabricated joint (OPJ)
Figure 117. Prefabricated composite joint (PJ)

More suppliers offered one piece prefabricated type joints than offered prefabricated composite type
joints.
Page 239 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
10 TRANSITION STATION
The technical details of the transition stations were complied by the HPT and are given in Appendix,
Section 17 and 26.
Transition station types:
Scenarios 1 and 2 are air insulated switchgear (AIS) in the open air (-50oC design
temperature).
Scenarios 3 and 4 will be gas insulated switchgear (GIS) in a building. An example of gas
insulated switchgear is shown in Figure 118.
An indoor heated station is not included at this stage in the engineering work, but will be
added to the Project Risks, Section 15 to cover the risk that the cable terminations will not
operate at -50oC.
Figure 118. Indoor GIS switchgear

Courtesy of Areva
Reactor types and use:
One three phase unit per group of three cables.

The reactor is needed for line energisation and also has benefits in reducing the current
loading on the cable. Reactors are positioned at both transition stations, one at each end of
the underground cable, to allow for the requirement that the circuit can be energised from
either end.
Page 240 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
A study has been performed to show the need for the reactor is needed in the circuit in
normal loading and in circuit energisation, (reference Teshmonts report in Appendix
Section 5).
Page 241 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
11 POWER LOSSES
The losses in an underground cable and overhead line are comprised of two parts:
A variable part that is dependent upon load current, this being the heating of the conductor
by the flow of load current.
A fixed part of constant magnitude that is independent of load current. The fixed losses are
all a function of the applied system voltage which is constant irrespective of the loading.
The ratio of variable to fixed losses are different in underground cables and overhead lines:
The ratio is high in an overhead line, as the overhead line possesses higher conductor
resistance than a cable, but lower voltage related losses.
Conversely the ratio is low in an underground cable because the fixed losses of a cable are
high. The fixed losses associated with a cable are:
Insulation losses in the XLPE insulation
Losses in the conductor due to the flow of charging current into the XLPE
insulation
Insulation and conductor losses in the reactors
A cross over load exists at which the losses in the cable are equal to the losses in the same length of
overhead line.
11.1.1 Relationship of power loss to power transfer for the 500 kV Study Project
Teshmont performed a system study for AESO, Appendix Section 5, and compared the losses for each
of the scenarios. Each scenario has different lengths of overhead line and cable connected in series and
has reactors connected in parallel. In consequence the scenarios have a modified ratio of variable to
fixed losses.
A comparison of one circuit of a 65 km all-cable scenario with an all overhead-line scenario in Figure
119 shows:
The cross-over load occurs at 1,700 MW at which the overhead line and underground
cable scenarios have equal losses.
For transmitted loads up to 1,700 MW, the all-overhead line Scenario 6 has lower losses.
Page 242 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
For transmitted loads greater than 1,700 MW, the underground cable scenario has lower
losses. However, a single circuit will only experience loads in excess of 1,500 MW in
contingency situations in which the other circuit is un-available.
Thus the prospective power loss benefits of XLPE underground cables are unlikely to be
realised in the 500 kV Study Project.
Figure 119. Power losses for selected scenarios at different levels of transmitted power
At loads less than the 1,700 MW cross over load, the scenarios containing a portion of cable have a
higher loss than Scenario 6, which is all-overhead line. The difference in losses compared to the
overhead line Scenario 6 is lowest in those scenarios that contain a) the shortest length of cable and b)
the fewest number of Groups of Cables. Figure 119 shows that:
Page 243 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Scenario 2A.10 has slightly higher losses than the overhead line Scenario 6. This is because
Scenario 2A.10 contains the smallest quantity of cable. It is the first stage of a staged
option and comprises one group of cables (per circuit) instead of two. Note that the losses
for Scenario 2A.10 are only plotted up to 1,500 MW as this is the limiting load for a single
Group of Cables.
Scenario 1A.10 comprises two Groups of Cables and so has a load capability under
contingency operation of 3,000 MW. The losses in Scenario 1A.10 above 1,700 MW are
less than those of the overhead line Scenario 6 because variable losses in the overhead line
conductor are greater than those in the underground cable conductor.
Scenario 5.B.65 comprises two Groups of Cables of 65 km length. The two Groups of
Cable, under contingency operation, have a load capability of 3,000 MW:
At 3,000 MW the losses in the cable Scenario 5B.65 are 16 MW compared to
28 MW in the overhead line Scenario 6.
At a nominal low load of, say, 400 MW the losses in the cable Scenario 5B.65 are
6 MW, compared to 0.5 MW in the overhead line Scenario 6.
11.1.2 Cumulative power losses for the 500 kV Study Project

Teshmont calculated the losses for each scenario for 40 years based on the forecast average loads as
follows:
2027 and beyond:
457.3 MW
1,000.0 MW
For the average load of 457.3 MW in the period up to and including 2026 , the average power losses for
the relevant scenario Stages are presented in Table 42 and Figure 120.
Page 244 of 310


United Kingdom
Scenario
ER 381
19th February 2010

loss calculation
Total loss
1A.10
2A.10
3A.10
4A.10
Length
km
10
10
10
10
1B.20
2B.20
3B.20
4B.20
20
20
20
20

2.4
1.7
1.7
1.7
5A.65
5B.65
65
65

3.4
6.5
65
1.0
MW
1.7
1.4
1.4
1.4
Table 42. Power losses for each scenario at an average load of 457.3 MW
Key to the Figure 120 bar chart :
Yellow: All-overhead line i.e. Scenario 6.
Green: One Group of Cables in operation, i.e. 2A.10, 2B.20, 3A.10, 3B.20, 4A.10, 4B.20 and 5A.65.
Blue: Two Groups of Cable in operation, i.e. the un-staged Scenarios 1A.10, 1B.10 and 5B.65.
Figure 120. Power losses for an average load of 457.3 MW

For the average load of 1,000 MW for the period 2027 and beyond, the average power losses for the
relevant scenario Stages are presented in Table 43.
Page 245 of 310


United Kingdom
Scenario
ER 381
19th February 2010
1A.10
2A.10
3A.10
4A.10
Length
km
10
10
10
10

loss calculation
MW per circuit
3.9
3.7
-
1B.20
2B.20
3B.20
4B.20
20
20
20
20

4.4
4.0
-
5A.65
5B.65
65
65
Not applicable
7.1
65
3.5
Total loss
Table 43. Power losses per circuit for each scenario at an average load of 1,000 MW
11.1.3 Estimated Net Present Value of Losses

The estimated Net Present Value (NPV) cost of the energy losses taken over the forty year analysis
period is given in Appendix, Section 3 and is summarised in Table 44.
The estimated Net Present Value (NPV) of losses for the 40 year period is summarised in Table 44 and
shows that:
The estimated NPV of the losses for all scenarios ranges from 33 $M (Scenario 6, alloverhead line) to 52 $M (Scenario 1.B.20).
The estimated NPV of the losses is 7.3% of the estimated NPV Revenue Requirement* for
Scenario 6, all-overhead line, and between 4.2 and 4.7% of the NPV Revenue Requirement
for the scenarios that include cable. *Present Value of capital and maintenance costs, etc, as
detailed in Appendix, Section 3
The estimated Net Present Value (NPV) of differences in losses between those of the scenarios
containing cable and the all-overhead line Scenario 6 are also given in Table AB. These show:
The difference in estimated NPV of the losses for all scenarios ranges from 5 $M
(Scenario 3A.10) to 19 $M (Scenario 1.B.20).
The difference in estimated NPV of the losses as a percentage of the estimated NPV
Revenue Requirement ranges from 0.6% (Scenario 3A.10) of to 1.6% (Scenario 1.B.20).
Page 246 of 310


United Kingdom
Scenario
Staged
1A.10
No
2A.10
Yes
3A.10
No
4A.10
Yes
1B.20
No
2B.20
Yes
3B.20
No
4B.20
Yes
5A.65
5B.65
6
No
Description
2 Groups of Cables per

circuit (Un-staged)
circuit (Stage 1 and
Stage 2)
1 Group of Cables per
circuit (Un-staged, with
two Groups out of three
in operation)
circuit (with two Groups
out
of
three
in
operation)
circuit (Un-staged)
circuit (Stage 1 and
Stage 2)
circuit (Un-staged, with
two Groups out of three
in operation)
circuit (with two Groups
out
of
three
in
operation)
All Cable
All Cable
All-overhead
ER 381
19th February 2010

UGC
OHL
Route
km
km
km
Estimated NPV
Revenue
Requirement
$M
Estimated
NPV of
losses
Estimated NPV
Loss difference
from OHL
$M
$M
10
55
65
756
42
4.7
1.0
10
55
65
727
40
4.5
0.8
10
55
65
696
38
4.6
0.6
10
55
65
691
39
4.7
0.7
20
45
65
1,020
52
4.3
19
1.6
20
45
65
951
47
4.0
14
1.2
20
45
65
886
43
4.1
10
1.0
20
45
65
865
44
4.2
11
1.0
65
65
0
0
0
65
65
65
65
Ref
Ref
380
Table 44. Estimated NPV of power losses over a forty year period.
NPV is the net of PV of losses and PV of Revenue requirement.
Page 247 of 310
Not calculated
Not calculated
33
7.3


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
12 GENERIC COST STUDY FOR THE 500KV STUDY PROJECT

(Note: all costs in this report are in Canadian dollars, unless otherwise stated. All capital costs are in
2009 dollars).
The estimated capital cost for the underground part of the 500 kV Study Project has been derived from
anticipated price level information from prospective suppliers of 500 kV XLPE cable together with
estimates of the civil construction costs, which were supplied by the HPT. For the total route length of
65 km, the estimated costs supplied by the HPT also include the overhead line and the associated
transmission equipment, such as sub-stations, transition stations and reactive compensation.
12.1 Cable system unit costs

The cable manufacturers indicative budgetary prices for the 10 km underground route length for the
Heartland Project cable system have been analysed by CCI. For the purposes of commercial anonymity
and competiveness the summarised costs have been made non-attributable to individual manufacturers.
In order to calculate the cable system costs for each scenario of the 500 kV Study Project, the
budgetary prices were analysed into average unit costs:
Average cost of cable system per km of each Group of Cables, including supply of 3 km of
cable (i.e. sufficient single core cable for one kilometre of a Group of Cables in a single
trench), splices, jointing, bonding equipment, ancillary equipment, and supervision of cable
laying, delivery to Edmonton.
Average cost per termination of each Group of Cables, including 3 terminations, jointing,
bonding equipment, ancillary equipment, delivery to Edmonton
Average cost per commissioning test for each Group of Cables
Average cost per set of development tests per supplier, including prequalification tests, type
tests, and an allowance for low temperature tests
Average cost per set of type tests per supplier. In the event of a staged installation, repeat
type tests would be performed prior to the implementation of stage 2. In the intervening
period between Stage 1 and Stage 2, there may have been minor changes to materials,
manufacturing processes, etc, necessitating repeat type testing.
Average cost per set of spares per supplier, including cable, splices and terminations.
From these the capital cost estimate of the cable system for each scenario was calculated and
incorporated by HPT into the total capital cost estimate for each scenario.
Page 248 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
12.2 End-to-end estimated capital costs for the 65 km route length

HPT compiled the total estimated capital costs for the 65 km long, 500 kV Study Project. Costs were
estimated for nine scenarios, comprising different proportions of cable and overhead line.
Four of the scenarios were formulated to have reduced quantities of cable and are referred to as staged
options. These scenarios would initially be installed and operated with a reduced transmission
capability; this is referred to as Stage 1. At a later date additional Groups of Cables would be installed
to Stage 2 of these scenarios include the subsequent achieve the full 3,000 MVA transmission
capability. The estimated capital cost of both stages was calculated.
The estimated costs were based on the design information summarised in Appendix, Sections 17, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22 and 23. The total costs comprised:
Cable system components (cable, terminations, joints and ancillaries) and jointing (CCI)
Spares (CCI/HPT)
Underground cable civil works (HPT)
Cable installation into the ground, (HPT)
Overhead line components and assembly (HPT)
Transition station construction and equipment, such as reactors (HPT)
Works and equipment in two substations (HPT)
Owners costs (HPT)
The detailed estimated capital costs are given in Appendix, Section 2.

A summary of the estimated capital costs for each scenario is given in Table 45.
Page 249 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Scenario
Staged
Description
UGC
OHL
Route
Stage 1
Stage 2
Total
1A.10
2A.10
3A.10
4A.10
No
Yes
No
Yes
4 trenches (2 per phase), all installed together

4 trenches (2 per phase), 2 installed first and 2 later.
3 trenches, all installed together
3 trenches, two installed first and 1 later
km
10
10
10
10
km
55
55
55
55
km
65
65
65
65
$M
574
606
$M
201
105
$M
748
775
687
711
1B.20
2B.20
3B.20
No
Yes
No

4 trenches (2 per phase), 2 installed first and 2 later.
20
20
20
45
45
45
65
65
65
689
-
350
-
1014
1039
877
4B.20
Yes
20
45
65
720
185
905
No
65
65
382
All-overhead line
Table 45. Capital cost estimates for each scenario (2009 dollars)
12.3 Capital cost estimates: comparison of components in each scenario

The breakdown of estimated capital cost components is shown in the following:
Scenario 1A.10 and 2A.10
Scenario 3A.10 and 4A.10
Scenario 1B.20 and 2B.20
Scenario 3B.20 and 4B.20
Scenario 6 (All overhead line)
Figure 121
Figure 122
Figure 123
Figure 124
Figure 125
NOTE: The diagrams only show half of the route for clarity; the values represent the total estimated
capital costs for the entire 65 km route.
Page 250 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Estimated capital costs for 4 groups of Cables, 10 km long
Stage 1 estimated costs are given in white on blue. Stage 2 estimated costs are given in black above
red.
Total estimated costs for each component are the sum of the Stage 1 and Stage 2 costs
Figure 121. Estimated capital cost components in $M for 4 groups of Cables, 10 km long
Page 251 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
red.
Total estimated costs for each component are the sum of the Stage 1 and Stage 2 costs.
Page 252 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
red.
Page 253 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
red.
Page 254 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Estimated capital costs for 65 km overhead line
Figure 125. Estimated capital cost components in $M for all overhead line (Scenario 6)
12.4 Estimated Net Present Value of the life cycle costs for the 65 km route length
The estimated Net Present Value of the lifecycle costs were compiled by the AESO for the end to end
estimated capital costs, maintenance and spares are given in Appendix, Section 3, for the 500 kV Study
Project route length of 65 km. A summary of the estimated NPVs for each scenario is given in Table
46.
Page 255 of 310


United Kingdom
Scenario
Staged
ER 381
19th February 2010

Description
1A.10
2A.10
No
Yes
3A.10
4A.10
No
Yes
1B.20
2B.20
No
Yes
3B.20
4B.20
No
Yes

4 trenches (2 per phase), 2 installed first and 2
later.
No
All-overhead
UGC
OHL
Route
PV
Revenue
Requirement
PV
Losses
NPV
Net
Cost
km
10
10
km
55
55
km
65
65
$M
756
727
$M
42
40
$M
798
767
10
10
55
55
65
65
696
691
38
39
733
730
20
20
45
45
65
65
1,020
951
52
47
1,072
997
20
20
45
45
65
65
886
865
43
44
928
909
65
65
380
33
412

later.
Table 46. Estimated NPV of the life cycle cost for each scenario
12.5 Comparison of the cost of each scenario

The effect on cost of the number of Groups of Cable and of staging is shown in Table 47 and
Table 48.
Although the scenarios which have three Groups of Cables, rather than four, have lower cable
cost, they have additional transition station costs because of the need for switchgear to rapidly
switch between the Groups of Cables in a contingency situation. The scenarios with four
Groups of Cables are permanently connected and available.
Page 256 of 310


United Kingdom
Cable length km
ER 381
19th February 2010
Number of
Groups of Cables
Estimated capital costs
Estimated NPV of
Life Cycle costs
Un-staged
Staged
$M
$M
Un-staged
$M
Staged
$M
748
(1A.10)
775
(2A.10)
798
(1A.10)
767
(2A.10)
687
(3A.10)
711
(4A.10)
733
(3A.10)
730
(4A.10)
Difference
-61
-64
-65
-37
1,014
(1B.20)
1,039
(2B.20)
1,072
(1B.20)
997
(2B.20)
877
(3B.20)
905
(4B.20)
928
(3B.20)
909
(4B.20)
Difference
-137
-134
-144
-88
10
20
Table 47. Effect on estimated cost of number of Groups of Cables
Cable length km
Number of
Groups of Cables
Estimated capital costs
Estimated NPV of
Life Cycle costs
Un-staged Staged Difference
$M
$M
$M
Un-staged
$M
Staged
$M
Difference
$M
748
(1A.10)
775
(2A.10)
+27
798
(1A.10)
767
(2A.10)
-31
687
(3A.10)
711
(4A.10)
+24
733
(3A.10)
730
(4A.10)
-3
1,014
(1B.20)
1,039
(2B.20)
+25
1,072
(1B.20)
997
(2B.20)
-75
877
(3B.20)
905
(4B.20)
+28
928
(3B.20)
909
(4B.20)
-19
10
20
Table 48. Effect on estimated cost of staging
12.6 Differences between the estimated cost of underground cable and overhead line
Table 49 compares the estimated capital cost and the estimated NPV of the life cycle cost:
Total estimated costs for each scenario
Page 257 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Estimated cost differences for each scenario compared to all-overhead line (Scenario 6)
Estimated cost ratios for each scenario compared with the all overhead line (Scenario 6)
Average estimated costs of the 10 km and 20 km scenarios
Average of the 10 km and 20 km scenarios estimated cost differences compared with alloverhead line (Scenario 6)
Average estimated cost ratios compared to all overhead line, for the 10 km and 20 km
scenarios
Scenario
Estimated capital cost

Estimated NPV of Life Cycle costs
cost $M delta $M ratio
cost $M
delta $M
ratio
1A.10
748
366
2.0
798
386
1.9
2A.10
775
393
2.0
767
355
1.9
3A.10
687
305
1.8
733
321
1.8
4A.10
711
329
1.9
730
318
1.8
Average
of all
10 km
scenarios
730
348
1.9
757
345
1.8
1B.20
1,014
632
2.7
1,072
660
2.6
2B.20
1,039
657
2.7
997
585
2.4
3B.20
877
495
2.3
928
516
2.3
4B.20
905
523
2.4
909
497
2.2
Average
of all
20 km
scenarios
959
577
2.5
977
565
2.4
382
412
Table 49. 500 kV Study Project Estimated costs, cost differences and cost
ratios compared to all-overhead line
Table 50 compares, for information only, the ratio of the estimated installed cost of 10 km and 20 km
of underground cable to that of equal lengths of overhead line, excluding all other equipment. The
values in Table 50 are derived from Table 3 of Appendix, Section 3.
Page 258 of 310


United Kingdom
Scenario number
1A.10 / 1B.20
2A.10 / 2B.20
3A.10 / 3B.20
4A.10 / 4B.20
ER 381
19th February 2010

Number of
Groups of Cable
4
2 + 2 (staged)
3
2 + 1 (staged)
Average
Estimated cost ratio

10 km underground
20 km underground
7.3
7.0
7.9
7.2
5.6
5.3
6.1
5.6
6.5
Table 50. Ratio of estimated installed cost of underground cable to an equal length of overhead line
An example of how these ratios have been obtained is given below for Scenario 1B.20 (20 km):
From column 2 of Table 3 given in Appendix, Section 3 the Transmission line estimated costs, i.e.
excluding all other associated costs, are 205 $M for Scenario 6 (overhead) and 582 $M for Scenario
1B.20.
The average overhead line estimated cost per km can thus be taken as 205 $M / 65 km = 3.15 $M/km
Scenario 1B.20 includes 45 km of overhead line, the estimated cost of which can therefore be assumed
to be some 3.15 $M/km x 45 km = 141.9 $M.
Subtracting this from the total of 582 $M leaves 440.1 $M which relates to the estimated cost of 20km
of cable.
The cable estimated cost per route km is thus 440.1$M / 20km = 22 $M/km. The estimated cost ratio of
underground cable to overhead line is therefore = 22 / 3.15 = 7.0.
Table 51 shows the estimated cost ratio of installed cable, transition stations and additional
telecommunication equipment to overhead line. This is also derived from Table 3 of Appendix,
Section 3.
Scenario number
1A.10 / 1B.20
2A.10 / 2B.20
3A.10 / 3B.20
4A.10 / 4B.20
Number of
Groups of Cable
4
2 + 2 (staged)
3
2 + 1 (staged)
Average
Estimated cost ratio

10 km underground
20 km underground
9.8
8.6
10.5
8.9
8.3
6.9
8.9
7.3
8.7
Table 51. Ratio of estimated cost of underground cable and transition stations to an equal length of
overhead line
Page 259 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
The cost studies, summarised in Table 49, Table 50 and Table 51 show that for the 65 km 500 kV
Study Project:
The estimated NPV of life cycle costs are greater than the estimated capital costs; however
the cost ratio for each scenario compared to the all-overhead line scenario is not
significantly changed.
The average ratio of installed cable cost estimates, to those of an equal length of overhead
line is:
6.5 : 1 excluding all other equipment.
8.7 : 1 including transition stations and associated other equipment.
The average ratio of NPV of life cycle cost estimates for the 65 km route length with and
without underground cable is:
1.8 : 1 for a 10 km cable length.
2.4 : 1 for a 20 km cable length.
Increasing the length of underground cable from 10 km to 20 km, increases the average
estimated capital cost by 229 $M.
The lowest cost cable scenario for estimated capital cost is Scenario 3A.10 for the 10 km
underground route length. Scenario 3A.10 comprises three Groups of Cables. The ratio of
estimated cost to an all-overhead scenario (Scenario 6) is 1.8:1 and the estimated capital
cost difference is 305 $M.
The estimated cost of Scenario 4A.10 is closely similar, but higher with estimated capital
cost and lower estimated NPV of life cycle costs .
* Note: Scenarios 3A.10* has a less substantial n-1 redundancy margins than other 10 km
scenarios to meet the contingency condition of 3,000 MW, as two Groups out of the three
available in the fully staged options are required.
If four Groups of Cables* are used (scenario is 1A.10) the ratio of estimated cost to an alloverhead scenario (Scenario 6) is 2:1 and the estimated capital cost difference is 366 $M.
* Note: Scenario 1A.10 has a more substantial n-1 redundancy margin to meet the
contingency condition of 3,000 MW, as it comprises four Groups of Cables (two Groups out
of the four being required).
Page 260 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
There is a reduction in the estimated NPV of life cycle costs for staged installation. The
reductions are:
- Staged Scenario 2A.10 to un-staged Scenario 1A.10:
3.9% (31 $M)
- Staged Scenario 4A.10 to un-staged Scenario 3A.10:
0.4% ( 3 $M)
- Staged Scenario 2B.20 to un-staged Scenario 1B.20:
7.0% (75 $M)
- Staged Scenario 4B.20 to un-staged Scenario 3B.20:
2.0% (19 $M)
12.7 Sensitivity studies on the estimated capital cost of the cable system
12.7.1 Sensitivity: Effect on cost of SCFF cable
The estimated increase in the capital cost if SCFF cable is used in place of XLPE is given in Table 52.
This is based on there being two SCFF cables per phase. Table 52 includes only cost differences for
the supply and jointing of the cable system and does not include any differences which there may be in
the installation costs.
Scenario
Staged
1A.10
2A.10
No
Yes
3A.10
4A.10
No
Yes
1B.20
2B.20
No
Yes
3B.20
4B.20
No
Yes
Description

later.
later.
UGC
OHL
Route
km
Stage
1
$M
Stage
2
$M
km
km
10
10
Total
Change
55
55
65
65
+7
+7
$M
+12
+13
10
10
55
55
65
65
+6
+3
+9
+10
20
20
45
45
65
65
+12
+12
+24
+24
20
20
45
45
65
65
+12
+6
+18
+18
Table 52. Estimated capital cost increase if SCFF cable is used
12.7.2 Sensitivity: Canadian Dollar value falls against other currencies by 20%
Cable systems would be imported into Canada and the price would thus be dependent upon the
exchange rate between the Canadian dollar and the native currency of the supplier. A fall in the value
of the Canadian Dollar would result in an increase in the price of the cable system; a rise in the value of
the Canadian Dollar would result in a fall in the price of the cable system. The historic variation in the
value of the Canadian Dollar against other currencies over the past four years is shown in Figure 126.
This shows that the value of the Canadian Dollar has fallen significantly against the value of the
Japanese Yen, particularly in the period between 22 Feb 2008 and 6 July 2008. Exchange rates could
Page 261 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
vary again between the time that the prospective suppliers prepared their indicative budgetary prices
and the time that they submit commercial quotations.
1.2
140
1.0
120
USDollar
Euro
80
0.6
60
0.4
Japan Yen
100
0.8
40
0.2
20
0.0
28/05/2005 10/10/2006 22/02/2008 06/07/2009 18/11/2010

USD
Euro
JPY
Figure 126. Historic variation in the value of Canadian dollar

Table 53 shows the effect that a 20% change in the value of the Canadian Dollar would have on the
cost of each of the scenarios.
Page 262 of 310


United Kingdom
Scenario
Staged
1A.10
2A.10
No
Yes
3A.10
4A.10
No
Yes
1B.20
2B.20
No
Yes
3B.20
4B.20
No
Yes
ER 381
19th February 2010

Description

later.
later.
UGC
OHL
Route
km
Stage
1
$M
Stage
2
$M
km
km
10
10
Total
Change
55
55
65
65
12
11
$M
23
24
10
10
55
55
65
65
12
17
18
20
20
45
45
65
65
22
21
44
43
20
20
45
45
65
65
22
11
33
33
Table 53. Estimated capital cost change if Canadian dollar value should vary by 20%
12.7.3 Sensitivity: Metal prices change by 50%

Suppliers commonly include a price variation clause in their commercial offers for cable systems,
which allows them to increase or decrease the price to allow for any changes in the value of the metals
in the cable between the time of their offer, and the time that the order is placed. The price changes
given in Table 53 exclude the value of the metals in the cable, i.e. the metal prices in Canadian dollars
are assumed to remain unaltered. Any variation in the cable price as a result of a change in the metal
prices, as quantified in Section 12.7.3, would therefore also be added or subtracted from the cost of the
project in addition to the changes given in Table 53.
Cables contain copper, also lead and/or aluminium. Of these, the copper content is the most
significant; a 2,500 mm conductor weighing approximately 23 kg per metre. The price paid for cable
systems is generally based on the metals price at the time that the order is received by the supplier. The
price of copper can fluctuate significantly. The price in October 2005 was around 4.0 USD per kg,
since then it has risen to approximately 9.0 USD per kg on several occasions. For illustration, the
historic variation in copper prices in US Dollars, as published by the London Metal Exchange, over the
past two years is shown in Figure 127.
Page 263 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Figure 127. Historic variation in copper price (USD)

Any change in the price of the metals used in the cables would thus have an effect on the price that the
supplier would charge for the cables. If the metal prices should rise then the capital cost would
increase, similarly if the metal prices should fall then the capital cost would fall. The estimated change
in the capital cost if the price of the metals used in the cable should change by 50% is given in Table 54
for each of the scenarios.
Scenario
Staged
1A.10
2A.10
No
Yes
3A.10
4A.10
No
Yes
1B.20
2B.20
No
Yes
3B.20
4B.20
No
Yes
Description

later.
later.
UGC
OHL
Route
km
Stage
1
$M
Stage
2
$M
km
km
10
10
55
55
65
65
$M
12
13
10
10
55
55
65
65
9
10
20
20
45
45
65
65
12
12
24
24
20
20
45
45
65
65
12
18
18
Table 54. Estimated capital cost change if cable metal prices should vary by 50%
Page 264 of 310
Total
Change


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
13 500 kV STUDY PROJECT DURATION

The total times to procure, test and install the 500 kV Study Project were compiled by HPT a) from
times supplied by the suppliers for cable manufacture and b) for the civil installation and construction
durations. The work items are listed in Section 13.1 and 13.2 and the AltaLink & EPCOR schedule
basis is given in Appendix, Section 4.
The estimated duration and ISD (in service dates) are given in Table 55. The dates and durations for
the staged options refer only to the stage 1 of each scenario. Each of the dates given are for the supply
and installation of all the equipment required for the particular scenario, including both cable and
overhead line.
The schedule was based on activities starting on February 01, 2010. As this date regresses, the ISD
will also regress.
Cable
Length
Number of
Groups of Cables
km
4/2
10
Un-staged
Time
Scenario
November 1, 2014 1A.10
57 months
November 1, 2014
57 months
November 1, 2014
4/2
57 months
November 1, 2014
3/2
57 months
All Overhead Line
March 29, 2013
3/2
20
In Service Date and Duration
3A.10
1B.20
3B.20
-
Staged
Time
December 1, 2013
46 months
December 1, 2013
46 months
November 1, 2014
57 months
November 1, 2014
57 months
-
Scenario
2A.10
4A.10
2B.20
4B.20
-
Table 55. Duration of cable supply and installation for each scenario
The draft project schedules, summarised in Table 55, show that:
The two 10 km long scenarios with two Groups of Cables to be installed in stage 1 have a
cable supply and installation time of 46 months.
All other scenarios have a cable supply and installation time of 57 months.
The project schedule includes estimates for the duration of the following work items:
Page 265 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
13.1 Cable
Supply lead time including:

Low temperature development test
One year IEC62067[1] Prequalification test
Type test, generally to IEC62067[1]:
Cable manufacturing time (varies with the number of suppliers utilised)
Cable shipping time to port of entry
Preparatory civil works
Cable delivery from the port of entry to Edmonton
- Cable laying
- Cable jointing
- Joint bay setting-up and clearing-up
Joint bay checks
Civil reinstatement of joint bays
Commissioning time:
Insulation tests, HV AC and PD at each joint
Set up of test vehicle and HV connections
Set up of PD connections to each joint
A separate test on each single core cable Group of Cables
Preliminary analysis of PD results
Contingency for the repetition of PD measurements
Dismantling of HV test equipment including PD connections to each
joint:
Test weather window contingency:
Cable parameter measurements
Grounding system tests
Joint bay and link box grounding system tests
DTS system tests
Route marker checks
Grounding conductors checks
Link box checks
13.2 Transition station
Equipment supply lead time

Preparatory civil works time
Equipment delivery time
Equipment installation time
Civil reinstatement time
Page 266 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Commissioning time
14 UNDERGROUNDING THE ENTIRE 65 KM ROUTE LENGTH

In addition to the eight underground scenarios considered in detail, some consideration has also been
given to the implications if the entire 65 km route length were to be undergrounded. This mainly
consists of the system studies conducted by Teshmont and described in Appendix, Section 5.
14.1 Scenarios considered

If underground cable were to be used for the entire 65 km route length of the 500 kV Study Project,
then scenarios, similar to those considered for 10 km and 20 km underground route lengths could be
considered. However, as the undergrounding of 65 km is not being considered in such detail, the
studies are limited to Scenario 5A.65, comprising one Group of Cables per circuit and shown in Figure
13, and Scenario 5B.65, comprising two Group of Cables per circuit and shown in Figure 14.
14.2 Technical limitations

14.2.1 Voltage control
The voltage along very long lengths of cable can vary as load is applied or removed. Teshmont have
considered this and their report is in Appendix, Section 5.
Studies on switching have not been conducted. Such studies could be included as part of the next steps
in the development of the 500 kV Study Project if required.
14.2.2 Reduction in useful power transmission capacity because of cable charging current
Whenever cable insulation is subjected to a voltage, an electric current flows into the cable insulation.
This current is referred to as the Charging current. This Charging current flows through the cable
terminations, along the cable conductor and into the insulation. The following example is given to
demonstrate the effect. The linear apportionment of charging current with length is correct.
Every kilometre of 500 kV XLPE cable of the type that would be selected for the 500 kV Study
Project would have a charging current of about 23.1 amps. (This is based on the technical information
provided by prospective cable suppliers and is shown in Table 37.) 23.1 amps is 1/75th of the
maximum current carrying capacity (ampacity) of the cable conductor of 1,732 amps. Similarly for 2
km of cable, the charging current would be 46.2 amps, or 2/75ths of the ampacity. The effect of this
Page 267 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
charging current flowing in the conductor is negligible for short lengths of cable, but becomes more
important if the length increases, and the limiting case is when the total charging current reaches
75/75ths. In this case all the current carrying capacity of the conductor would be used to carry the
charging current with no spare capacity available to carry any useful current to the load. To avoid
overheating the cable the total current in the conductor cannot exceed its ampacity. The useful power
that can be carried by the cable is thus reduced by the need to carry the charging current as well as the
useful current to the load. It is the charging current that makes a very long AC cable unviable. This is
one of the main reasons why very long cables, for example undersea interconnectors, utilise DC rather
than AC transmission systems.
For a 65 km cable length for the 500 kV Study Project, the total charging current would be 65/75ths
(i.e. 87%) of the ampacity. The reader is cautioned that the calculation of the useful load current that
can be carried is not a simple linear subtraction. The calculation and its explanation are beyond the
scope of this report, but the results, based on a maximum cable ampacity of 1,732 amps, and a charging
current of 23.1 amps per km, are as follows:
65 km with no reactor: The useful load current would be 863 amps, a reduction of 50%.
65 km with a reactor at the circuit end: The useful load current would be 1,562 amps, a
reduction of 10%.
Further reductions in the charging current flowing in the cable conductor could be made if reactive
compensation is also added along the length of the cable route. This would require that Substations
containing the reactive compensation be constructed at one or more positions along the route.
Teshmont have studied the effects of cable capacitance on power demand and voltage control for a
65 km cable length (Scenarios 5A.65 and 5B.65) and their report is in Appendix, Section 5.
14.3 Supplier capability

To underground 65 km of EHV, high ampacity, cable would be a significant undertaking. There are
currently only about a dozen manufacturers who may be able to provide 500 kV, large conductor, cable
systems of the type which would be required for the 500 kV Study Project. Not all of these have any
experience of supplying 500 kV cable systems. By way of comparison, the largest 500 kV project
previously installed was the 40 km route in Tokyo which comprised six parallel cables. This used a
total of 240 km of 500 kV, 2,500 mm2 conductor cable. This was supplied by four manufacturers, each
supplying approximately 60 km of single core cable to construct the 40 km double circuit route. The
Tokyo project was completed in approximately nine years, including testing, manufacturing and
installation. Since the time of the Tokyo project, there has been some reduction in the number of
independent EHV cable manufacturers and, the four Japanese manufacturers who supplied cable for the
Tokyo project have now been consolidated into two. If the entire 65 km of the 500 kV Study Project
were to be undergrounded, with four Groups of Cables, the quantity of cable required would be 780
Page 268 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
km. This means that the quantity of cable and accessories would exceed that of the Tokyo project by a
factor of 3.25.
14.4 Cost estimates

Detailed cost estimates were not prepared for an underground cable route length of 65 km. Some
indication of cost can be obtained by extrapolation of the detailed costs from the Appendices for the
scenarios with underground route lengths of 10 km and 20 km.
14.5 Cable system fault statistics for 65 km underground route length

Using the same methodology as been applied to the scenarios with 10 km or 20 km route lengths, the
unconditioned and conditioned failure rates shown in Table 25 and Table 27 have been applied to a
65 km underground route length for the 500 kV Study Project. The results are given in the following
tables.
Table 56 and Table 58 are based on the unconditioned failure rates in Table 25.
Table 57 and Table 59 are based on the conditioned failure rates in Table 27.
Table 56 (unconditioned) and Table 57 (conditioned) show the number of failures
for one year in service.
Table 58 (unconditioned) and Table 59 (conditioned) give the total number of
failures over a 40 year service life.
Route length
km
65
65
65
65
Cable failures
0.09
0.17
0.26
0.35
Joint failures
0.18
0.35
0.53
0.70
0.00
0.01
0.01
0.01
0.27
0.53
0.80
1.06
Total number of Groups of Cables
Table 56 Unconditioned failure rates for a 65 km cable route length for one year in-service
Page 269 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010

#
Route length
km
65
65
65
65
Cable failures
0.09
0.17
0.26
0.35
Joint failures
0.24
0.48
0.72
0.97
0.00
0.01
0.01
0.02
0.33
0.66
1.00
1.33
Table 57 Conditioned failure rates for a 65 km cable route length for one year in-service
#
Route length
km
65
65
65
65
Cable failures
3.46
6.92
10.37
13.83
Joint failures
7.03
14.05
21.08
28.11
0.12
0.24
0.36
0.48
10.61
21.21
31.82
42.42
Table 58 Unconditioned failure rates for a 65 km cable route length for forty years in-service
#
Route length
km
65
65
65
65
Cable failures
3.46
6.92
10.37
13.83
Joint failures
9.65
19.31
28.96
38.61
0.17
0.35
0.52
0.69
13.28
26.57
39.85
53.14
Table 59 Conditioned failure rates for a 65 km cable route length for forty years in-service
Page 270 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
15 500 kV STUDY PROJECT RISKS

15.1 Technical risks
15.1.1 Inability of the accessories to meet the required minimum winter design temperatures.
The manufacturers are unable to convincingly demonstrate in a pre-bid or in technical prequalification
exercises that their accessories have a good prospect of passing the low temperature proving tests.
Preventative Actions:
At the earliest opportunity and prior to drafting low temperature proving test
requirements, gather information from other utilities and manufacturers on lower
voltage XLPE cable systems with accessories operating under low ambient
conditions.
Remedial Action:
At the pre-bid stage revise the system design parameters:
o Install the cables at a greater depth in the direct buried and duct-manhole systems at a
depth where the ground temperature is higher. This reduces the ampacity of each cable.
For a significant increase in depth it will be necessary to add an additional cable per
phase, increasing the number of groups of three single core cables from four to six for
Scenarios 1 and 2.
o Install the cables in a tunnel in which the minimum air temperature is limited to an
acceptable level by the ventilation control system.
Select an SCFF cable system instead of an XLPE cable system. (The additional
maintenance liabilities of, and the implications of possible fluid leakage from, an
SCFF system would have to be accepted)
15.1.2 Uncertainty of the winter minimum design temperature

Preventative Action
At the earliest opportunity obtain measurements by performing field trials and
installing temperature measuring devices at various depths in representative
positions.
Increase the design margin to be specified for the accessory performance. At
present the design margins have been proposed at -10oC for a) the joints giving
design temperatures of -15oC for direct burial, -20oC for duct-manhole, -10oC for
the deep tunnel and -20oC for the shallow tunnel. At present the design temperature
for the outdoor termination and associated cable has been set according to
requirements for other items of plant at -50oC.
Page 271 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Evaluate the feasibility of trace heating equipment.
15.1.3 Failure of the joints to demonstrate reliability in the Proving Tests

Failure of the prefabricated designs of joints (OPJ or PJ types) to demonstrate reliability during Proving
Tests for the 500 kV Study Project. (This is considered to be improbable as some manufacturers
designs of OPJ and PJ joints are understood to have already completed type approval tests.)
At the pre-bid stage examine in detail the status and relevance of any 500 kV
2,500 mm2 prequalification tests already performed and only accept bids from
manufacturers with proven EHV, large conductor, test and service experience.
Only accept bids from manufacturers with sufficient in-house development
resources.
Remedial Actions:
At the contract stage, the manufacturer must remedy the situation.
15.1.4 Failure of the cable system to achieve reliable service performance

Failure of the cable and accessories supplied for the 500 kV Study Project to demonstrate a reliable
consistency of service performance. (This likelihood can be reduced if suppliers ensure stringent
quality control measures).
Specify, and ensure suppliers agree to, the following project specific requirements:
o Special Proving Tests for low temperature operation.
o Prequalification tests (These would typically be based on the requirements of
IEC 62067[1], but can include additional requirements).
o Type tests (These would typically be based on the requirements of IEC 62067[1], but can
include additional requirements).
o Routine tests (These would typically be based on the requirements of IEC 62067[1], but
can include additional requirements).
o Sample tests on cables and accessories, including tests, additional to the material and
high voltage tests specified in IEC 62067[1], to demonstrate consistency of performance
at low temperature (not covered by international procedures).
Page 272 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
o Quality control and remedial action procedures (not covered by international

procedures)
o Inspection and test plan (This is not fully covered by international procedures)
o Full size accessory assembly trials (This is not fully covered by international
procedures)
o Jointer training programme, testing and approval for all jointers who will work on the
500 kV Study Project (This is not fully covered by international procedures).
o Full size installation trials, where special to the 500 kV Study Project (not covered by
international procedures).
o Commissioning testing (This is partly covered by IEC 62067[1])
o Develop and document repair procedures, suitable for conditions where there could be
induced voltages, for exposing failed cable or accessories, preparing the site
environment and making a repair under simulated service conditions.
Train the HPT project engineers for 500 kV cable systems in:
Cable and accessory factory inspection and monitoring procedures.
Installation inspection and monitoring procedures.
Commissioning inspection and monitoring procedures.
In-service routine monitoring, inspection and maintenance procedures.
Repair inspection and maintenance procedures.
Install four Groups of Cables to give full contingency.
Purchase each group of three single phase cables from a separate manufacturer, to
eliminate common mode failure.
Add a performance penalty clause to the contract for an extended warranty period
to require that the supplier has an engineer and jointers on site within, say, 48
hours of notification of failure.
Remedial Actions:
Switch to the load to the parallel circuit.
Replace all the suspect components supplied by the particular manufacturer.
15.1.5 Inability to repair the circuit at winter minimum ambient temperature:

Specify the repair requirement in the request for quotation.
Perform trials and establish procedures for cold weather repairs.
Install four Groups of Cables to give full contingency.
Purchase large tents and heater systems for cold weather use.
Page 273 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Install cables in a tunnel:

Store a short repair length of cable in the warm tunnel
Remedial Actions:
Switch the load to the parallel circuit.
Repair the circuit when the ambient temperature rises.
15.2 Contractual risks

15.2.1 Failure to attribute responsibility:
In the event of project delays, inadequate quality control or failures where the cause is not clear, there
can be difficulty in attributing the blame to the responsible party.
Preventative actions:
For a high technology 500 kV cable system, a single contractor should be
responsible on a turnkey basis for the complete project, including supply, jointing
and installation.
Specify that the cable system suppliers technical recommendations and
requirements must take priority over installation convenience.
Remedial action:
Investigate the cause of the problem, determine and take remedial action. Attribute
or apportion blame accordingly in an attempt to recover costs.
15.3 Schedule risks

15.3.1 Delayed development:
A period of twenty seven months has been allowed in total for all the development
(thermal, mechanical and electrical) and formal witnessed prequalification and
type approval work tests. This is considered to be reasonable.
At the earliest opportunity seek advice from the manufacturers.
Select a manufacturer with sufficient in-house development resources.
Remedial Actions:
Page 274 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
15.3.2 Delayed manufacture:

Allow sufficient time within the project schedule for manufacture. (A period of
approximately eighteen months has been anticipated for the manufacture of 120
km of single core cable as the range of manufacturing periods advised by
prospective manufacturers was generally between one to two years. Whilst this is
believed to be reasonable at this stage, the programme requires agreement with the
manufacturers.)
Engage multiple suppliers so as to reduce the impact of a delay by any one
supplier.
Engage sufficient suppliers to enable required quantity of cable to be manufactured
within the required time frame.
Check that the manufacturers have allowed for reasonable durations and
contingencies in their programmes.
Engage suitable expediter services.
Impose conditions within the contract that penalise the supplier for late delivery.
Ensure that agreed quality control and inspection and test plans are in place and are
being observed.
Perform frequent visits to suppliers factories to ensure manufacture and testing is
being performed correctly.
Remedial Actions:
15.3.3 Delayed installation and commissioning:

Preventative Action:
Sufficient jointing teams need to be available for the number of joints to be
installed.
Increase the span length of cable to 700 metres or more to reduce the number of
joints and the jointing period.
Agree an achievable installation period including contingences with the cable
supplier, civil installer and any other critical contractors.
Establish a buffer stock of cables and accessories.
Remedial Actions:
At the contract stage, the critical suppliers and contractors must remedy the
situation.
Page 275 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
15.3.4 Damage to cable during delivery or installation

Preventative Action:
Ensure that there are detailed specifications for a) the cable pulling eyes and
despatch cap fitted in the factory are fully water and pressure tight, b) the reel and
its battening, c) the reel transport cradle and d) the reel lifting eyes are sufficiently
robust and stable to withstand without damage the shipping, lifting and road
delivery activities.
Specify that the temporary lay down areas for the reel are stable load bearing and
level surfaces.
Specify that the route to site be proven by performing a trial drive-through.
Establish a buffer stock of reels.
Position the joint bays to use equal section lengths of cable to allow maximum
flexibility and contingency.
Specify that a cable installation trial be performed, especially if specialised or nonstandard equipment is to be used and if the cable is to be installed in a special
configuration.
Specify that the cable installers have evidence of relevant experience with large
diameter, heavy, long length EHV cables and that their references are validated.
Specify that the pulling tensions be a) calculated for the particular span and that
these are below the manufacturers limit for the cable and b) measured during the
pull.
Specify that jointers be present on site to immediately make the cable water tight
should a pulling eye be pulled off or the metallic sheath damaged.
Ensure that a type approved jacket repair technique together with materials is
available.
Perform an HV DC test on the jacket as soon as the cable is laid, locate the
position of any damage, repair the jacket and re-test.
Mark the cable phase colours and note the cable numbers on each of the cable ends
in the joint bays and vaults before and after rolling them at the cross bonded
transposition.
Apply protection to the exposed cable ends in the joint bay or vault.
Ensure that the full security measures are put in place until the trench is backfilled.
Ensure that the trench base and/or duct bores are clean.
Ensure that the blinding and backfill is free of sharp stones that could damage the
cable.
Ensure concrete cover tiles are not placed on the side of the trench when pulling-in
cable.
Page 276 of 310


United Kingdom
Remedial Action
ER 381
19th February 2010
Select plastic cover tiles in preference to concrete cover tiles to reduce the risk of
them being dropped and penetrating the cable through the blinding layer.
Perform a repeat HV DC test on the cable jacket immediately after backfilling.
Prevent site vehicles from driving over the filled trench or joint bay.
Ensure that all damage is reported to the supplier and is investigated immediately.
If damage is proven to be confined to the jacket, apply a jacket repair and re-test.
If damage to the cable insulation is suspected then remove and replace the span
length.
15.3.5 Commissioning test failure and repair

There is a risk with XLPE cable systems that a low incidence of failures of accessories will occur
during the HV AC site commissioning tests.
Preventative Action
Ensure that the cable is installed correctly and that factory serving tests have been
performed on the jacket.
Specify that a full quality plan be in place for the preparation of the assembly area
of the accessories (joint bay or joint vault). The quality plan should include full
traceability of the cable numbers, joint numbers (together with key components
numbers), jointing drawings, jointing instructions, critical assembly tool numbers,
jointer and assistant jointer names, site engineer names and test engineer names.
All staff must be trained and approved as competent.
Specify that the jointers must check the condition and key dimensions of the cable
and of the accessory components and that any anomalies must be reported and
investigated immediately.
Specify that a suppliers competent and experienced senior design engineer is to be
present on site during the assembly of the first accessories. Specify that a report of
the findings and any recommended actions is to be produced and acted on before
further accessories are assembled.
Ensure that at least two spare joints, one spare termination and sufficient spare
cable are to be available on site together with a complete written assembly
procedure, prior to commencing the commissioning tests. Specify that the supplier
must be able to have appropriate Cable Jointers available for any repair works.
Ensure that equivalent commissioning tests and PD diagnostic tests have been
performed on the cable system in the factory during development (e.g. on the
prequalification tests installation or type test installation).
Ensure that a competent test engineer is to be in charge of the commissioning tests.
Page 277 of 310


United Kingdom
Remedial Action
ER 381
19th February 2010
Specify the test requirements in full.

Ensure that an agreed tests procedure and circuit diagram is available before the
test commences.
Specify that any a) PD diagnostic sensors and b) distributed temperature sensors,
fitted permanently inside the accessories or inside the link boxes must have been
present during all of the prequalification and type approval tests and must be listed
on the type approved drawings, parts lists and jointing instructions.
Allow sufficient time, say three months, within the project schedule for the
possibility that failures (typically of accessories) will occur during the HV AC site
commissioning tests.
At the contract stage, the critical suppliers and contractors must remedy the
situation.
The presence of any partial discharge detected during the commissioning tests
shall be investigated and shall be shown not to have emanated from within the
cable system irrespective of the magnitude or type of partial discharge.
Any failure of the cable or accessories is to be immediately reported and
investigated by the supplier, who is to advise remedial actions supported by a full
technical justification.
15.4 Common mode failure

15.4.1 Repeated latent defect in manufactured cable or accessories
Preventative Actions
As for 15.1.4.
Require the suppliers to provide extended warranties to cover Latent Defects in
manufacture.
Engage a different manufacturer to supply each parallel Group of Cables
Remedial Actions
During the warranty period the supplier must remedy the situation.
Identify cause of failures.
From the quality records identify all suspect joints or cable and monitor, repair or
replace.
After warranty period engage the supplier or another manufacturer:
o For latent defect in cable: to replace all suspect cable spans and associated accessories.
Page 278 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
o For latent defect in joints: to replace all suspect joints with two joints and a short length
of cable
15.4.2 Repeated jointing error

Preventative Actions
As for 15.3.5
Engage a different manufacturer, using different jointers, to supply each parallel
Group of Cables.
Remedial Actions
During the warranty period the supplier must remedy the situation.
From the quality records identify all suspect joints and monitor, repair or replace.
After warranty period engage the supplier or another manufacturer to replace all
suspect joints with two joints and a short length of cable
15.4.3 Third party damage.

Preventative actions
Install each buried group of three single phase cables in individual trenches, widely
spaced apart.
Enforce no dig zone over cable route
Publicise phone before you dig policy
Install mechanical protection around buried cables
Install cables at sufficient depth to avoid damage whilst other services are being
worked upon
Install cables at sufficient depth to avoid damage from agricultural machinery
Install warning tapes and tiles above cables
Install distinguishing coloured backfill or trench fill above cables
Install marker posts above cable route
Install robust barriers around ground level sheath bonding equipment
Prepare detailed route records
Regularly walk over and inspect the route.
Install cables in a tunnel
Hold spare joints and cable to minimise unavailability
Install cable terminations where they will not be a target for malicious damage.
Page 279 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Agree on a maintenance/repair agreement with the supplier.
Remedial Actions
Repair all damaged cables with two joints, or one joint and a termination, and a
length of cable
15.4.4 Fire in tunnel.

Select XLPE cable in preference to SCFF cable

Inhibit auto-reclose
Install each circuit in a separate or segregated tunnel
Install fire detection and fire extinguishing system.
Specify reduced fire propagating cable jackets and robust metallic sheath
Install fire barriers in tunnel to segregate the tunnel and limit the length of fire
damage
Install fire dampers to eliminate the oxygen supply in the event of a fire.
Add intumescent3 coating to the cables
Design to minimise the effects of failure.
Minimise the use of materials with potentially hazardous by-products in the event
of fire.
Remedial Actions
Repair tunnel structure. Replace all damaged cables, accessories, ancillaries and
support structures
15.5 Collateral Damage

15.5.1 Failure of one cable causes damage to another
Ensure cables are spaced and not touching
intumescent paint: a substance which swells as a result of heat exposure and provides a useful degree
of fire protection to the polymeric cable jacket.
Page 280 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Remedial Actions
Repair damaged cables and accessories
15.5.2 Failure of one joint causes damage to another

Install joints direct in the ground and completely surround with backfill.
Install blast proof screens between joints and adjacent cables in manholes or
tunnels
Remedial Actions
Ensure manhole dimensions are suitable to accommodate two sets of repair joints
15.5.3 Failure of one termination causes damage to another

Do not select porcelain insulators for air insulated cable terminations

Specify that air insulated cable terminations should be designed to release internal
pressure vertically and not horizontally
Do not select of oil immersed cable terminations (i.e. direct cable connections into
oil filled equipment such as transformers or reactors)
Remedial Actions
15.5.4 Testing of one cable system causes damage to another
Following failure of a DC jacket test, prohibit the burning out of faults by the
application of continued current as this risks igniting the jacket and spreading fire
to adjacent cables in ducts and tunnels
Use visual inspection instead of DC voltage to check the integrity of cables jacket
in tunnels.
Page 281 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Limit the available energy that can be released in the event of a failure during HV
AC testing by using a resonant test set and not connecting the circuit to the grid for
testing
Remedial Actions
15.5.5 Repair of one cable causes damage to another

Ensure cables are in horizontally flat spaced configuration in buried and duct
systems
Ensure cables in tunnels are in a configuration where all cables can be safely
removed and replaced, generally this implies vertically flat spaced configuration.
Prohibit the use of mechanical excavation immediately above cables or ducts.
Excavate to the side and use hand tools thereafter.
Use only approved and tested sand blasting or water jetting methods to exhume
cables and accessories buried in cement bound sand
Remedial Actions
15.6 Cost risks

Price variance: cable scheme
Increase in number of cables per phase from 2 to 3:
Crossing of obstacles requires a depth at which increased cable spacing is
ineffective in limiting operating temperature to 90oC.
Detailed survey of winter ground temperatures shows need to install deeper
Trial holing reveals unfavourable thermal ground conditions
Trial holing reveals unrecorded major obstacles
Development tests show cable joints unable to operate reliably at -10oC in ground,
requiring installation at greater depth.
Price variance: cable
Copper price
Page 282 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Currency exchange rate

Other material price fluctuations
Optimistic price estimates
Price variance: civil

Labour rates
Material rates
Weather
Unfavourable ground type
Sphagnum moss/muskeg
Rock
Running sand
Waterlogged
Heavy clay
Unsuitable thermal properties
Unexpected obstruction
Optimistic price estimate
Authors:
Unsigned: Electronic copy
Alan Williams
Brian Gregory
Page 283 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
16 DEFINITIONS AND GLOSSARY

Listed below are definitions and descriptions of cable related terminology used in this report and
elsewhere.
500 kV Study
Project
The 500 kV underground cable system described and discussed in this

feasibility study.
AC
Alternating Current. A current that flows alternately in one direction and then
in the reverse direction. In North America, the standard for alternating current is
60 complete cycles each second. Such electricity is said to have a frequency of
60 hertz. Alternating current is used in power systems because it can be
transmitted and distributed more economically than direct current.
Accessories
Parts of the cable system. Terminations that provide connections to other items
of transmission plant or joints that connect lengths of cable. Cable Accessories
are described in more detail in Section 3.4 of this report.
AEIC
Association of Edison Incorporated Companies. AEIC's members are electric

utilities, generating companies, transmitting companies, and distributing
companies from within and outside the United States. AEIC provides
underground cable specifications.
AESO
Alberta Electric System Operator. AESO is an independent, not-for-profit

transmission agency who plans and operates Albertas interconnected electric
system.
AltaLink
AltaLink is a TFO that owns and operates transmission lines and substations. It
is part of the HPT.
Amp
The unit of electric current; the full name is ampere.
Ampacity
The current in amperes a conductor can carry continuously under the conditions
of use without exceeding its temperature rating. It is also known as current
rating. Ampacity is measured in amps.
Ancillaries
Parts of the cable system. Equipment, other than cables and accessories, such
as bonding equipment, used to complete a cable system. It includes equipment
that is used to provide monitoring and maintenance facilities.
Page 284 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Backfill
The materials of suitable thermal properties that are placed around and tamped
over the underground cable and joints to restore the excavation to its final
finish. The materials used immediately around the cables or ducts. It is also the
act of placing and tamping these materials.
BEWAG
Die Burgenlndische Elektrizittswirtschafts-Aktiengesellschaft. The

organisation responsible for the transmission of EHV electricity in Berlin.
BIL
Basic Insulation Impulse Level. The very short duration lightning impulse
voltage to which equipment must be tested.
Bonding
The electrical connection of the cable Sheath or Shield to earth (ground).
Bonding Cables
The insulated conductor forming the connection between the sheath or shield of
the cable, joint or termination base-plate, and a link in the link box.
Cable Clamp
A device for restraining cables against movement; also referred to as a cleat.
Cable Joint
A cable accessory used for connecting lengths of cable together. Cable

Accessories are described in more detail in Section 3.4 of this report.
Cable Jointer
The trained person who assembles cable joints on site. In North America
commonly referred to as a Cable splicer (or journeyman).
Cable Loss
The total energy loss in the form of heat generated in the cable. The Cable Loss
comprises Conductor loss, Dielectric loss and Sheath loss. It is measured in
Watts per metre.
Cable Splice
Another expression for Cable Joint. Cable Accessories are described in more
detail in Section 3.4 of this report.
Cable Splicer
Another expression for Cable Jointer.
Cable System
Cable complete with installed Accessories and Ancillaries which permits flow
of power from one end of the circuit to the other.
Capacitance
That property of a system of conductors and dielectric, which permits the

storage of electric Charge when there is a voltage between the conductors.
Underground cable dielectrics have capacitance.
CBS
Cement Bound Sand. A material commonly used as a Backfill around cables.
Page 285 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
CCI
Cable Consulting International Limited.
Cct
Circuit.
CCTV
Closed Circuit Television.
CESI
CESI is a company located in Milan, Italy, that can test power system
equipment including EHV cable.
Charge
The total amount of electricity that is a) stored in the insulation or b) flows in

the conductor. Current is the rate of flow of Charge. The unit of Charge is a
Coulomb.
Charging Current
The flow of electricity into and out of the cable dielectric. This current flows
whenever the cable is energized with AC voltage in-service, whether or not it is
carrying any useful power.
CIGRE
International Council on Large Electric Systems, an organisation in the field of

high voltage electricity including cable systems. From time to time CIGRE
publish results of surveys and recommendations for test methods.
Circuit
A conductor or a system of conductors through which electric current is

intended to flow. In this study a 500 kV circuit is used to describe an electrical
connection linking two pieces of Transmission Equipment. Whilst several
groups of cables can link the same two pieces of Transmission Equipment, in
order to qualify as separate circuits they must be capable of being switched in or
out independently. A three phase AC circuit includes at least three conductors,
one for each phase. More than one conductor for each of the three phases can
be provided.
Cleat
Another word for cable clamp.
Close Cleated
A way of installing cables in air, whereby the cables are restrained against
lateral and longitudinal movement by locking the cable into position with cleats
located at a comparatively short spacing.
Conductor
A material used for the transmission of electrical current and energy.
Conductor Loss
The energy loss in the form of heat generated in the conductor as a result of the
flow of current. It is measured in Watts per metre.
Page 286 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Conduit
Duct
Current
The flow of electric Charge in a conductor. Current is the rate of flow of

Charge. Current is measured in amps.
Current Rating
Similar to ampacity.
CV
Continuous Vulcanising. The process used for cross linking an extruded XLPE
insulated cable cores.
DC
Direct Current
DESS
Downtown Edmonton Supply and Substation. A 240 kV circuit in Edmonton

utilising three 240 kV XLPE insulated underground cables.
Dielectric
The insulating material in a cable that separates the conductor from the outer
protective covering. Dielectrics are non-metallic. Also known as insulation.
Dielectric Loss
The energy loss within the dielectric of a cable. This loss occurs whenever the
cable is energized on voltage, whether or not it is carrying any useful power.
Direct Buried
A method of installing cables in the ground whereby the cables are intimately
surrounded by, and are in contact with, the backfill. It is often called laid
direct.
Direct Current
Current that flows continuously in the same direction, as opposed to alternating

current. The current supplied from a battery is direct current.
Dissipation Factor
The tangent of the Dielectric Loss Angle, . It is often called tan . A measure
of the energy loss characteristics of a dielectric material. A low Dissipation
factor Dielectric exhibits low energy loss.
DTS
Distributed Temperature Sensing. A system using optical fibres to measure the

temperature at a range of positions. Typically used to measure the temperature
of the outside surface of the cable, or the air temperature within tunnels.
Duct
A conduit or tube designed or used for the accommodation of a cable or wire

underground.
Duct Bank
A number of ducts combined in a group. In this report duct banks are typically
buried in the ground encased in concrete or Fluidized Thermal Backfill (FTB).
Page 287 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Duct-manhole
system
A method of cable installation whereby each single core cable is installed in a

separate pre-installed duct and is joined together in manholes (or vaults).
EHV
Extra High Voltage.
ELECTRA
The Journal published by CIGRE.
EMJ
Extrusion Moulded Joint. This is described more fully in Section 4.5 of this
report.
EPCOR
EPCOR is a TFO that owns and operates electricity distribution & transmission
and water and wastewater facilities in Alberta. It is part of the HPT.
EPDM
Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer. A type of EPR modified to facilitate

sulphur cross linking. Sometimes used for cable accessory insulation with
dicumyl peroxide cross linking.
EPR
Ethylene-Propylene Rubber. A synthetic rubber used for cable accessory

insulation, also used for HV cable insulation.
EPRI
Electric Power Research Institute. EPRI is an independent, non-profit company

performing research, development and design in the electricity sector.
EQ
Extension to prequalification test. A long term test, described in CIGRE

TB 303, performed in lieu of a prequalification test, in cases where a substantial
change had not been made. EQ testing is described in more detail in Section
3.13.1.2 of this report.
Extra High
Voltage
In this report Extra High Voltage cables are those with a nominal system
voltage equal to or greater than 215 kV.
FRE
Fibre Reinforced Epoxy. FRE duct is a type of duct that can be used for cable
duct bank construction.
Frequency
The number of cycles through which an alternating current passes in a second.

The North American standard is 60 cycles per second, known as 60 Hertz.
FTB
Fluidized Thermal Backfill is a backfill with a guaranteed maximum thermal

resistivity. It is installed as a slurry which later sets. It consists of aggregate,
sand, a small amount of cement, water and a fluidizing agent.
Page 288 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
GIL
Gas Insulated Line. GIL can sometimes be used as an alternative to cable. It

uses compressed gas as the insulator around the phase conductor. It is
described in more detail in Section 4.10 of this report.
GIS
Gas Insulated/Immersed Substation/Switchgear. GIS is sometimes used in HV

and EHV substations.
Group of Cables
In this report a Group of Cables is used to describe three single core cables, one
for each phase. In this report one group of three single phase cables would
typically be installed in one trench or ductbank.
GWP
Global Warming Potential. A method of comparing the global warming effect

of a gas to that of carbon dioxide. The reference GWP of carbon dioxide is one.
HDD
Horizontal Directional Drill. A method of crossing below obstructions. A hole

is drilled using a flexible guided drill similar to that used in the oil industry.
Larger diameter reamers are then pulled back through the hole until it is large
enough to pull in a duct or pipe, into which a cable can be installed.
HDPE
High Density Polyethylene. A type of plastic commonly used for cable jackets.
Heartland
Transmission
Project
Heartland Transmission Project involves the construction of a two high voltage

transmission lines, which will connect the Heartland region (northeast of Fort
Saskatchewan) to existing transmission facilities either west of Edmonton or
south of Edmonton.
High Voltage
In this report High Voltage cables are those with a nominal voltage above
36 kV but less than 215 kV.
HPT
Heartland Project Team. The Project team comprise AltaLink and EPCOR.
HTS cable
High Temperature Superconducting Cable. Further details of HTS cable are

given in Section 4.11.
HV
High Voltage.
Hz
Hertz. The unit of frequency for alternating current. Formerly called cycles per
second. The standard frequency for power supply in North America is 60 Hz.
Page 289 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
ICEA
Insulated Cable Engineers Association. ICEA is an organization that develops

cable standards for the electric power, control, and telecommunications
industries. ICEA is a "Not-For-Profit" association whose members are
sponsored by over thirty of North America's cable manufacturers.
ID
Internal Diameter.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission. The IEC prepares and publishes

International Standards for all electrical, electronic and related technologies.
IEEE
Institute of Electrical & Electronics Engineers, Inc. IEEE is a professional

association based in the United States that issues publications and technology
standards.
Induced Voltage
Induced voltages are the voltages which can be induced in power cables and
associated auxiliary cables and other parallel metalwork, due to their proximity
to cables, overhead lines or to natural phenomena.
Insulation
Insulation is a material that resists the flow of electric current. The insulation of
an AC cable is also called the dielectric.
IPCC
Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change
IREQ
The Institut de Recherche d'Hydro-Qubec (Hydro-Qubec's Research

Institute).
Jacket
The outer extruded polymeric layer of a cable. Cable components are described
in more detail in Section 3 of this report.
Joint
See Cable Joint
Joint Bay
A temporary underground chamber used during assembly of the cable joints.

With a direct buried system the joint bays are fully backfilled before the cable
system is put into service.
K.m/W
Degrees Kelvin metres per Watt. A unit of thermal resistivity.
kcmils
Thousands of circular mils. A circular mil is a unit of area, equal to the area of
a circle with a diameter of one mil. A mil is one thousandth of an inch.
Page 290 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
kg/m
Kilograms per metre. A unit of mass per unit length. Often used to describe
the weight of a cable.
kV
Kilovolt equals 1000 volts.
kW
Kilowatt. 1 kilowatt equals 1000 Watts. The unit of real, or useful, electrical
power. Power is the rate of delivery of electrical energy.
LDPE
Low Density Polyethylene. A type of plastic used as the base material for
XLPE cable insulation.
Latent Defect
In this report a Latent Defect is a defect in design, material, product and/or

workmanship which may cause failure or malfunction at a later date, but which
is not discovered during qualification tests or normal production or installation
inspection or tests.
Link box
A box through which cable sheath bonding and/or grounding connections are
made. The box contains removable links and may also contain sheath voltage
limiters.
Link Pillar
Similar to a link box, but installed above ground.
LPP
Laminated Polypropylene Paper. A type of insulating tape which contains

Polypropylene used in SCFF cables. It is described in more detail in Section
4.2 of this report.
LSZH
Low Smoke Zero Halogen. A type of fire performance material commonly

used for cable jackets when the protection of people, buildings and equipment
from toxic and corrosive gasses is critical.
mA/m
Milliamps per metre. A unit of current per unit length. It is commonly used for
charging current in cable dielectric.
Manhole
An accessible underground chamber in which the cable joints are located. It is

not backfilled when the cable is in-service. It is also called a vault.
MDPE
Medium Density Polyethylene. A type of plastic commonly used for cable

jackets.
Min
Minimum.
Page 291 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
mm
Square millimetres. A unit of area. Commonly used to describe the cross

sectional area of cable conductors.
Mutual Heating
The temperature rise on one cable due to the head generation by the adjacent
cables (or any other sources of heat).
MV/m
Megavolts per metre. A unit of electrical field strength or stress used in the
design of cable insulation. One Megavolt equals 1,000,000 volts.
MVA
Millions of Volt-amps. A unit of apparent power. The apparent power

transmitted along a cable system may exceed the real power.
MW
Megawatt. A unit of real, or useful, power; 1 MW equals 1000 kilowatts.
Net Present Value
A single number that expresses the stream of costs in terms of an equivalent

lump sum paid today.
Nominal Value.
nom
Nominal Value
Value by which a quantity is designated. The nominal value is not necessarily

identical to the actual value but is expected to be close to it.
NPV
Net Present Value
OD
Outside Diameter.
OHL
Overhead Line
OPJ
One piece joint. This is described in more detail in Section 4.5 of this report.
Oversheath
Another word for cable jacket.
P&T
Pilot and Telephone. A generic term to describe the additional cables that are
commonly installed alongside power cables.
PD
Partial Discharge.
Partial Discharge
A spark within a small air or gas-filled void in the insulation.
PE
Polyethylene.
Polyethylene
A thermoplastic material that can be extruded.
Page 292 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Poly Vinyl
Chloride
A thermoplastic material that can be extruded.
PVC
Poly Vinyl Chloride.
pF/m
PicoFarads per metre. A unit of capacitance per unit length. It is commonly

used for capacitance of a cable dielectric.
Phase
In this report, a phase is one of the three conductors or cables used for the
transmission of high voltage AC electricity. Each phase of a circuit may
comprise several conductors or cables.
PIB
Poly Iso Butene. One of the types of insulating liquid used to fill some types of
cable Terminations.
PJ
Prefabricated Joint. This is described more fully in section 4.5.
Pothead
Anther word for cable termination.
PQ
Prequalification Tests.
Prequalification
Tests
Prequalification Tests are long term (typically 1 year in duration) tests on cable
systems. The test arrangement shall be representative of the installation design
conditions. Requirements for Prequalification Tests are specified in
IEC 62076[1]. AEIC CS9-06[10] also makes reference to Pre-Qualification tests
which are similar in scope and purpose to those required by IEC 62076.
Testing requirements for 500 kV cable systems are described in more detail in
Section 3.13 of this report.
Private Tests
In this report, Private Tests are those instigated by and conducted on behalf of
manufacturers in the course of their product development. Manufacturers may,
or may not, wish to share the results of such tests with their clients.
Production Tests
Tests conducted on production cables or accessories at the factory. Production

tests include non-destructive tests conducted on all shipping lengths and tests
conducted at specified frequencies on representative samples of cables and
accessories. Production tests are specified in standards and specifications
published by ICEA and AEIC. Production Tests are described as Routine Tests
and Sample Tests in IEC standards. Testing requirements for 500 kV cable
systems are described in more detail in Section 3.13 of this report.
Page 293 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Proving Tests
In this report, the term Proving Tests is taken to include any Prequalification
Tests which are prescribed in published standards and specifications and
specified by the client, plus any additional tests which the client requires to be
satisfactorily passed before acceptance for service.
QC
Quality Control. The process by which the required level of product integrity
and performance is monitored and achieved.
Qualification Test
Qualification Tests are intended to demonstrate the adequacy of designs

supplied by a particular manufacturer. Qualification Tests are specified in
standards and specifications published by ICEA and AEIC. Qualification Tests
are described as Type Tests in IEC Standards. Testing requirements for 500 kV
cable systems are described in more detail in Section 3.13 of this report.
Rated Voltage
The nominal phase to phase operating voltage of the transmission system.
Reactor
A Reactor is an item of electrical equipment that can be used to partially

compensate for the adverse electrical effect of the Capacitance in a long cable
route.
Reel
Cables are stored and transported from the manufacturers works to the
installation site on cable reels. These are also sometimes referred to as cable
drums.
Relative
Permittivity
An electrical property of the cable dielectric indicative of its ability to store

Charge. Relative permittivity is given the symbol . It is used in the calculation
of capacitance and dielectric loss.
Resistance
The opposition to current flow. Resistance is measured in ohms.
Right of Way
A strip of land reserved for public roads, railway tracks, pipelines, supply lines,
communication lines, or other services.
Route Length
In this report the Route Length of the cable is used to describe the distance
along the route between the cable terminations. It is also used to describe the
total route length of a circuit which can comprise both cable and overhead lines,
in which case it is the distance between the substations at each end.
Page 294 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Routine Tests
Tests made by the manufacturer on each manufactured component (length of

cable or accessory) to check that the component meets the specified
requirements. (IEC 62067[1]) Requirements for Type Tests are specified in
standards published by IEC. Testing requirements for 500 kV cable systems are
described in more detail in Section 3.13 of this report. These are also known as
shipping tests.
Sample Tests
Tests made by the manufacturer on samples of complete cables or components

taken from a complete cable or accessory, at a specified frequency, so as to
verify that the finished product meets the specified requirements. (IEC 62067[1])
Requirements for Sample Tests are specified in standards published by IEC.
Testing requirements for 500 kV cable systems are described in more detail in
Section 3.13 of this report.
SCFF
Self Contained Fluid Filled. A type of HV U/G Cable. Detailed descriptions of

SCFF cable systems are given in more detail in Section 4.2 of this report.
Screen
A conducting layer that bounds the inner and outer surface of the cable or
Accessory Insulation. Also known as a Shield.
Screen Interruption An insulated gap within a joint or termination that insulates the screen on one
side of the joint from that on the other side for the purpose of Special Bonding.
Sealing Ends
Another expression for cable Terminations. Cable accessories are described in

more detail in Section 3.4 of this report.
SF6
Sulfur Hexafluoride. An insulating gas used in GIS and GIB.
Sheath
The metallic layer surrounding the cable insulation. Cable sheaths are
described in more detail in Section 3 of this report.
Sheath Loss
The energy loss in the form of heat generated in the sheath as a result of the
flow of current. It is measured in Watts per metre.
Sheath Loss factor
The ratio of the losses in a cable sheath to those in the central conductor. It is
used in the calculation of ampacity and effective resistance.
Page 295 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Sheath Voltage
Limiter
A device with a non-linear resistance. At low voltage the resistance is high; at

high voltage the Resistance is low. The Sheath Voltage Limiter prevents
damage to the cable system by reducing the magnitude of transient voltages that
appear during circuit switching and lightning strikes, a) across the cable jacket
and b) across the screen interruption in joints and terminations.
Shield
A conducting layer that bounds the inner and outer surface of the cable
Insulation. Also known as a Screen. The word Shield is also used for the
integral ground return conductor within some cable constructions.
Silicone Oil
One of the types of insulating liquid used to fill some types of cable
Terminations.
Span
In this report a span is a length of cable between adjacent joints (or a

termination and the nearest joint). A span is sometimes also referred to as a
cable section or reel length.
Special Bonding
The type of sheath or shield bonding in which the flow of circulating current
and generation of unwanted heat is prevented.
Splice
See Cable Splice.
Stage
In this report a stage refers to a part completion of the complete cable system.
Typically the final system might be commissioned in several stages, with the
total transmission capability only being available after completion of the final
stage.
Stress
Electric field strength. Stress is an important factor in the design and

performance of cable systems.
Substation
In this report a Substation is a fenced compound at which the circuit starts and
ends. Other items of electrical equipment may also be located in the compound.
SVL
Sheath Voltage Limiter.
Swathe
In this report a Swathe is the temporary land width used for construction of an
underground cable system. It would typically be bounded by fences during the
construction period.
Tan
The tangent of the dielectric loss angle. It is often called the Dissipation Factor.
Page 296 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
TAT
Type Approval Tests. Equivalent to Type Tests.
TB
Technical Brochure. A document published by CIGRE.
TDR
Time Dependent Reflectometry. TDR is used in the analysis of a conductor

(wire, cable, or fiber optic) by sending a pulsed signal into the conductor, and
then examining the reflection of that pulse.
Termination
In this report the expression Cable Termination is used to describe the

accessories on each end of the cable systems. Cable Accessories are described
in more detail in Section 3.4 of this report.
TFO
Transmission Facility Owners.
Thermal
Resistivity
The property of a material to oppose heat flow. Thermal Resistivity is measured

in K.m/W.
Transition Station
In this report a Transition Station is a fenced compound at which an overhead

line is connected to an underground cable. Other items of electrical equipment
may also be located in the compound.
Transmission
The process of transporting electric energy in bulk on high voltage lines from
the generating facility to the local distribution facility for delivery to retail
customers.
TSB
Thermally Stabilised Backfill. Backfill material that has a guaranteed

maximum value of thermal resistivity irrespective of moisture content or
temperature.
Type Tests
Type Tests are intended to demonstrate the adequacy of designs supplied by a

particular manufacturer. Requirements for Type Tests are specified in
standards published by IEC. Testing requirements for 500 kV cable systems are
described in more detail in Section 3.13 of this report. They are also known as
qualification tests.
U is the abbreviation given in IEC standards to the rated power frequency

system voltage between conductors for which the cable is designed.
Uo
Uo is the abbreviation given in IEC standards to the rated power frequency

voltage between conductor and earth or metallic shield for which the cable is
designed.
Page 297 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Um
Um is the abbreviation given in IEC standards to is the maximum value of the

"highest system voltage'' for which the equipment may be used.
V is the abbreviation given in ICEA and AEIC standards and specifications to

the nominal phase-to-phase operating voltage of the system. It is equivalent to
U in IEC standards.
Vault
A Manhole in which cable joints are located.
Vg
Vg is the abbreviation given in ICEA and AEIC standards and specifications to

the nominal phase to ground operating voltage. It is equivalent to Uo in IEC
standards.
Vm
Vm is the abbreviation given in ICEA and AEIC standards and specifications to

the maximum continuous phase-to-phase system operating voltage. It is
equivalent to Um in IEC standards.
Void
A cavity in the cable or accessory insulation, either within solid or liquid

insulation, or at the interface with another insulating layer or screen.
Volt
A volt is a unit of potential difference measured between two points. Potential

difference is the electrical force that drives the flow of electrical charge along a
conductor (current).
Vt
Vt is the abbreviation given in ICEA and AEIC standards and specifications to

the phase-to-ground test voltage.
Watts. A Watt is a unit of power.
Water Tree
A defect in XLPE insulation which is initiated by moisture and an electric field.
W/m
Watts per metre. A unit of power per unit length. It is commonly used for
power losses from a cable.
XLPE
Cross Linked Polyethylene. A type of insulation used in underground cables.
Relative permittivity.
/m
MicroOhms per metre. A unit of electrical Resistance per unit length. It is

commonly used for resistance of a conductor or cable.
Page 298 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
FEASIBILITY STUDY REFERENCES

1
IEC 62067 Edition 1.1 2006, Power Cables with Extruded Insulation and their Accessories for Rated
Voltages above 150 kV (Um = 170 kV) up to 500 kV (Um = 550 kV) Test Methods and
Requirements.
2
Cao X, Liu Y, Fang H and Gong Z, 500 kV Power Supply Cable Project for City Central Zone of
Shanghai, Paper B1-106, CIGRE Conference, 2008, Paris.
3
Parpal JL et al, 'Prequalification Testing of 345kV Extruded Insulation Cable System', Paper 21-101,
CIGRE Conference 1998, Paris.
4
Parpal JL et al, 'Prequalification Testing of 290/525 (525) kV Extruded Cable System at IREQ', Paper
A2.3, Jicable Conference 1999, Versailles.
5
Williams DE, Natural and Forced Cooling of HV Underground Cables: UK practice, pp137 161,
IEE PROC, Vol 129 Pt. A. No 3 May 1982.
6
IEEE 404-2006, Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2,500
V to 500,000 V, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, March 2007, ISBN: 0738152943.
7
IEEE 48-2009, Standard for Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating Current Cable
Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 765 kV or
Extruded Insulation Rated 2.5 kV through 500 kV, Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,
August 2009.
8
ICEA S-108-720-2004, Standard for Extruded Insulation Power Cables Rated above 46 through 345
kV.
9
AEIC CS2-97 (6th Edition), Specification for Impregnated Paper and Laminated Paper
Polypropylene Insulated Cable, High Pressure Pipe Type, March 1997.
10
AEIC CS9-06 (1st Edition), Specification for Extruded Insulation Power Cables and Their
Accessories Rated Above 46kV through 345 kV ac, 2006.
11
IEC 60840 ed 3.0, Power Cables with Extruded Insulation and their Accessories for Rated Voltages
above 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) up to 150 kV (Um = 170 kV) - Test methods and requirements, April
2004.
12
Arkell C.A, Blake W.E, Brealey A.D.R, Hacke K.J.H and Hance, G.E.A, Design and Construction
of the 400 kV Cable System for the Severn Tunnel, Vol 124, No 3, Proceedings IEE, London.
13
Ray J.J, Arkell C.A, and Flack H.W, 525 kV Self-Contained Oil-Filled Cable Systems for Grand
Coulee Third Power Plant Design and Development, Paper T73, IEE, 1973, London.
14
Ray J.J, Arkell C.A and Flack H.W, 525 kV Self-Contained Oil-Filled Cable Systems for Grand
Coulee Third Power Plant Design and Development, IEEE Trans. PAS-93, 1974.
15
Arkell C.A, Johnson D.F and Ray J.J, 525 kV Self-Contained Oil-Filled Cable Systems for Grand
Coulee Third Power Plant Design Proving Tests, IEEE Trans. PAS-93, 1974.
16
Rosevear R. D and Vecelli B, Cables for 750/1100 kV Transmission, 2nd IEE International
Conference on Power Cables for 220 kV and Above, 1979, London.
Page 299 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
17
Foxall R.G, Bjorlow-Larsen K and Bazzi G, Design, Manufacturing and Installation of a 525 kV
Alternating Current Submarine Cable Link from Mainland Canada to Vancouver Island, Paper 21-04,
CIGRE Conference, 1984, Paris.
18
Cherukupalli S, MacPhail G.A, Nelson R.E, Jue J.S and Gurney J.H, Application of Distributed
Fibre Optic Temperature Sensing on BC Hydros 525 kV Submarine Cable System, Paper B1-203,
19
Minemura S, et al, Completion of Installation of 500 kV PPLP-insulated Self-contained Oil Filled
Cable Along Seto Ohashi Bridge for Honshu-Shikoku Interconnecting Transmission Line, Sumitomo
Electric Technical Review, 29, 1990.
20
EPRI Underground Transmission Systems Reference Book, Chapter 4, Cable Construction:
Extruded Dielectrics, 2006 Edition, EPRI, Palo Alto, CA:2007.1014840.
21
Toya A, Kobashi K, Okuyama Y, Sakuma S, Katakai S and Kato K, Higher-stress Designed XLPE
Insulated Cable in Japan, Paper B1-111, CIGRE Conference, 2004, Paris.
22
EPRI Underground Transmission Systems Reference Book, Chapter 8, Cable Systems
Accessories, 2006 Edition, EPRI, Palo Alto, CA:2007.1014840.
23
Attwood J.R, Gregory B, Dickinson M, Hampton R.N and Svoma R, Development of High Stress
HV and EHV XLPE Cable Systems, Paper 21-08, CIGRE Conference 1998, Paris.
24
Andersen P, et al, Development of a 420 kV XLPE Cable System for the Metropolitan Power
Project in Copenhagen, Paper 21-201, CIGRE Conference 1996, Paris.
25
Helling K, Henningsen C.H, Polster K and Schroth R.G, Power Supply for the City of Berlin: Are
380 kV XLPE Cables a Safe Alternative to Long-Time Proved LPOF-Cables?, Paper 21-106, CIGRE
Conference, 1994, Paris.
26
Henningsen C.H, Muller, K.B, Polster K and Schroth R.G, New 400 kV XLPE Long Distance Cable
Systems, Their First Applications for the Power Supply of Berlin, Paper 21-109, CIGRE Conference,
1998, Paris.
27
Kaminaga K, et al, Long Term Test of 500 kV XLPE Cables and Accessories, Paper 21-202,
28
Ohata K, et al, Construction of Long Distance 500 kV XLPE Cable Line, Paper 31-36, Jicable
1999, Versailles.
29
Ohne H, et al, Construction of the Worlds First Long-Distance 500 kV XLPE Cable Line, Paper
21-106, CIGRE Conference, 2000, Paris.
30
Granadinor R, Portillo M, Planas J and Schell F, Undergrounding the First 400kV Transmission
Line in Spain Using 2500mm2 XLPE Cables in a Ventilated Tunnel: The Madrid Barajas Airport
Project, Paper A.1.2, Jicable Conference, 2003, Versailles.
31
Miller D, London Infrastructure Project, CIGRE Electra 206, PP 24-35, February 2002.
32
S Sadler, S Sutton, H Memmer and J Kaumanns, 1600 MVA Electrical Power Transmission with an
EHV XLPE Cable System in the Underground of London, Paper B1-108, CIGRE Conference, 2004,
Paris.
33
S. Sutton. R Plath and G Schroder, The St. Johns Wood-Elstree Experience- Testing a 20 km long
400 kV XLPE-Insulated Cable System After Installation, Paper A2.2, Jicable Conference, 2007
Versailles.
Page 300 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
34
Bjorlow-Larsen K, Del Brenna M, Kaumanns J, Meier R, Kirchner M and Argaut P, Large Projects
of EHV Underground Cable Systems, Paper A.25, Jicable Conference, 2003.
35
Argaut P, Bjorlow-Larsen K, Zaccone E, Gustafsson A, Schell F, Waschk W, Large Projects of
EHV Underground Cable Systems, Paper A.2.1, Jicable Conference, 2007.
36
Smith C, Galloway S, Gregory B, Lloyd S and Notman D, The Development of an Ultrasound
Quality Monitoring Process for the Manufacture of Enhanced Reliability HV and EHV XLPE Cables,
Paper A.2.6, Jicable Conference, 2003, Versailles.
37
Fudamoto K, Watanabe Y, Kish K, Uozumi T and Terayama A, Development of One-Piece Type
Joint (Self pressurized Joint) for 400 kV XLPE Cable, Paper A.1.3, Jicable Conference, 2007,
Versailles.
38
Kuwaki, A, Hayashi K, Kato, K and Imai N, Development of 400 kV XLPE Cable and
Accessories, Paper A.1.1, Jicable Conference, 2007, Versailles.
39
Kobashi K, Ban S, Kanaoka M, Yonemura T and Ninobe H, Completion of Prefabricated Joint for
500 kV XLPE Cable, Paper A.5.4, Jicable Conference, 2003, Versailles.
40
CIGRE Technical Brochure 338, Statistics of Underground Cables in Power Networks, Working
Group B1.07, December 2007.
41
EPRI Underground Transmission Systems Reference Book: 2006 Edition, EPRI Palo Alto,
CA:2007. 1014840.
42
Khajavi M.B, and Zenger W, Design and Commissioning Test of a 230-kV Cross-linked
Polyethylene Insulated Cable System, Paper A.1.1, Jicable Conference, 2003, Versailles.
43
Mikkelsen S.D and Argaut P, New 400 kV Underground Cable System Project in Jutland
(Denmark), Paper A.4.3, Jicable Conference, 2003, Versailles.
44
Jensen C and Argaut P, 400 kV Underground Cables in Rural Areas, Paper B1-211, CIGRE
45
Rendina R, Posati A, Rebolini, Bruno G, Bocchi F, Marelli M and Orini A, The New Turbigo-Rho
380 kV Transmission Line: An Example of the Use of Underground XLPE Cables in a Meshed
Transmission Grid, Paper B1-302, CIGRE Conference, 2006, Paris.
46
Vavre J and Wanda M, 400 kV Vienna -The Vienna 400 kV North Input, Paper B1-101, CIGRE
47
Matallana J, Gahungu F, Duvivier M, Dubois, D and Mirebeau P, 400 kV 2500 mm2 XLPE Cable
System Prequalification and Type Test for Middle East Environment, Paper A.1.6, Jicable Conference,
2007, Versailles.
48
Koreman C.G.A, Aanhaanen G.L.P, Van Rossum J.C.M, Koning R.F.F, Boone W and De Wild F.H,
Development of a New 380 kV Double Circuit XLPE Insulated Cable System in the Netherlands,
Paper B1-107, CIGRE Conference, 2006, Paris.
49
CIGRE Technical Brochure 379, Update of Service Experience of HV Underground and Submarine
Cable Systems, Working Group B1.10, April 2009.
50
Electra 151, Recommendations for Electrical Tests Prequalification and Development on Extruded
Cables and Accessories at Voltages of Greater than 150 kV and Less than Equal to 400 kV, CIGRE
WG 21.03, December 1993.
Page 301 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
51
CIGRE Technical Brochure 303, Revision of Qualification Procedures for HV and EHV AC
Extruded Underground Cable Systems, Working Group B1.06, August 2006.
52
Bolsa A et al, 'Prequalification Test Experience on EHV XLPE Cable Systems', Paper 21-104,
53
Technical Brochure 218, Gas Insulated Transmission Lines (GIL), CIGRE Joint Working Group
23/21/33.15, February 2003.
54
EPRI Underground Transmission Systems Reference Book, Chapter 7, Cable Constructions:
Special Applications, 2006 Edition, EPRI, Palo Alto, CA:2007.1014840.
55
Feldmann D et al, Development of a Directly Buried 400 kV Gas Insulated Line Technology, Paper
21/23/33-02, CIGRE Conference 2000, Paris.
56
Nojima T et al, Installation of 275 kV- 3.3 km Gas-insulated Transmission Line for Underground
Large Capacity Transmission in Japan, Paper 21/23/33-01, CIGRE Conference 1998.
57
J M Delcoustal, A Very large GIL Project: PP9, IEEE PES Summer Meeting Panel Session on GIL,
July 1997, Berlin.
58
J Alter et al, N2/SF6 Gas-Insulated Line of a New GIL Generation in Service, paper 21-204, CIGRE
59
V. Piputvat et al, 550 kV Gas-Insulated Transmission Line for High Power Rating in Thailand,
Paper B1-107, CIGRE Conference, 2004, Paris.
60
P. Coventry et al, New Generation of GIL Characteristics and Applications, Paper B1-103, CIGRE
61
D Kunze et al, Gas-Insulated Transmission Lines Underground Power Transmission Achieving a
Maximum of Operating Safety and Reliability, Paper A 3.6, 2007 Jicable Conference, Versailles
62
M. Tinkham, Introduction to Superconductivity, unabridged republication of Second Edition, 1997,
by Dover 2004, ISBN 0-486-43503-2.
63
BICC Cables, Electric Cables Handbook, Third Edition, Chapter 44, Introduction to
Superconductivity, Chapter 45, High Temperature Superconductors and Chapter 46, High
Temperature Superconducting Power Cables, Blackwell Science, 0-632-04075-0.
64
Technical Brochure 229, High temperature Superconducting (HTS) Cable Systems, CIGRE
Working Group 21.20, June 2003.
65
A Geschiere et al, Optimizing Cable Layout for Long Length High Temperature Superconducting
Cable System, Paper B1-307, CIGRE Conference, 2008, Paris.
66
A Geschiere et al, Installing a Long Distance HTS Cable, Paper A 3.3, 2007, Jicable Conference,
Versailles.
67
S Norman et al, Design and Development of Cold-Dielectric (CD) High-temperature
Superconducting Cable System for Bulk Power Transmission at Voltages up to 225 kV, Paper 21-205,
68
M Nassi et al, Design Development and Testing of the First Factory Made High Temperature
Superconducting Cable for 115 kV 400 MVA, Paper 21-202, CIGRE Conference 1998, Paris.
69
J Ostergaard and O Tonnesen, Design, Installation and Operation of Worlds First High
Temperature Superconducting Power Cable in a Utility Power Network, Paper 21-205, CIGRE
Technical Conference 2002, Paris.
Page 302 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
70
S. Honjo et al, Verification Tests of a 66 kV High-TC Superconducting Cable System for Practical
Use, Paper 21-202, CIGRE Technical Conference, 2002, Paris.
71
M. Ichikawa et al, Demonstration and Verification Test Results of 500-m HTS Power Cable, Paper
B1-104, CIGRE Conference, 2006, Paris.
72
S.I. Jeon, et al, Development of Superconducting Cable System for Bulk Power Delivery, Paper
B1-06, CIGRE Conference, 2006, Paris.
73
HM Jang et al, Type Test Results for 22.9 kV 50 MVA HTS Cable System in Korea, Paper B1108, CIGRE Technical Conference, 2008, Paris.
74
D Lindsay et al, Installation and Commissioning of TRIAX HTS Cable, paper A.3.2, Jicable 2007
Conference, Versailles.
75
D Lindsay et al, Operating Experience of 13.2 kV Superconducting Cable System at AEP Bixby
Station, Paper B1-107, CIGRE Conference, 2008, Paris.
76
J-M Saugrain et al, Superconducting Cables Status and Applications, Paper A 3.1, Jicable 2007
Conference, Versailles.
77
F Schmidt et al, Development and Demonstration of a Long Length Transmission Voltage Cold
Dielectric Superconducting Cable to Operate in the Long Island Power Authority, Paper A.3.4. 2007
Jicable Conference, Versailles.
78
Argaut P, Bjorlow-Larsen K, Zaccone E, Gustafsson A, Schell F, Waschk W, Large Projects of
EHV Underground Cable Systems, Paper A.2.1, Jicable Conference, 2007.
79
Canadian Electricity Association. Forced Outage Performance of Transmission Equipment 2007.
80
IEC 60287-3-1: 1999. Electric Cables Calculation of the Current Rating Part 3-1: Sections on
Operating Conditions Reference Operating Conditions and Selection of Cable Type, Item 4.3.
81
Appendix 608 Technical Specification for the 240 kV Transmission Cable, Accessories and
Installation, Supply and Install Transmission Cable and Accessories for the Downtown Edmonton,
240 kV Supply Line. Item 8.3, page 10.
82
CEGB Design Memorandum 099/56, Current Rating Requirements for Buried Cables, 132, 275 and
400 kV Systems, Section 10, November 1968.
83
IEC 60287--1: 2006. Electric Cables Calculation of the Current Rating Part 1-1: Current rating
equations (100 % load factor) and calculation of losses General.
84
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection, Guidelines for Limiting Exposure
to Time-varying Electric, Magnetic, and Electromagnetic Fields (up to 300 GHz), (ICNIRP
Guidelines) Health Physics, Volume 74, Number 4, April 1998.
Page 303 of 310
Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables

for use in the Edmonton region of Alberta, Canada

United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
APPENDICES
Appendix: Overhead line performance and statistics
ALTALINK & EPCOR

Heartland Underground: 500kV Overhead Line Forced Outage Performance Summary
February, 2010
Appendix : Total capital cost estimate for each scenario
ALTALINK & EPCOR

Summary: capital cost estimate for each scenario.
List of itemised capital cost estimates for each scenario.
February, 2010
Appendix : Economic comparison of scenarios for the 500 kV underground cable feasibility
report
AESO
Revenue requirement
System energy loss
Discount rate used in net present value calculations
February, 2010
Appendix: Project schedule
500 kV Heartland Schedule

October 2009
Distribution:
AESO, HPT, CCI

Page 304 of 310
Cable Consulting International Ltd

Registered in England and Wales No. 4234974
Registered office: 74 College Road, Maidstone, Kent, ME15 6SL, United Kingdom


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Appendix: System study (reactor requirements, voltage profiles and losses)
Teshmont
Underground Cable Project. Case Study for Underground Cable Sections on the 500 kV AC Lines
Between Two Stations, Station A and Station B Heartland
Technical Memorandum 2074-002-147-Rev11
2010 February 10
Study Report Sections:
Executive Summary
1. Introduction
2. Shunt compensation
3. Study details (criteria and scenarios)
4. Network data
5. Results
6. Reactor requirements
7. Voltage profiles
Appendix A: Evaluation of Losses on the 500 kV AC Lines Between Station A and Station B
Appendix B: Case Study: Analysis of Scenarios without Shunt Compensation
Appendix: Generic crossings route maps: East TUC
ALTALINK & EPCOR

Heartland Underground Feasibility Study-East TUC
Drawing (Aerial photograph) 1-16
Project No: 062235
November 16, 2009
Table of Crossing ID identification numbers and crossing facility types.
Page 305 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
Appendix: Generic crossings route maps: West TUC
ALTALINK & EPCOR

Heartland Underground Feasibility Study-West TUC
Drawing (Aerial photograph) 1-14
Project No: 062235
November 12, 2009
Table of Crossing ID identification numbers and crossing facility types.
Appendix: Transmission System Requirements
AESO
Transmission System Requirements, Heartland Project,
February 11, 2010
Appendix: Analysis of the minimum winter temperatures recorded on the 240kV DESS
circuit in Edmonton in 2009
Cable Consulting International

ER 391: Analysis of the minimum Winter Temperatures recorded on the 240kV DESS Circuit in
Edmonton in 2009,
16th October 2009
10 Appendix: The Damage Prevention Process In Alberta

The Damage Prevention Process In Alberta.
Roles, Responsibilities And Expectations Of The Stakeholders In The Prevention Of Damage To
Buried Facilities
Alberta Damage Prevention Council
Alberta Chapter
Canadian / American Public Works Association
Issue No. 3,
05 September 2007
Page 306 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
11 Appendix: Potential overview of environmental effects of undergrounding

Stantec
Overview of Potential Environmental Effects of Underground Transmission Lines
November 2009
12 Appendix: Cable reel transportation study of feasibility and costs

SNC- Lavalin
Heartland 500 kV Underground Cable Project
Transportation Study Report
November 2009
13 Appendix: Magnetic fields for cable and overhead line

ALTALINK & EPCOR
2 graphs:
Heartland D/C 500 kV Low Reactance Tower (2 x 500 MVA) Magnetic Fields
Heartland Underground Cable - 500 kV & 500 MVA Magnetic Fields (Direct Burial)
December 2009
14 AESO introduction letter for CCI

AESO
Letter of Introduction re: Underground Cable Feasibility study
July 8, 2009
15 500kV Heartland inquiry

CABLE SYSTEM INQUIRY
500 kV HEARTLAND TRANSMISSION PROJECT
13th August 2009
Page 307 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
16 Appendix: 500kV Heartland transmission project response template

CABLE SYSTEM INQUIRY
500 kV HEARTLAND TRANSMISSION PROJECT
14th August 2009
17 Appendix : AIS transition station scope of work

ALTALINK EPCOR
AIS Transition Station:
Revision 0
October 2009
18 Appendix: Heartland underground construction: construction overview

ALTALINK & EPCOR
Document: Heartland Underground: Construction Overview
November 2009
19 Appendix : Heartland underground line-civil estimate

ALTALINK EPCOR
Heartland Underground Line:
Civil Estimate
Revision 0
October 2009
Page 308 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
20 Appendix: Heartland underground crossing requirements

ALTALINK & EPCOR
Document: Heartland Underground Crossing Requirements
November 2009
21 Appendix : Heartland overhead line scope of work

ALTALINK EPCOR
Heartland Overhead Line:
Bill of materials and assumed tower mix to connect substation 2 through a 500 kV double circuit link to
substation 1. (No costs included).
Revision 0
October 2009
22 Appendix : Substation 1 scope of work

ALTALINK EPCOR
Substation 1:
Revision 0
October 2009
23 Appendix : Substation 2 scope of work

ALTALINK EPCOR
Substation 2:
Revision 0
October 2009
Page 309 of 310


United Kingdom
ER 381
19th February 2010
24 Appendix: Owners risk briefing

ALTALINK & EPCOR
Heartland Underground:
Owners Risk Briefing
October 2009
25 Appendix: Overhead and underground line maintenance

ALTALINK & EPCOR
Heartland Underground:
Overhead and Underground line maintenance
October 2009
26 Appendix: Drawings of termination stations, cable trenches, and obstruction crossings

ALTALINK EPCOR
14 drawings prepared by SNC-Lavalin T & D
List of drawings
---------------------------------End
Page 310 of 310

CCI Feasibility Study For 500 KV AC Underground Cables

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CCI Feasibility Study For 500 KV AC Underground Cables

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

FEASIBILITY STUDY FOR 500 kV AC UNDERGROUND CABLES

Alan Williams BSc CEng MIET

AESO, HPT, CCI

Cable Consulting International Ltd

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

4.10 Gas insulated lines ................................................................................................................ 130

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

7.13 Tunnels.................................................................................................................................. 190

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

15.2.1 Failure to attribute responsibility: ................................................................................. 274

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

Appendix : Heartland underground line-civil estimate............................................................. 308

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

Figure 31, Cable terminations into gas immersed switchgear ................................................................ 68

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

CCI Cable Consulting International Ltd

Feasibility study for 500 kV AC underground cables for

PO Box 1, Sevenoaks TN14 7EN

19th February 2010

Technical feasibility of 500 kV underground cable systems

500 kV Study Project schedule